GA5J 19A321 AA 2016 MKS owner.lincoln.com...

O w n e r ’ s M a n u a l

2 01 6 M K S

November 2015

First Printing

Owner’s Manual

Lincoln MKS

Litho in U.S.A.

GA

5J 19

A32

1 AA

20

16 M

KS

O

wn

er

’s M

an

ua

l

owner.lincoln.com lincolncanada.com

The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, designor equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in anyform by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.© Ford Motor Company 2015

All rights reserved.Part Number: 20151009202856

IntroductionAbout This Manual................................................7Symbols Glossary..................................................7Data Recording.......................................................9California Proposition 65..................................10Perchlorate..............................................................11Lincoln Automotive Financial Services........11Replacement Parts Recommendation.........11Special Notices.....................................................12Mobile Communications Equipment...........12Export Unique Options......................................13

EnvironmentProtecting the Environment............................14

Child SafetyGeneral Information............................................15Installing Child Restraints.................................17Booster Seats.......................................................23Child Restraint Positioning..............................25Child Safety Locks...............................................27

SeatbeltsPrinciple of Operation.......................................28Fastening the Seatbelts...................................29Seatbelt Height Adjustment............................31

Seatbelt Warning Lamp and IndicatorChime..................................................................32

Seatbelt Reminder.............................................33Child Restraint and Seatbelt

Maintenance.....................................................34

Personal Safety System™Personal Safety System™..............................36

Supplementary RestraintsSystem

Principle of Operation........................................37Driver and Passenger Airbags........................38Front Passenger Sensing System.................39Side Airbags...........................................................41Safety Canopy™.................................................42Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator............44Airbag Disposal...................................................45

Keys and Remote ControlsGeneral Information on Radio

Frequencies......................................................46Remote Control...................................................47Replacing a Lost Key or Remote

Control................................................................49

MyKey™Principle of Operation.......................................50Creating a MyKey.................................................51Clearing All MyKeys............................................52Checking MyKey System Status....................53Using MyKey With Remote Start

Systems..............................................................54MyKey Troubleshooting....................................54

LocksLocking and Unlocking.....................................56Keyless Entry........................................................59Interior Luggage Compartment

Release................................................................61

SecurityPassive Anti-Theft System.............................63Anti-Theft Alarm................................................64

Steering WheelAdjusting the Steering Wheel........................65Audio Control.......................................................65Voice Control........................................................66Cruise Control......................................................66Information Display Control............................67Heated Steering Wheel....................................67

1

MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing

Table of Contents

PedalsAdjusting the Pedals.........................................68

Wipers and WashersWindshield Wipers.............................................69Autowipers............................................................69Windshield Washers..........................................70

LightingGeneral Information............................................71Lighting Control....................................................71Autolamps.............................................................72Instrument Lighting Dimmer...........................73Headlamp Exit Delay.........................................73Daytime Running Lamps..................................73Automatic High Beam Control.......................74Front Fog Lamps.................................................75Adaptive Headlamps.........................................75Direction Indicators............................................76Interior Lamps......................................................76Ambient Lighting.................................................77

Windows and MirrorsPower Windows...................................................78Global Opening and Closing...........................79Exterior Mirrors.....................................................79

Interior Mirror.........................................................81Sun Visors...............................................................81Sun Shades............................................................81Moonroof...............................................................82

Instrument ClusterGauges....................................................................84Warning Lamps and Indicators.....................85Audible Warnings and Indicators..................87

Information DisplaysGeneral Information..........................................89Information Messages......................................95

Climate ControlAutomatic Climate Control...........................105Hints on Controlling the Interior

Climate.............................................................106Heated Windows and Mirrors.......................107Cabin Air Filter....................................................108Remote Start......................................................108

SeatsSitting in the Correct Position......................109Head Restraints.................................................109Power Seats..........................................................111

Memory Function...............................................114Climate Controlled Seats................................115Rear Seat Armrest..............................................117

Universal Garage Door OpenerUniversal Garage Door Opener.....................119

Auxiliary Power PointsAuxiliary Power Points.....................................124

Storage CompartmentsCenter Console...................................................126Overhead Console............................................126

Starting and Stopping theEngine

General Information..........................................127Keyless Starting..................................................127Starting a Gasoline Engine............................128Engine Block Heater.........................................130

Fuel and RefuelingSafety Precautions............................................132Fuel Quality..........................................................132Fuel Filler Funnel Location.............................133Running Out of Fuel..........................................133

2


Table of Contents

Refueling...............................................................134Fuel Consumption............................................136Emission Control System...............................137

TransmissionAutomatic Transmission................................140

All-Wheel DriveUsing All-Wheel Drive.....................................143

BrakesGeneral Information.........................................150Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock

Brakes................................................................150Parking Brake.......................................................151Hill Start Assist....................................................151

Traction ControlPrinciple of Operation......................................153Using Traction Control.....................................153

Stability ControlPrinciple of Operation.....................................154Using Stability Control....................................155

Parking AidsPrinciple of Operation.....................................156Rear Parking Aid................................................156Front Parking Aid...............................................157Active Park Assist..............................................158Rear View Camera............................................162

Cruise ControlPrinciple of Operation.....................................166Using Cruise Control........................................166Using Adaptive Cruise Control.....................167

Driving AidsDriver Alert............................................................174Lane Keeping System......................................175Blind Spot Information System...................179Cross Traffic Alert..............................................182Steering................................................................186Collision Warning System..............................187Drive Control.......................................................190

Load CarryingLoad Limit............................................................192

TowingTowing a Trailer..................................................201

Recommended Towing Weights................202Essential Towing Checks..............................204Transporting the Vehicle...............................206Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels.........206

Driving HintsBreaking-In.........................................................208Economical Driving.........................................208Driving Through Water...................................208Floor Mats...........................................................209

Roadside EmergenciesRoadside Assistance.........................................211Hazard Warning Flashers................................212Fuel Shutoff.........................................................212Jump Starting the Vehicle..............................213Post-Crash Alert System................................215

Customer AssistanceGetting the Services You Need....................216In California (U.S. Only)...................................217The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto

Line Program (U.S. Only)...........................218Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program

(Canada Only)...............................................219Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and

Canada..............................................................219

3


Table of Contents

Ordering Additional Owner'sLiterature.........................................................220

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only).......220Reporting Safety Defects (Canada

Only)...................................................................221

FusesFuse Specification Chart...............................223Changing a Fuse................................................237

MaintenanceGeneral Information.......................................240Opening and Closing the Hood..................240Under Hood Overview - 3.5L

Ecoboost™.....................................................242Under Hood Overview - 3.7L........................244Engine Oil Dipstick...........................................245Engine Oil Check...............................................245Oil Change Indicator Reset...........................246Engine Coolant Check.....................................247Automatic Transmission Fluid Check......250Brake Fluid Check.............................................254Power Steering Fluid Check.........................254Washer Fluid Check.........................................254Fuel Filter.............................................................255Changing the 12V Battery..............................255Checking the Wiper Blades...........................257

Changing the Wiper Blades..........................257Adjusting the Headlamps.............................258Changing a Bulb...............................................259Bulb Specification Chart...............................260Changing the Engine Air Filter.....................262

Vehicle CareGeneral Information........................................263Cleaning Products............................................263Cleaning the Exterior......................................264Waxing..................................................................265Cleaning the Engine........................................265Cleaning the Windows and Wiper

Blades...............................................................265Cleaning the Interior.......................................266Cleaning the Instrument Panel and

Instrument Cluster Lens............................266Cleaning Leather Seats..................................267Repairing Minor Paint Damage...................267Cleaning the Alloy Wheels...........................268Vehicle Storage.................................................268

Wheels and TiresTire Care...............................................................270Using Snow Chains..........................................285Tire Pressure Monitoring System...............286

Changing a Road Wheel................................289Technical Specifications...............................294

Capacities and SpecificationsEngine Specifications - 3.5L

Ecoboost™....................................................296Engine Specifications - 3.7L.........................297Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Ecoboost™..........298Motorcraft Parts - 3.7L...................................299Vehicle Identification Number....................299Vehicle Certification Label...........................300Transmission Code Designation..................301Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L

Ecoboost™....................................................302Capacities and Specifications - 3.7L.........307

Audio SystemGeneral Information.........................................313Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/

FM/CD...............................................................314Media Hub............................................................316

AccessoriesAccessories..........................................................317

Extended Service Plan (ESP)Extended Service Plan (ESP).......................319

4


Table of Contents

Scheduled MaintenanceGeneral Maintenance Information..............321Normal Scheduled Maintenance...............325Special Operating Conditions Scheduled

Maintenance..................................................328Scheduled Maintenance Record................332

AppendicesEnd User License Agreement......................352

5


Table of Contents

6


ABOUT THIS MANUALThank you for choosing Lincoln. Werecommend that you take some time to getto know your vehicle by reading this manual.The more that you know about it, the greaterthe safety and pleasure you will get fromdriving it.

WARNINGDriving while distracted can result inloss of vehicle control, crash and injury.We strongly recommend that you use

extreme caution when using any device thatmay take your focus off the road. Yourprimary responsibility is the safe operationof your vehicle. We recommend against theuse of any handheld device while driving andencourage the use of voice-operated systemswhen possible. Make sure you are aware ofall applicable local laws that may affect theuse of electronic devices while driving.

Note: This manual describes product featuresand options available throughout the range ofavailable models, sometimes even before theyare generally available. It may describe optionsnot fitted to your vehicle.

Note: Some of the illustrations in this manualmay show features as used in different models,so may appear different to you on your vehicle.Note: Always use and operate your vehicle inline with all applicable laws and regulations.Note: Pass on this manual when selling yourvehicle. It is an integral part of the vehicle.This manual may qualify the location of acomponent as left-hand side or right-handside. The side is determined when facingforward in the seat.

E154903

Right-hand sideALeft-hand sideB

Protecting the EnvironmentYou must play your part in protecting theenvironment. Correct vehicle usage and theauthorized disposal of waste, cleaning andlubrication materials are significant stepstoward this aim.

SYMBOLS GLOSSARYThese are some of the symbols you may seeon your vehicle.

Safety alert

See Owner's Manual

E162384

Air conditioning system

Anti-lock braking system

Avoid smoking, flames or sparks

Battery

7


Introduction

Battery acid

Brake fluid - non petroleum based

Brake system

Cabin air filter

Check fuel cap

Child safety door lock or unlock

Child seat lower anchor

Child seat tether anchor

E71340

Cruise control

Do not open when hot

Engine air filter

Engine coolant

Engine coolant temperature

Engine oil

Explosive gas

Fan warning

Fasten seatbelt

Front airbag

Front fog lamps

Fuel pump reset

Fuse compartment

Hazard warning flashers

Heated rear window

Heated windshield

Interior luggage compartmentrelease

Jack

E161353

Keep out of reach of children

Lighting control

Low tire pressure warning

Maintain correct fluid level

8


Introduction

Note operating instructions

Panic alarm

E139213

Parking aid

Parking brake

Power steering fluid

Power windows front/rear

Power window lockout

Service engine soon

Side airbag

E167012

Shield the eyes

E138639

Stability control

Windshield wash and wipe

DATA RECORDINGService Data RecordingService data recorders in your vehicle arecapable of collecting and storing diagnosticinformation about your vehicle. Thispotentially includes information about theperformance or status of various systemsand modules in the vehicle, such as engine,throttle, steering or brake systems. In orderto properly diagnose and service your vehicle,Ford Motor Company, Ford of Canada, andservice and repair facilities may access orshare among them vehicle diagnosticinformation received through a directconnection to your vehicle when diagnosingor servicing your vehicle. Additionally, whenyour vehicle is in for service or repair, FordMotor Company, Ford of Canada, and serviceand repair facilities may access or shareamong them data for vehicle improvementpurposes. For U.S. only (if equipped), if youchoose to use the SYNC Vehicle Health

Report, you consent that certain diagnosticinformation may also be accessedelectronically by Ford Motor Company andFord authorized service facilities, and thatthe diagnostic information may be used forany purpose.

Event Data RecordingThis vehicle is equipped with an eventdata recorder. The main purpose of anevent data recorder is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations, suchas an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle; this data will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’s systemsperformed. The event data recorder isdesigned to record data related to vehicledynamics and safety systems for a shortperiod of time, typically 30 seconds orless.The event data recorder in this vehicle isdesigned to record such data as:• How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;• Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or thebrake pedal; and

9


Introduction

• How fast the vehicle was traveling;and

• Where the driver was positioning thesteering wheel.

This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstances inwhich crashes and injuries occur.Note: Event data recorder data is recordedby your vehicle only if a non-trivial crashsituation occurs; no data is recorded by theevent data recorder under normal drivingconditions and no personal data orinformation (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) is recorded (see limitationsregarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directionsand Information privacy below). However,parties, such as law enforcement, couldcombine the event data recorder data withthe type of personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.To read data recorded by an event datarecorder, special equipment is required,and access to the vehicle or the eventdata recorder is needed. In addition to thevehicle manufacturer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have suchspecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access to thevehicle or the event data recorder. Ford

Motor Company and Ford of Canada donot access event data recorderinformation without obtaining consent,unless pursuant to court order or whererequired by law enforcement, othergovernment authorities or other thirdparties acting with lawful authority.Other parties may seek to access theinformation independently of Ford MotorCompany and Ford of Canada.Note: Including to the extent that any lawpertaining to Event Data Recorders appliesto SYNC or its features, please note thefollowing: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) isenabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, throughany paired and connected cell phone,disclose to emergency services that thevehicle has been in a crash involving thedeployment of an airbag or, in certainvehicles, the activation of the fuel pumpshut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911Assist may also be capable of being usedto electronically or verbally provide to 911operators the vehicle location (such aslatitude and longitude), and/or otherdetails about the vehicle or crash orpersonal information about the occupantsto assist 911 operators to provide the mostappropriate emergency services. If you donot want to disclose this information, donot activate the 911 Assist feature.

Additionally, when you connect toTraffic, Directions and Information (ifequipped, U.S. only), the service usesGPS technology and advanced vehiclesensors to collect the vehicle’s currentlocation, travel direction, and speed(“vehicle travel information”), only tohelp provide you with the directions,traffic reports, or business searches thatyou request. If you do not want Ford orits vendors to receive this information,do not activate the service. For moreinformation, see Traffic, Directions andInformation, Terms and Conditions.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNINGSSome constituents of engine exhaust,certain vehicle components, certainfluids contained in vehicles and certain

products of component wear contain or emitchemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm.

10


Introduction

WARNINGSBattery posts, terminals and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer andreproductive harm. Batteries also containother chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer. Wash your handsafter handling.

PERCHLORATECertain components in your vehicle such asairbag modules, safety belt pretensionersand remote control batteries may containperchlorate material. Special handling mayapply for service or vehicle end of lifedisposal.

For more information visit:

Web Address

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

LINCOLN AUTOMOTIVEFINANCIAL SERVICESLincoln Automotive Financial Services offersa full range of financing and lease plans tohelp you acquire your vehicle. We arededicated to providing answers, informationand a truly extraordinary experience.

Use the options below to contact us withquestions about your account orfinancing and we will respond promptly:

Web Address

www.LincolnAFS.com

Phone: 1-888-498-8801Mail: Lincoln Automotive Financial ServicesP.O. Box 542000Omaha, NE 68154-8000

REPLACEMENT PARTSRECOMMENDATIONYour vehicle has been built to the higheststandards using quality parts. Werecommend that you demand the use ofgenuine Ford and Motorcraft parts wheneveryour vehicle requires scheduled maintenanceor repair. You can clearly identify genuineFord and Motorcraft parts by looking for theFord, FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on theparts or their packaging.

Scheduled Maintenance andMechanical RepairsOne of the best ways for you to make surethat your vehicle provides years of service isto have it maintained in line with ourrecommendations using parts that conformto the specifications detailed in this Owner’sManual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft partsmeet or exceed these specifications.

11


Introduction

Collision RepairsWe hope that you never experience acollision, but accidents do happen. GenuineFord replacement collision parts meet ourstringent requirements for fit, finish, structuralintegrity, corrosion protection and dentresistance. During vehicle development wevalidate these parts deliver the intended levelof protection as a whole system. A great wayto know for sure you are getting this level ofprotection is to use genuine Fordreplacement collision parts.

Warranty on Replacement PartsGenuine Ford and Motorcraft replacementparts are the only replacement parts thatbenefit from a Lincoln Warranty. Damagecaused to your vehicle as a result of thefailure of non-Ford parts may not be coveredby the Lincoln Warranty. For additionalinformation, refer to the terms and conditionsof the Lincoln Warranty.

SPECIAL NOTICESNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyFor a detailed description of what is coveredand what is not covered by your vehicle’sNew Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to theWarranty Manual that is provided to youalong with your Owner’s Manual.

Special InstructionsFor your added safety, your vehicle is fittedwith sophisticated electronic controls.

WARNINGSYou risk death or serious injury toyourself and others if you do not followthe instruction highlighted by the

warning symbol. Failure to follow the specificwarnings and instructions could result inpersonal injury.

Front seat mounted rear-facing childor infant seats should NEVER beplaced in front of an active passenger

airbag.

On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)Your vehicle’s On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)system has a data port for diagnostics, repairand reprogramming services with diagnosticscan tools. Installing a non-Ford-approvedaftermarket OBD plug-in device that uses theport during normal driving, for exampleremote insurance company monitoring,remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics orengine reprogramming, may causeinterference or damage to vehicle systems.We do not recommend or endorse the use ofany non-Ford-approved aftermarket OBDplug-in devices. The vehicle Warranty maynot cover damage caused by anynon-Ford-approved aftermarket OBD plug-indevice.

MOBILE COMMUNICATIONSEQUIPMENTUsing mobile communications equipment isbecoming increasingly important in theconduct of business and personal affairs.However, you must not compromise yourown or others’ safety when using suchequipment. Mobile communications canenhance personal safety and security whenappropriately used, particularly in emergencysituations. Safety must be paramount when

12


Introduction

using mobile communications equipment toavoid negating these benefits. Mobilecommunication equipment includes, but isnot limited to, cellular phones, pagers,portable email devices, text messagingdevices and portable two-way radios.


extreme caution when using any device thatmay take your focus off the road. Yourprimary responsibility is the safe operationof your vehicle. We recommend against theuse of any hand-held device while driving andencourage the use of voice-operated systemswhen possible. Make sure you are aware ofall applicable local laws that may affect theuse of electronic devices while driving.

EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONSFor your particular global region, your vehiclemay be equipped with features and optionsthat are different from the features andoptions that are described in this Owner’sManual. A market unique supplement maybe supplied that complements this book. Byreferring to the market unique supplement,if provided, you can properly identify those

features, recommendations andspecifications that are unique to your vehicle.This Owner’s Manual is written primarily forthe U.S. and Canadian Markets. Features orequipment listed as standard may bedifferent on units built for Export. Refer tothis Owner’s Manual for all other requiredinformation and warnings.

13


Introduction

PROTECTING THEENVIRONMENTYou must play your part in protecting theenvironment. Correct vehicle usage and theauthorized disposal of waste, cleaning andlubrication materials are significant stepstoward this aim.

14


Environment

GENERAL INFORMATIONSee the following sections for directions onhow to properly use safety restraints forchildren.

WARNINGSAlways make sure your child is securedproperly in a device that is appropriatefor their height, age and weight. Child

safety restraints must be bought separatelyfrom your vehicle. Failure to follow theseinstructions and guidelines may result in anincreased risk of serious injury or death toyour child.

WARNINGSAll children are shaped differently. Therecommendations for safety restraintsare based on probable child height, age

and weight thresholds from the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration andother safety organizations, or are theminimum requirements of law. Werecommend checking with a NHTSA CertifiedChild Passenger Safety Technician (CPST)and consult your pediatrician to make sureyour child seat is appropriate for your child,and is compatible with and properly installedin your vehicle. To locate a child seat fittingstation and CPST, contact NHTSA toll freeat 1-888-327-4236 or go tohttp://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada,

WARNINGScontact Transport Canada toll free at1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to finda Child Car Seat Clinic in your area. Failure toproperly restrain children in safety seatsmade especially for their height, age, andweight may result in an increased risk ofserious injury or death to your child.

Do not leave children or animalsunattended in the vehicle. On hot days,the temperature in the trunk or vehicle

interior can rise very quickly. Exposure ofpeople or animals to these high temperaturesfor even a short time can cause death orserious heat-related injuries, including braindamage. Small children are particularly atrisk.

15


Child Safety

Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children

Recommended restraint typeChild size, height, weight, or ageChild

Use a child safety seat (sometimes called aninfant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler

seat).Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or

younger).Infants or toddlers

Use a belt-positioning booster seat.

Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a childsafety seat (generally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m)

tall, are greater than age four and less than age 12, and between40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if

recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).

Small children

Use a vehicle safety belt having the lap beltsnug and low across the hips, shoulder belt

centered across the shoulder and chest, andseat back upright.

Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt-positioning booster seat (generally children who are at least 4 ft.9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if

recommended by child restraint manufacturer).Larger children

16


Child Safety

• You are required by law to properly usesafety seats for infants and toddlers inthe United States and Canada.

• Many states and provinces require thatsmall children use approved boosterseats until they reach age eight, a heightof 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or 80pounds (36 kilograms). Check your localand state or provincial laws for specificrequirements about the safety of childrenin your vehicle.

• When possible, always properly restrainchildren 12 years of age and under in arear seating position of your vehicle.Accident statistics suggest that childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seating positions than in a frontseating position. See Front PassengerSensing System (page 39).

INSTALLING CHILDRESTRAINTSChild Seats

E142594

Use a child safety seat (sometimes called aninfant carrier, convertible seat, or toddlerseat) for infants, toddlers, or childrenweighing 40 pounds (18 kilograms) or less(generally age four or younger).

Using Lap and Shoulder BeltsWARNINGS

Airbags can kill or injure a child in a childseat. Never place a rear-facing childseat in front of an active airbag. If you

must use a forward-facing child seat in thefront seat, move the seat upon which thechild seat is installed all the way back.

Airbags can kill or injure a child in a childseat. Children 12 and under should beproperly restrained in the rear seat

whenever possible.Depending on where you secure a childrestraint, and depending on the childrestraint design, you may block access

to certain seatbelt buckle assemblies andLATCH lower anchors, rendering thosefeatures potentially unusable. To avoid riskof injury, occupants should only use seatingpositions where they are able to be properlyrestrained.

17


Child Safety

When installing a child safety seat withcombination lap and shoulder belts:• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that

seating position.• Insert the belt tongue into the proper

buckle until you hear a snap and feel itlatch. Make sure the tongue is securelyfastened in the buckle.

• Keep the buckle release button pointingup and away from the safety seat, withthe tongue between the child seat andthe release button, to prevent accidentalunbuckling.

• Place the vehicle seat upon which thechild seat will be installed in the uprightposition.

• Put the seatbelt in the automatic lockingmode. See Step 5. This vehicle does notrequire the use of a locking clip.

Perform the following steps when installingthe child seat with combination lap andshoulder belts:Note: Although the child seat illustrated is aforward facing child seat, the steps are thesame for installing a rear facing child seat.

E142528

1. Position the child safety seat in a seatwith a combination lap and shoulder belt.

E142529

2. After positioning the child safety seat inthe proper seating position, pull down onthe shoulder belt and then grasp theshoulder belt and lap belt togetherbehind the belt tongue.

E142530

3. While holding the shoulder and lap beltportions together, route the tonguethrough the child seat according to thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.

18


Child Safety

E142531

4. Insert the belt tongue into the properbuckle (the buckle closest to the directionthe tongue is coming from) for thatseating position until you hear a snap andfeel the latch engage. Make sure thetongue is latched securely by pulling onit.

E142875

5. To put the retractor in the automaticlocking mode, grasp the shoulder portionof the belt and pull downward until all ofthe belt is pulled out.

Note: The automatic locking mode isavailable on the front passenger and rearseats.6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack.

The belt will click as it retracts to indicateit is in the automatic locking mode.

7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor tomake sure the retractor is in theautomatic locking mode (you should notbe able to pull more belt out). If theretractor is not locked, unbuckle the beltand repeat Steps 5 and 6.

E142533

8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.Force the seat down with extra weight,for example, by pressing down or kneelingon the child restraint while pulling up onthe shoulder belt in order to force slackfrom the belt. This is necessary to removethe remaining slack that will exist oncethe extra weight of the child is added tothe child restraint. It also helps to achievethe proper snugness of the child seat toyour vehicle. Sometimes, a slight leantoward the buckle will provide extra helpto remove remaining slack from the belt.

9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seatis equipped).

19


Child Safety

E142534

10. Before placing the child in the seat,forcibly move the seat forward and backto make sure the seat is securely heldin place. To check this, grab the seat atthe belt path and attempt to move itside to side and forward and back.There should be no more than 1 inch (2.5centimeters) of movement for properinstallation.

We recommend checking with a NHTSACertified Child Passenger Safety Technicianto make certain the child restraint is properlyinstalled. In Canada, check with TransportCanada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic.

Using Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren (LATCH)

WARNINGSNever attach two child safety seats tothe same anchor. In a collision, oneanchor may not be strong enough to

hold two child safety seat attachments andmay break, causing serious injury or death.

Depending on where you secure a childrestraint, and depending on the childrestraint design, you may block access

to certain seatbelt buckle assemblies orLATCH lower anchors, rendering thosefeatures potentially unusable. To avoid riskof injury, occupants should only use seatingpositions where they are able to be properlyrestrained.

The LATCH system is composed of threevehicle anchor points: two lower anchorslocated where seat back and seat cushionmeet (called the seat bight) and one toptether anchor located behind that seatingposition.

LATCH compatible child safety seats havetwo rigid or webbing mounted attachmentsthat connect to the two lower anchors at theLATCH equipped seating positions in yourvehicle. This type of attachment methodeliminates the need to use seatbelts toattach the child seat, however the seatbeltcan still be used to attach the child seat. Forforward-facing child seats, the top tetherstrap must also be attached to the propertop tether anchor, if a top tether strap hasbeen provided with your child seat.

E173197

Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors forchild seat installation at the seating positionsmarked with the child seat symbol.

20


Child Safety

E224433

The LATCH anchors are located at the rearsection of the rear seat between the cushionand seatback below the symbols as shown.Follow the child seat manufacturer'sinstructions to properly install a child seatwith LATCH attachments. Follow theinstructions on attaching child safety seatswith tether straps.Attach LATCH lower attachments of the childseat only to the anchors shown.

Child Seat Positioning for LATCH LowerAnchorsAll the LATCH lower anchors are equallyspaced, 11 inches (28 centimeters) apart,allowing for the following child seatpositioning:• If a single child seat is installed using the

LATCH lower anchors, it can be installedat any rear seating position.

• If two child safety seats are installedusing the LATCH lower anchors, theymust be placed in the outboard seatingpositions only.

• If three child safety seats are installed,you can install two using the LATCHlower anchors by placing them in eachoutboard seating position and the thirdin the center using the lap and shoulderbelt, OR you can use the LATCH loweranchors for the center child safety seatand the lap and shoulder belts for theother two child safety seats in theoutboard positions. Use the tetheranchors if applicable.

Combining Seatbelt and LATCH LowerAnchors for Attaching Child Safety SeatsWhen used in combination, either theseatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may beattached first, provided a proper installationis achieved. Attach the tether strapafterward, if included with the child seat.

Using Tether Straps

Many forward-facing child safety seatsinclude a tether strap which extends fromthe back of the child safety seat and hooksto an anchoring point called the top tetheranchor. Tether straps are available as anaccessory for many older safety seats.Contact the manufacturer of your child seatfor information about ordering a tether strap,or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tetherstrap on your safety seat does not reach theappropriate top tether anchor in your vehicle.Once the child safety seat has been installedusing either the seatbelt, the lower anchorsof the LATCH system, or both, you can attachthe top tether strap.

21


Child Safety

The tether strap anchors in your vehicle arein the following positions (shown from topview):

E142537

Perform the following steps to install a childsafety seat with tether anchors:Note: If you install a child seat with rigidLATCH attachments, do not tighten the tetherstrap enough to lift the child seat off yourvehicle seat cushion when the child is seatedin it. Keep the tether strap just snug withoutlifting the front of the child seat. Keeping thechild seat just touching your vehicle seat givesthe best protection in a severe crash.1. Route the child safety seat tether strap

over the back of the seat.

E173198

2. Locate the correct anchor for the selectedseating position, then open the tetheranchor cover.

E173199

3. Open the tether anchor cover.

E173200

4. Clip the tether strap to the anchor asshown.

5. Tighten the child safety seat tether strapaccording to the manufacturer'sinstructions.

If your child restraint system is equipped witha tether strap, and the child restraintmanufacturer recommends its use, we alsorecommend its use.

22


Child Safety

BOOSTER SEATS

WARNINGNever place, or allow a child to place,the shoulder belt under a child's armor behind the back because it reduces

the protection for the upper part of the bodyand may increase the risk of injury or deathin a crash.

Use a belt-positioning booster seat forchildren who have outgrown or no longerproperly fit in a child safety seat (generallychildren who are less than 4 feet 9 inches(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four(4) and less than age twelve (12), andbetween 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and 80pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to 100pounds (45 kilograms) if recommended byyour child restraint manufacturer). Manystate and provincial laws require that childrenuse approved booster seats until they reachage eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45meters) tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).Booster seats should be used until you cananswer YES to ALL of these questions whenseated without a booster seat:

E142595

• Can the child sit all the way back againsttheir vehicle seat back with knees bentcomfortably at the edge of the seatcushion?

• Can the child sit without slouching?• Does the lap belt rest low across the

hips?• Is the shoulder belt centered on the

shoulder and chest?• Can the child stay seated like this for the

whole trip?Always use booster seats in conjunction withyour vehicle lap and shoulder belt.

Types of Booster Seats

E68924

• Backless booster seatsIf your backless booster seat has a removableshield, remove the shield. If a vehicle seatingposition has a low seat back or no headrestraint, a backless booster seat may placeyour child's head (as measured at the topsof the ears) above the top of the seat. In thiscase, move the backless booster to anotherseating position with a higher seat back orhead restraint and lap and shoulder belts, orconsider using a high back booster seat.

23


Child Safety

E70710

• High back booster seatsIf, with a backless booster seat, you cannotfind a seating position that adequatelysupports your child's head, a high backbooster seat would be a better choice.Children and booster seats vary in size andshape. Choose a booster that keeps the lapbelt low and snug across the hips, never upacross the stomach, and lets you adjust theshoulder belt to cross the chest and restsnugly near the center of the shoulder. The

following drawings compare the ideal fit(center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortablyclose to the neck and a shoulder belt thatcould slip off the shoulder. The drawings alsoshow how the lap belt should be low andsnug across the child's hips.

E142596

24


Child Safety

E142597

If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seatupon which it is being used, placing arubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet linerunder the booster seat may improve thiscondition. Do not introduce any item thickerthan this under the booster seat. Check withthe booster seat manufacturer's instructions.

CHILD RESTRAINTPOSITIONING

WARNINGSAirbags can kill or injure a child in a childseat. Never place a rear-facing childseat in front of an active airbag. If you

must use a forward-facing child seat in thefront seat, move the vehicle seat upon whichthe child seat is installed all the way back.When possible, all children age 12 and undershould be properly restrained in a rear seatingposition. If all children cannot be seated andrestrained properly in a rear seating position,properly restrain the largest child in the frontseat.

WARNINGSAlways carefully follow the instructionsand warnings provided by themanufacturer of any child restraint to

determine if the restraint device isappropriate for your child's size, height,weight, or age. Follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructions and warningsprovided for installation and use inconjunction with the instructions andwarnings provided by your vehiclemanufacturer. A safety seat that isimproperly installed or utilized, isinappropriate for your child's height, age, orweight or does not properly fit the child mayincrease the risk of serious injury or death.

25


Child Safety

WARNINGSNever let a passenger hold a child onhis or her lap while your vehicle ismoving. The passenger cannot protect

the child from injury in a crash, which mayresult in serious injury or death.

Never use pillows, books, or towels toboost a child. They can slide aroundand increase the likelihood of injury or

death in a crash.

WARNINGSAlways restrain an unoccupied childseat or booster seat. These objects maybecome projectiles in a crash or sudden

stop, which may increase the risk of seriousinjury.

WARNINGSNever place, or allow a child to place,the shoulder belt under a child's armor behind the back because it reduces

the protection for the upper part of the bodyand may increase the risk of injury or deathin a crash.

To avoid risk of injury, do not leavechildren or pets unattended in yourvehicle.

Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children

Use any attachment method as indicated below by XCombined weightof child and child

seatRestraint Type

Safety belt onlySafety belt andLATCH (lower

anchors and toptether anchor)

Safety belt and toptether anchor

LATCH (loweranchors only)

LATCH (loweranchors and top

tether anchor)

XXUp to 65 lb(29.5 kg)

Rear facing childseat

XOver 65 lb(29.5 kg)

Rear facing childseat

XXXUp to 65 lb(29.5 kg)

Forward facingchild seat

XXOver 65 lb(29.5 kg)

Forward facingchild seat

26


Child Safety

Note: The child seat must rest tightly againstthe vehicle seat upon which it is installed. Itmay be necessary to lift or remove the headrestraint. See Seats (page 109).

CHILD SAFETY LOCKSWhen these locks are set, the rear doorscannot be opened from the inside.

E112197

The childproof locks are located on the rearedge of each rear door and must be setseparately for each door.

Left-Hand SideTurn counterclockwise to lock and clockwiseto unlock.

Right-Hand SideTurn clockwise to lock and counterclockwiseto unlock.

27


Child Safety

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGSAlways drive and ride with yourseatback upright and the lap belt snugand low across the hips.To reduce the risk of injury, make surechildren sit where they can be properlyrestrained.Never let a passenger hold a child onhis or her lap while your vehicle ismoving. The passenger cannot protect

the child from injury in a crash.All occupants of your vehicle, includingthe driver, should always properly weartheir seatbelts, even when an airbag

supplemental restraint system is provided.Failure to properly wear your seatbelt couldseriously increase the risk of injury or death.

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of avehicle. In a crash, people riding in these

areas are more likely to be seriously injuredor killed. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seatbelts. Be sure everyone in yourvehicle is in a seat and using a seatbeltproperly.

WARNINGSIn a rollover crash, an unbelted personis significantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seatbelt.Each seating position in your vehiclehas a specific seatbelt assembly whichis made up of one buckle and one

tongue that are designed to be used as a pair.1) Use the shoulder belt on the outsideshoulder only. Never wear the shoulder beltunder the arm. 2) Never swing the seatbeltaround your neck over the inside shoulder. 3)Never use a single belt for more than oneperson.

When possible, all children 12 years oldand under should be properly restrainedin a rear seating position. Failure to

follow this could seriously increase the riskof injury or death.

Seatbelts and seats can become hotin a vehicle that has been closed up insunny weather; they could burn a small

child. Check seat covers and buckles beforeyou place a child anywhere near them.

Front and rear seat occupants,including pregnant women, shouldwear seatbelts for optimum protection

in an accident.

All seating positions in your vehicle have lapand shoulder seatbelts. All occupants of thevehicle should always properly wear theirseatbelts, even when an airbag supplementalrestraint system is provided.The seatbelt system consists of:• Lap and shoulder seatbelts.• Shoulder seatbelt with automatic locking

mode, (except driver seatbelt).• Height adjuster at the front outboard

seating positions.• Seatbelt pretensioner at the front

outboard seating positions.• Belt tension sensor at the front outboard

passenger seating position.· Seatbelt warning light and chime.

· Crash sensors and monitoringsystem with readiness indicator.

28


Seatbelts

The seatbelt pretensioners at the frontseating positions are designed to tighten theseatbelts when activated. In frontal andnear-frontal crashes, the seatbeltpretensioners may be activated alone or, ifthe crash is of sufficient severity, togetherwith the front airbags. The pretensioners mayalso activate when the Safety Canopy isdeployed.

FASTENING THE SEATBELTSThe front outboard and rear safety restraintsin the vehicle are combination lap andshoulder belts.

E142587

1. Insert the belt tongue into the properbuckle (the buckle closest to the directionthe tongue is coming from) until you heara snap and feel it latch. Make sure thetongue is securely fastened in the buckle.

E142588

2. To unfasten, press the release button andremove the tongue from the buckle.

E142589

When in use, the rear safety belts should beplaced in the belt guides on the outboardseatbacks.

Using Safety Belts During PregnancyWARNING

Always ride and drive with yourseatback upright and the safety beltproperly fastened. The lap portion of

the safety belt should fit snug and bepositioned low across the hips. The shoulderportion of the safety belt should bepositioned across the chest. Pregnant womenshould also follow this practice. See thefollowing figure.

29


Seatbelts

E142590

Pregnant women should always wear theirsafety belt. The lap belt portion of acombination lap and shoulder belt should bepositioned low across the hips below thebelly and worn as tight as comfort will allow.The shoulder belt should be positioned tocross the middle of the shoulder and thecenter of the chest.

Safety Belt Locking ModesWARNINGS

After any vehicle crash, the safety beltsystem at all passenger seatingpositions must be checked by an

authorized dealer to verify that the automaticlocking retractor feature for child seats is stillfunctioning properly. In addition, all safetybelts should be checked for proper function.

The belt and retractor assembly mustbe replaced if the safety belt assemblyautomatic locking retractor feature or

any other safety belt function is not operatingproperly when checked by an authorizeddealer. Failure to replace the belt andretractor assembly could increase the risk ofinjury in crashes.

All safety restraints in the vehicle arecombination lap and shoulder belts. Thedriver safety belt has the first type of lockingmode, and the front outboard passenger andrear seat safety belts have both types oflocking modes described as follows:

Vehicle Sensitive ModeThis is the normal retractor mode, whichallows free shoulder belt length adjustmentto your movements and locking in responseto vehicle movement. For example, if thedriver brakes suddenly or turns a cornersharply, or the vehicle receives an impact ofabout 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, thecombination safety belts will lock to helpreduce forward movement of the driver andpassengers.In addition, the retractor is designed to lockif the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If thisoccurs, let the belt retract slightly and pullwebbing out again in a slow and controlledmanner.

Automatic Locking ModeIn this mode, the shoulder belt isautomatically pre-locked. The belt will stillretract to remove any slack in the shoulderbelt. The automatic locking mode is notavailable on the driver safety belt.

30


Seatbelts

When to Use the Automatic Locking ModeThis mode should be used any time a childsafety seat, except a booster, is installed inpassenger front or rear seating positions.Children 12 years old and under should beproperly restrained in a rear seating positionwhenever possible. See Child Safety (page15).

How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode

E142591

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulderbelt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pulldownward until the entire belt is pulledout.

Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts,you will hear a clicking sound. This indicatesthe safety belt is now in the automaticlocking mode.

How to Disengage the Automatic LockingModeUnbuckle the combination lap and shoulderbelt and allow it to retract completely todisengage the automatic locking mode andturn on the vehicle sensitive (emergency)locking mode.

Safety Belt Extension AssemblyWARNING

Do not use extensions to change the fitof the shoulder belt across the torso.

If the safety belt is too short when fullyextended, you can obtain a safety beltextension assembly from an authorizeddealer.Use only extensions manufactured by thesame supplier as the safety belt.Manufacturer identification is on a labellocated either at the end of the webbing oron the retractor behind the trim. Also, use thesafety belt extension only if the safety belt istoo short for you when fully extended.

SEATBELT HEIGHTADJUSTMENT

WARNINGPosition the safety belt height adjustersso that the belt rests across the middleof your shoulder. Failure to adjust the

safety belt properly could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt and increasethe risk of injury in a crash.

Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so thebelt rests across the middle of your shoulder.

E146191

To adjust the shoulder belt height:1. Press the button and slide the height

adjuster up or down.

31


Seatbelts

2. Release the button and pull down on theheight adjuster to make sure it is lockedin place.

SEATBELT WARNING LAMP ANDINDICATOR CHIME

This lamp illuminates and anaudible warning will sound if thedriver's safety belt has not been

fastened when the vehicle's ignition is turnedon.

Conditions of operation

Then...If...

The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-2 minutes and the warningchime sounds 4-8 seconds.

The driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch isturned to the on position...

The safety belt warning light and warning chime turn off.The driver's safety belt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminatedand the warning chime is sounding...

The safety belt warning light and indicator chime remain off.The driver's safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turnedto the on position...

32


Seatbelts

SEATBELT REMINDERBelt-Minder™This feature supplements the safety beltwarning function by providing additionalreminders that intermittently sound a toneand illuminate the safety belt warning lightwhen you are in the driver seat or you have afront seat passenger and a safety belt is

unbuckled.The system uses information from the frontpassenger sensing system to determine if afront seat passenger is present and thereforepotentially in need of a warning. To avoidactivating the Belt-Minder feature for objectsyou place in the front passenger seat, onlythe front seat passengers receive warningsas determined by the front passenger sensingsystem.

If the Belt-Minder warnings expire (warningsfor about five minutes) for one passenger(driver or front passenger), the otherpassenger can still cause the Belt-Minderfeature to turn on.

Then...If...

The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.You and the front seat passenger buckle your safety belts before youswitch the ignition on or less than 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch

the ignition on...

The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illumin-ates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds,

repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passengerbuckle your safety belts.

You or the front seat passenger do not buckle your safety belts beforeyour vehicle reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1-2 minutes elapse

after you switch the ignition on...

The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illumin-ates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds,

repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passengerbuckle your safety belts.

The safety belt for the driver or front passenger is unbuckled for about1 minute while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and

more than 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on...

33


Seatbelts

Deactivating and Activating theBelt-Minder Feature

WARNINGWhile the system allows you todeactivate it, this system is designedto improve your chances of being safely

belted and surviving an accident. Werecommend you leave the system activatedfor yourself and others who may use thevehicle.

Note: The driver and front passenger warningsswitch on and off independently. When youperform this procedure for one seatingposition, do not buckle the other position asthis will terminate the process.Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly beforeproceeding with the programming procedure.Before following the procedure, make surethat:• The parking brake is set.• The transmission is in park (P) or neutral

(N).• The ignition is off.• The driver and front passenger safety

belts are unbuckled.

1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start thevehicle.

2. Wait until the safety belt warning lightturns off (about one minute). After Step2, wait an additional 5 seconds beforeproceeding with Step 3. Once you startStep 3, you must complete the procedurewithin 30 seconds.

3. For the seating position you are switchingoff, buckle then unbuckle the safety beltthree times at a moderate speed, endingin the unbuckled state. After Step 3, thesafety belt warning light turns on.

4. While the safety belt warning light is on,buckle and then unbuckle the safety belt.After Step 4, the safety belt warning lightflashes for confirmation.

• This will switch the feature off for thatseating position if it is currently on.

• This will switch the feature on for thatseating position if it is currently off.

CHILD RESTRAINT ANDSEATBELT MAINTENANCEInspect the vehicle safety belts and childsafety seat systems periodically to make surethey work properly and are not damaged.Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety beltsto make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts.Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety beltassemblies, including retractors, buckles,front safety belt buckle assemblies, bucklesupport assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped),shoulder belt guide on seat back (ifequipped), rear inflatable safety belts (ifequipped), child safety seat LATCH andtether anchors, and attaching hardware,should be inspected after a crash. Read thechild restraint manufacturer's instructionsfor additional inspection and maintenanceinformation specific to the child restraint.We recommend that all safety beltassemblies in use in vehicles involved in acrash be replaced. However, if the crash wasminor and an authorized dealer finds that thebelts do not show damage and continue tooperate properly, they do not need to bereplaced. Safety belt assemblies not in useduring a crash should also be inspected andreplaced if either damage or improperoperation is noted.

34


Seatbelts

Properly care for safety belts. See Cleaningthe Interior (page 266).

35


Seatbelts

The Personal Safety System provides animproved overall level of frontal crashprotection to front seat occupants and isdesigned to help further reduce the risk ofairbag-related injuries. The system is able toanalyze different occupant conditions andcrash severity before activating theappropriate safety devices to help betterprotect a range of occupants in a variety offrontal crash situations.The Vehicle Personal Safety System consistsof:• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag

supplemental restraints.• Front seat outboard safety belts with

pretensioners, energy managementretractors and safety belt usage sensors.

• Driver seat position sensor.• Front passenger sensing system.• Passenger airbag off and on indicator

lamp.• Front crash severity sensors.• Restraints control module with impact

and safing sensors.

• Restraint system warning light andbackup tone.

• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crashsensors, safety belt pretensioners, frontsafety belt usage sensors, driver seatposition sensor, front passenger sensingsystem and indicator lights.

How Does the Personal SafetySystem Work?The Personal Safety System can adapt thedeployment strategy of the safety devicesaccording to crash severity and occupantconditions. A collection of crash andoccupant sensors provides information tothe restraints control module. During a crash,the restraints control module may deploy thesafety belt pretensioners, one or both stagesof the dual-stage airbags based on crashseverity and occupant conditions.

36


Personal Safety System™


WARNINGSAirbags do not inflate slowly or gently,and the risk of injury from a deployingairbag is the greatest close to the trim

covering the airbag module.All occupants of your vehicle, includingthe driver, should always properly weartheir safety belts, even when an airbag

supplemental restraint system is provided.Failure to properly wear your safety belt couldseriously increase the risk of injury or death.

Always transport children 12 years oldand under in the back seat and alwaysproperly use appropriate child

restraints. Failure to follow this couldseriously increase the risk of injury or death.

Never place your arm over the airbagmodule as a deploying airbag can resultin serious arm fractures or other injuries.Airbags can kill or injure a child in a childseat. Never place a rear-facing childseat in front of an active airbag. If you


WARNINGSDo not attempt to service, repair, ormodify the airbag supplementalrestraint systems or its fuses as you

could be seriously injured or killed. Contactyour authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Several airbag system components gethot after inflation. To reduce the risk ofinjury, do not touch them after inflation.If the airbag has deployed, the airbagwill not function again and must bereplaced immediately. If the airbag is

not replaced, the unrepaired area willincrease the risk of injury in a crash.

The airbags are a supplemental restraintsystem and are designed to work with thesafety belts to help protect the driver andright front passenger from certain upper bodyinjuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly; thereis a risk of injury from a deploying airbag.Note: You will hear a loud bang and see acloud of harmless powdery residue if an airbagdeploys. This is normal.

The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly uponactivation. After airbag deployment, it isnormal to notice a smoke-like, powderyresidue or smell the burnt propellant. Thismay consist of cornstarch, talcum powder(to lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds(for example, baking soda) that result fromthe combustion process that inflates theairbag. Small amounts of sodium hydroxidemay be present which may irritate the skinand eyes, but none of the residue is toxic.While the system is designed to help reduceserious injuries, contact with a deployingairbag may also cause abrasions or swelling.Temporary hearing loss is also a possibilityas a result of the noise associated with adeploying airbag. Because airbags mustinflate rapidly and with considerable force,there is the risk of death or serious injuriessuch as fractures, facial and eye injuries orinternal injuries, particularly to occupantswho are not properly restrained or areotherwise out of position at the time of airbagdeployment. Thus, it is extremely importantthat occupants be properly restrained as faraway from the airbag module as possiblewhile maintaining vehicle control.Routine maintenance of the airbags is notrequired.

37


Supplementary Restraints System

DRIVER AND PASSENGERAIRBAGS

WARNINGSNever place your arm or any objectsover an airbag module. Placing yourarm over a deploying airbag can result

in serious arm fractures or other injuries.Objects placed on or over the airbag inflationarea may cause those objects to be propelledby the airbag into your face and torso causingserious injury.



E151127

The driver and front passenger airbags willdeploy during significant frontal and nearfrontal crashes.The driver and passenger front airbag systemconsists of:• Driver and passenger airbag modules.• Front passenger sensing system.

· Crash sensors and monitoringsystem with readiness indicator.See Crash Sensors and Airbag

Indicator (page 44).

Proper Driver and Front PassengerSeating Adjustment

WARNINGNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) recommendsa minimum distance of at least 10

inches (25 centimeters) between anoccupant’s chest and the driver airbagmodule.

To properly position yourself away from theairbag:• Move your seat to the rear as far as you

can while still reaching the pedalscomfortably.

• Recline the seat slightly (one or twodegrees) from the upright position.

After all occupants have adjusted their seatsand put on safety belts, it is very importantthat they continue to sit properly. A properlyseated occupant sits upright, leaning againstthe seat back, and centered on the seatcushion, with their feet comfortably extendedon the floor. Sitting improperly can increase

38



the chance of injury in a crash event. Forexample, if an occupant slouches, lies down,turns sideways, sits forward, leans forwardor sideways, or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash is greatlyincreased.

Children and AirbagsWARNING



E142846

Children must always be properly restrained.Accident statistics suggest that children aresafer when properly restrained in the rearseating positions than in the front seatingposition. Failure to follow these instructionsmay increase the risk of injury in a crash.

FRONT PASSENGER SENSINGSYSTEM

WARNINGSEven with Advanced RestraintsSystems, children 12 and under shouldbe properly restrained in a rear seating

position. Failure to follow this could seriouslyincrease the risk of injury or death.

Sitting improperly out of position orwith the seat back reclined too far cantake off weight from the seat cushion

and affect the decision of the front passengersensing system, resulting in serious injury ordeath in a crash. Always sit upright againstyour seat back, with your feet on the floor.

Any alteration or modification to thefront passenger seat may affect theperformance of the front passenger

sensing system which could seriouslyincrease the risk of injury or death.

This system works with sensors that are partof the front passenger’s seat and safety beltto detect the presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the frontpassenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled(may inflate) or not.

E173214

The front passenger sensing system uses apassenger airbag status indicator that willilluminate indicating that the front passengerfrontal airbag is either ON (enabled) or OFF(disabled).The indicator lamp is located in the centerstack of the instrument panel.Note: The passenger airbag status indicatorOFF and ON indicator lamps will illuminatefor a short period of time when the ignition isfirst turned on to confirm it is functional.

39



The front passenger sensing system isdesigned to disable (will not inflate) the frontpassenger's frontal airbag when the frontpassenger seat is unoccupied, or a rear facinginfant seat, a forward-facing child restraint,or a booster seat is detected. Even with thistechnology, parents are strongly encouragedto always properly restrain children in the rearseat. The sensor also turns off the passengerfront airbag and seat-mounted side airbagwhen the passenger seat is empty.

• When the front passenger sensing systemdisables (will not inflate) the frontpassenger frontal airbag, the passengerairbag status indicator will illuminate theOFF lamp and stay lit to remind you thatthe front passenger frontal airbag isdisabled.

• If the child restraint has been installedand the passenger airbag status indicatorilluminates the ON lamp, then turn thevehicle off, remove the child restraintfrom the vehicle and reinstall the restraintfollowing the child restraintmanufacturer's instructions.

The front passenger sensing system isdesigned to enable (may inflate) the frontpassenger's frontal airbag anytime thesystem senses that a person of adult size issitting properly in the front passenger seat.

• When the front passenger sensing systemenables the front passenger frontal airbag(may inflate), the passenger airbag statusindicator will illuminate the ON lamp andremain illuminated.

If a person of adult size is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, but the airbag off indicatorlamp is lit, it is possible that the person is notsitting properly in the seat. If this happens:• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person

to place the seat back in the full uprightposition.

• Have the person sit upright in the seat,centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended.

• Restart the vehicle and have the personremain in this position for about twominutes. This will allow the system todetect that person and enable thepassenger’s frontal airbag.

• If the indicator OFF lamp remains lit evenafter this, the person should be advisedto ride in the rear seat.

40



Passenger airbagPassenger airbag status indicatorOccupant

DisabledOFF: LitEmpty

ON: Unlit

DisabledOFF: LitChild

ON: Unlit

EnabledOFF: UnlitAdult

ON: Lit

Note: When the passenger airbag statusindicator OFF light is illuminated, thepassenger (seat mounted) side airbag may bedisabled to avoid the risk of airbag deploymentinjuries.After all occupants have adjusted their seatsand put on safety belts, it is very importantthat they continue to sit properly. A properlyseated occupant sits upright, leaning againstthe seat back, and centered on the seatcushion, with their feet comfortably extendedon the floor. Sitting improperly can increase

the chance of injury in a crash event. Forexample, if an occupant slouches, lies down,turns sideways, sits forward, leans forwardor sideways, or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash is greatlyincreased.

Make sure the front passengersensing system is operatingproperly. See Crash Sensors and

Airbag Indicator (page 44).

Do not attempt to repair or service thesystem. Take your vehicle immediately to anauthorized dealer.

If it is necessary to modify an advanced frontairbag system to accommodate a personwith disabilities, contact the Ford CustomerRelationship Center. See Getting theServices You Need (page 216).

SIDE AIRBAGS

WARNINGSDo not place objects or mountequipment on or near the airbag cover,on the side of the seatbacks (of the

front seats), or in front seat areas that maycome into contact with a deploying airbag.Failure to follow these instructions mayincrease the risk of personal injury in theevent of a crash.

41



WARNINGSDo not use accessory seat covers. Theuse of accessory seat covers mayprevent the deployment of the side

airbags and increase the risk of injury in anaccident.

Do not lean your head on the door. Theside airbag could injure you as itdeploys from the side of the seatback.Do not attempt to service, repair, ormodify the airbag, its fuses or the seatcover on a seat containing an airbag as

you could be seriously injured or killed.Contact your authorized dealer as soon aspossible.

If the side airbag has deployed, theairbag will not function again. The sideairbag system (including the seat)

must be inspected and serviced by anauthorized dealer. If the airbag is notreplaced, the unrepaired area will increasethe risk of injury in a crash.

The side airbags are located on the outboardside of the seatbacks of the front seats. Incertain sideways crashes, the airbag on theside affected by the crash will be inflated.The airbag was designed to inflate betweenthe door panel and occupant to furtherenhance the protection provided occupantsin side impact crashes.

E152533

The system consists of the following:• A label or embossed side panel indicating

that side airbags are fitted to your vehicle.• Side airbags located inside the driver and

front passenger seatbacks.• Front passenger sensing system.

• Crash sensors and monitoring systemwith readiness indicator. See CrashSensors and Airbag Indicator (page44).

Note: The passenger sensing system willdeactivate the passenger seat-mounted sideairbag if it detects an empty passenger seat.The design and development of the sideairbag system included recommendedtesting procedures that were developed bya group of automotive safety experts knownas the Side Airbag Technical Working Group.These recommended testing procedures helpreduce the risk of injuries related to thedeployment of side airbags.

SAFETY CANOPY™

WARNINGSDo not place objects or mountequipment on or near the headliner atthe siderail that may come into contact

with a deploying curtain airbag. Failure tofollow these instructions may increase therisk of personal injury in the event of a crash.

42



WARNINGSDo not lean your head on the door. Thecurtain airbag could injure you as itdeploys from the headliner.Do not attempt to service, repair, ormodify the curtain airbags, its fuses,the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the headliner

on a vehicle containing curtain airbags as youcould be seriously injured or killed. Contactyour authorized dealer as soon as possible.

All occupants of your vehicle includingthe driver should always wear theirsafety belts even when an airbag

supplemental restraint system and curtainairbag is provided. Failure to properly wearyour safety belt could seriously increase therisk of injury or death.

To reduce risk of injury, do not obstructor place objects in the deployment pathof the curtain airbag.If the curtain airbags have deployed,the curtain airbags will not functionagain. The curtain airbags (including

the A, B and C pillar trim and headliner) mustbe inspected and serviced by an authorizeddealer. If the curtain airbag is not replaced,the unrepaired area will increase the risk ofinjury in a crash.

The Safety Canopy will deploy duringsignificant side crashes or when a certainlikelihood of a rollover event is detected bythe rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy ismounted to the roof side-rail sheet metal,behind the headliner, above each row ofseats. In certain sideways crashes or rolloverevents, the Safety Canopy will be activated,regardless of which seats are occupied. TheSafety Canopy is designed to inflate betweenthe side window area and occupants tofurther enhance protection provided in sideimpact crashes and rollover events.

E75004

The system consists of the following:• Safety canopy curtain airbags located

above the trim panels over the front andrear side windows identified by a label orwording on the headliner or roof-pillartrim.

• A flexible headliner which opens abovethe side doors to allow air curtaindeployment

· Crash sensors and monitoringsystem with a readiness indicator.See Crash Sensors and Airbag

Indicator (page 44).

Children 12 years old and under shouldalways be properly restrained in the rearseats. The Safety Canopy will not interferewith children restrained using a properlyinstalled child or booster seat because it isdesigned to inflate downward from theheadliner above the doors along the sidewindow opening.

43



The design and development of the SafetyCanopy included recommended testingprocedures that were developed by a groupof automotive safety experts known as theSide Airbag Technical Working Group. Theserecommended testing procedures helpreduce the risk of injuries related to thedeployment of side airbags (including theSafety Canopy).

CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAGINDICATOR

WARNINGModifying or adding equipment to thefront end of the vehicle (includingframe, bumper, front end body

structure and tow hooks) may affect theperformance of the airbag system, increasingthe risk of injury. Do not modify the front endof the vehicle.

Your vehicle has a collection of crash andoccupant sensors which provide informationto the restraints control module. Therestraints control module deploys (activates)the front seatbelt pretensioners, driver airbag,passenger airbag, seat mounted side airbagsand the Safety Canopy. Based on the type ofcrash, the restraints control module willdeploy the appropriate safety devices.The restraints control module also monitorsthe readiness of the above safety devicesplus the crash and occupant sensors. Thereadiness of the safety system is indicatedby a warning indicator light in the instrumentcluster or by a backup tone if the warninglight is not working. Routine maintenance ofthe airbag is not required.A difficulty with the system is indicated byone or more of the following:

The readiness light will notilluminate immediately after theignition is turned on.

• The readiness light will either flash or staylit.

• A series of five beeps will be heard. Thetone pattern will repeat periodically untilthe problem, the light or both arerepaired.

If any of these things happen, evenintermittently, have the supplementalrestraint system serviced at an authorizeddealer immediately. Unless serviced, thesystem may not function properly in the eventof a crash.The seatbelt pretensioners and the frontairbag supplemental restraint system aredesigned to activate when the vehiclesustains frontal deceleration sufficient tocause the restraints control module to deploya safety device.The fact that the seatbelt pretensioners orfront airbags did not activate for both frontseat occupants in a crash does not mean thatsomething is wrong with the system. Rather,it means the restraints control moduledetermined the accident conditions (crashseverity, belt usage) were not appropriate toactivate these safety devices.• The design of the front airbags is to

activate only in frontal and near-frontalcrashes (not rollovers, side impacts orrear impacts) unless the crash causessufficient frontal deceleration.

• The design of the seatbelt pretensionersis to activate in frontal, near-frontal andside crashes and in rollovers.

44



• The design of the side airbags is to inflatein certain side impact crashes. Sideairbags may activate in other types ofcrashes if the vehicle experiencessufficient sideways motion ordeformation.

• The design of the Safety Canopy is toinflate in certain side impact crashes orrollover events. The Safety Canopy mayactivate in other types of crashes if thevehicle experiences sufficient sidewaysmotion or deformation, or a certainlikelihood of rollover.

AIRBAG DISPOSALContact your authorized dealer as soon aspossible. Airbags must be disposed of byqualified personnel.

45



GENERAL INFORMATION ONRADIO FREQUENCIESThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules and with Industry Canadalicense-exempt RSS standard(s). Operationis subject to the following two conditions: (1)This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) This device must acceptany interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.Note: Changes or modifications notexpressively approved by the party responsiblefor compliance could void the user's authorityto operate the equipment. The term IC beforethe radio certification number only signifiesthat Industry Canada technical specificationswere met.The typical operating range for yourtransmitter is approximately 33 feet (10meters). Vehicles with the remote startfeature will have a greater range. One of thefollowing could cause a decrease in operatingrange:• weather conditions• nearby radio towers• structures around the vehicle• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle

Other short-distance radio transmitters, suchas amateur radios, medical equipment,wireless headphones, remote controls andalarm systems may operate on the samefrequency as your remote control. If othertransmitters are operating on thosefrequencies, you may not be able to use yourremote control. Using your remote controlnear some types of electronic equipment,such as USB devices, computers or cellphones can interfere with remote operation.Operating your remote control near metal ormetallic-finished purses, bags or clothing caninterfere with remote operation. You can lockand unlock the doors with the key.Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle beforeleaving it unattended.Note: If you are in range, the remote controlwill operate if you press any buttonunintentionally.

Intelligent AccessThe system uses a radio frequency signal tocommunicate with your vehicle and authorizeyour vehicle to unlock when one of thefollowing conditions are met:• You touch the inside of any exterior door

handle within 3 ft (1 m) proximity of anintelligent access key.

• You press the luggage compartmentbutton.

• You press a button on the transmitter.If excessive radio frequency interference ispresent in the area or if the transmitterbattery is low, you may need to mechanicallyunlock your door. You can use the mechanicalkey blade in your intelligent access key toopen the driver door in this situation. SeeRemote Control (page 47).

46


Keys and Remote Controls

REMOTE CONTROLIntelligent Access Key

E173598

Your intelligent access key operates thepower locks and the remote start system.The key must be in your vehicle to activatethe push-button start system.

Removable Key BladeThe intelligent access key also contains aremovable mechanical key blade that youcan use to unlock the driver door.

E173599

Slide the release on the back of the remotecontrol to release the mechanical key blade,and then pull the blade out.

E173600

Note: Your vehicle’s backup keys came witha security tag that provides important vehiclekey cut information. Keep the tag in a safeplace for future reference.

Replacing the BatteryNote: Refer to local regulations whendisposing of transmitter batteries.Note: Do not wipe off any grease on thebattery terminals or on the back surface of thecircuit board.Note: Replacing the battery will not deletethe transmitter from the vehicle. Thetransmitter should operate normally.

Intelligent Access TransmitterThe remote control uses one coin-typethree-volt lithium battery CR2032 orequivalent.

E173599

1. Remove the mechanical key blade fromthe transmitter.

47



E173601

2. Insert a coin into the slot and twist toseparate the housing.

E173602

3. Remove the old battery.

4. Install a new batteries with the + facingdownward. Press the battery down tomake sure that it is fully in the housing.

5. Snap the battery cover back onto thetransmitter and install the mechanicalkey blade.

Car Finder

E138623

Press the button twice within threeseconds. The horn will sound andthe turn signals will flash. We

recommend you use this method to locateyour vehicle, rather than using the panicalarm.

Sounding a Panic AlarmNote: The panic alarm will only operate whenthe ignition is off.

E138624

Press the button to activate thealarm. Press the button again orswitch the ignition on to deactivate.

Remote StartWARNING

To avoid exhaust fumes, do not useremote start if your vehicle is parkedindoors or areas that are not well

ventilated.

Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicleis low on fuel.

E138625

The remote start button is on thetransmitter.

This feature allows you to start your vehiclefrom outside the vehicle. The transmitter hasan extended operating range.Vehicles with automatic climate control canbe configured to operate when the vehicle isremote started. See Remote Start (page108). A manual climate control system willrun at the setting it was set to when youswitched the vehicle off.Many states and provinces have restrictionsfor the use of remote start. Check your localand state or provincial laws for specificrequirements regarding remote start systems.The remote start system will not work if:• the ignition is on• the alarm system is triggered• you disable the feature• the hood is open• the transmission is not in P• the vehicle battery voltage is too low• the service engine soon light is on.

48



Remote Starting the VehicleNote: You must press each button withinthree seconds of each other. Your vehicle willnot remote start if you do not follow thissequence.

E138626

The tag with your transmitter details thestarting procedure.To remote start your vehicle:1. Press the lock button to lock all the doors.2. Press the remote start button twice. The

exterior lamps will flash twice.The horn will sound if the system fails tostart, unless quiet start is on. Quiet start willrun the blower fan at a slower speed toreduce noise. It can be switched on or off inthe information display. See GeneralInformation (page 89).

Note: If the vehicle has been remote startedwith an integrated keyhead transmitter, youmust switch the ignition on before driving yourvehicle. With an intelligent access transmitter,you must press the START/STOP button onthe instrument panel once while applying thebrake pedal before driving your vehicle.The power windows will not work during theremote start and the radio will not turn onautomatically.The parking lamps will remain on and thevehicle will run for 5, 10, or 15 minutes,depending on the setting.

Extending the Vehicle Run TimeRepeat Steps 1 and 2 with the vehicle stillrunning to extend the run time for anotherremote start duration. If you programmedthe duration to last 10 minutes, the second10 minutes will begin after what is left of thefirst activation time. For example, if thevehicle had been running from the firstremote start for five minutes, the vehicle willcontinue to run now for a total of 15 minutes.You can extend the remote start up to amaximum of 35 minutes.Wait at least five seconds before remotestarting after a vehicle shutdown.

Turning the Vehicle Off After RemoteStarting

E138625

Press the button once. The parkinglamps will turn off.You may have to be closer to the

vehicle than when starting due to groundreflection and the added noise of the runningvehicle.You can disable or enable the remote startsystem through the information display. SeeGeneral Information (page 89).

Memory FeatureYou can recall the positions of the memoryseat, outside mirrors, steering column andpower pedal positions (if equipped) with yourintelligent access key if it is linked to a pre-setposition. See Memory Function (page 114).

REPLACING A LOST KEY ORREMOTE CONTROLReplacement keys or remote controls can bepurchased from an authorized dealer.Authorized dealers can program remotecontrols for your vehicle. See PassiveAnti-Theft System (page 63).

49



PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONMyKey allows you to program keys withrestricted driving modes to promote gooddriving habits. All but one of the keys can beactivated with these restricted modes.Any keys that remain unprogrammed arereferred to as administrator keys or adminkeys. They can be used to:• Create a MyKey.• Program configurable MyKey settings.• Clear all MyKey features.When you have created a MyKey, you canaccess the following information by using theinformation display to determine:• How many admin keys and MyKeys are

programmed to your vehicle.• The total distance your vehicle traveled

with a MyKey.Note: Switch the ignition on to use the system.Note: All MyKeys are programmed to thesame settings. You cannot program themindividually.

Note: For vehicles equipped with apush-button start, when both a MyKey and anadmin key are present, the admin key will berecognized by the vehicle when you start thevehicle.

Non-configurable SettingsThe following settings cannot be changed byan admin key user:• Safety belt reminder. You cannot disable

this feature. The audio system will mutewhen the front seat passengers’ safetybelts are not fastened.

• Early low fuel. The low-fuel warningactivates earlier, giving the MyKey usermore time to refuel.

• Driver assist features, if equipped on yourvehicle, are forced on: parking aid,forward collision warning, lane departurewarning and Blind Spot InformationSystem (BLIS) with cross traffic alert.

• Satellite radio adult content restrictions,if equipped on your vehicle.

Configurable SettingsWith an admin key, you can configure certainMyKey settings when you first create a MyKeyand before you recycle the key or restart theengine. You can also change the settingsafterward with an admin key.• A vehicle speed limit can be set. Warnings

will be shown in the display followed byan audible tone when your vehiclereaches the set speed. You cannotoverride the set speed by fully depressingthe accelerator pedal or by setting cruisecontrol.

WARNINGDo not set MyKey maximum speed limitto a limit that will prevent the driverfrom maintaining a safe speed

considering posted speed limits andprevailing road conditions. The driver isalways responsible to drive in accordancewith local laws and prevailing conditions.Failure to do so could result in accident orinjury.

50


MyKey™

• Various vehicle speed minders can be set.Once you select a speed, it will be shownin the display, followed by an audible tonewhen the preselected vehicle speed isexceeded.

• Audio system maximum volume of 45%.A message will be shown in the displaywhen you attempt to exceed the limitedvolume. Also, the speed-sensitive orcompensated automatic volume controlwill be disabled.

• Always on setting. When this is selected,you will not be able to turn offAdvanceTrac or traction control, E911 orEmergency Assist, or the Do Not Disturbfeature (if your vehicle is equipped withthese features).

CREATING A MYKEYUse the information display to create aMyKey:

1. Insert the key you want to program intothe ignition. If your vehicle is equippedwith a push-button start, place theremote control into the backup position.The location of your backup position is inanother chapter. See Starting aGasoline Engine (page 128).

2. Switch the ignition on.3. Access the main menu on the information

display controls. Use the arrow keys toget to the following menu selections:

Action and DescriptionMessage

Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Settings

Press the OK button or the right arrow key.MyKey

Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Create MyKey

When prompted, hold the OK button untilyou see a message informing you to label thiskey as a MyKey. The key will be restricted atthe next start.MyKey is successfully created. Make sure youlabel it so you can distinguish it from theadmin keys.

You can also program configurable settingsfor the key(s). SeeProgramming/Changing ConfigurableSettings.

Programming/ChangingConfigurable SettingsUse the information display to access yourconfigurable MyKey settings.

1. Switch the ignition on using an admin keyor remote control.

2. Access the main menu on the informationdisplay controls. Use the arrow keys toget to the following menu selections:

51


MyKey™


Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Settings

Press the OK button or the right arrow key.MyKey

Note: You can clear or change your MyKeysettings at any time during the same key cycleas you created the MyKey. Once you haveswitched the vehicle off, however, you willneed an admin key to change or clear yourMyKey settings.

CLEARING ALL MYKEYSYou can clear or change your MyKey settingsusing the information display control on thesteering wheel. See Information Displays(page 89).

Switch the ignition on using an admin key orremote control.

To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to:


Press the OK button.Settings

Press the OK button.MyKey

Press and hold the OK button until the following message displays.Clear MyKey

All MyKeys

ClearedNote: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status.

52


MyKey™

CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEMSTATUS

You can find information on programmedMyKey(s) using the information displaycontrol on the steering wheel. SeeInformation Displays (page 89).

To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to:

DescriptionMessage

Press the OK button.Settings

Press the OK button.MyKey

Select one of the following:

Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way to delete the accumulated distanceis by using an admin key to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as expected,then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or an admin key user recently cleared and thenrecreated a MyKey.

MyKey Dist.

Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to detect how manyMyKeys you have for your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.

{0} MyKeys

Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to determinehow many unrestricted keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional MyKey has beenprogrammed.

{0} Admin Keys

53


MyKey™

USING MYKEY WITH REMOTESTART SYSTEMSMyKey is not compatible with non

Ford-approved, aftermarket remote startsystems. If you choose to install a remotestart system, see an authorized dealer for aFord-approved remote start system.

MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTINGAll Vehicles

Potential CausesCondition

The key used to start the vehicle is not an admin key.I cannot create a MyKey.The key used to start the vehicle is the only key. There always has to be at least one admin key.The passive anti-theft system is not programmed to your vehicle. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 63).

The key used to start your vehicle is not an admin key.I cannot program theconfigurable settings. There are no MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 51).

The key used to start your vehicle is not an admin key.I cannot clear the MyKeys.There are no MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 51).

Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer.I lost the only admin key.

Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 63).I lost a key.

The MyKey is not being used by the intended user.The MyKey distance doesnot accumulate. The MyKeys have been cleared and the MyKey system has been reset.

54


MyKey™

Vehicles With Push-Button Start

Potential CausesCondition

The transmitter is not in the backup position. See MyKey Troubleshooting (page 54).I cannot create a MyKey.

An admin key is present when you switch the ignition on.There are no MyKey drivingmodes. There are no MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 51).

55


MyKey™

LOCKING AND UNLOCKINGYou can use the power door lock control orthe remote control to lock and unlock yourvehicle.

Power Door LocksThe power door lock control is on the driverand front passenger door panels.

E138628

Unlock.ALock.B

Remote ControlYou can use the remote control anytime yourvehicle is not running.

Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock)

E138629

Press the button to unlock thedriver door.Press the button again within three

seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signalswill flash.

Press and hold both the lock and unlockbuttons on the remote control for fourseconds to disable or enable two-stageunlocking. Disabling two-stage unlockingallows all vehicle doors to unlock with onepress of the button. The turn signals will flashtwice to indicate the unlocking mode waschanged. The unlocking mode will be appliedto the remote control, keyless entry keypadand intelligent access.Intelligent access at the driver door willunlock all doors when two-stage unlockingis disabled.

Locking the Doors

E138623

Press the button to lock all thedoors. The turn signals willilluminate.

Press the button again within three secondsto confirm that all the doors are closed. Thedoors will lock again, the horn will sound andthe turn signals will illuminate if all the doorsand the luggage compartment are closed.Note: If any door or the luggage compartmentis open, or if the hood is open on vehicles withan anti-theft alarm or remote start, the hornsounds twice and the lamps will not flash.

Opening the Luggage Compartment

E138630

Press twice within three secondsto open the luggage compartment.

Make sure to close and latch the luggagecompartment before driving your vehicle. Anunlatched luggage compartment may causeobjects to fall out or block your view.

Activating Intelligent AccessYou must have the intelligent access keywithin 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.

At the Front DoorsPull an exterior door handle to unlock andopen the door.

56


Locks

E173603

Press and hold the door handle lock sensorto lock your vehicle. To avoid unlocking thedoor inadvertently, make sure to only touchthe lock sensor and not other areas of thedoor handle.Note: Keep the door handle surface clean toavoid issues with operation.

At the Luggage CompartmentPress the release button.

Smart UnlocksThis feature helps to prevent you fromunintentionally locking your intelligent accesskey inside your vehicle’s passengercompartment or rear cargo area.

When you lock your vehicle using the driveror passenger power door lock control (withthe door open, vehicle park (P) and ignitionoff), after you close the door your vehicle willsearch for an intelligent access key in thepassenger compartment. If an intelligentaccess key is found inside your vehicle, all ofthe doors will immediately unlock and thehorn will sound, indicating that the intelligentaccess key is inside.In order to override the smart unlock featureand intentionally lock the intelligent accesskey inside your vehicle, you can lock yourvehicle after all doors are closed by using thekeyless entry keypad, pressing the lockbutton on another intelligent access key ortouching the locking area on the handle withanother intelligent access key in your hand.See Keyless Entry (page 59).When you open one of the front doors andlock your vehicle using the power door lockcontrol, all doors will lock then unlock if:• The ignition is on.• The ignition is off and the transmission is

not in park (P).

Autolock Feature (If Enabled)The autolock feature will lock all the doorswhen:• All doors are closed.• The ignition is on.• You shift into any gear putting your

vehicle in motion.• Your vehicle attains a speed greater than

12 mph (20 km/h).The autolock feature repeats when:• You open then close any door while the

ignition is on and your vehicle speed is9 mph (15 km/h) or lower.

• Your vehicle then attains a speed greaterthan 12 mph (20 km/h).

Autounlock Feature (If Enabled)The autounlock unlocks all the doors when:• The ignition is on, all the doors are closed,

and your vehicle has been in motion at aspeed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).

• Your vehicle has then come to a stop andyou switch the ignition off or to accessory.

• You open the driver door within 10minutes of switching the ignition off or toaccessory.

57


Locks

Note: The doors will not autounlock if youelectronically lock your vehicle after you switchthe ignition off and before you open the driverdoor.

Enabling or DisablingNote: You can enable or disable the autolockand autounlock features independently ofeach other.You can enable or disable these features inthe information display or your authorizeddealer can do it for you. See GeneralInformation (page 89).

Illuminated EntryThe interior lamps and select exterior lampswill illuminate when you unlock the doorswith the remote entry system.The illuminated entry system will turn off thelights if:• The ignition is on.• You press the remote control lock button.• After 25 seconds of illumination.The lights will not turn off if:• You turn them on with the lamp control.• Any door is open.

Illuminated ExitThe interior dome lamps, parking lamps andpuddle lamps illuminate when all doors areclosed and the ignition is turned off.The lights will turn off if all the doors remainclosed and:• 25 seconds elapse.• You press the START/STOP button.

Battery SaverIf you leave the courtesy lamps, dome lampsor headlamps on, the battery saver will shutthem off 10 minutes after you switch theignition off.

Accessory Mode Battery Saver forIntelligent Access KeysIf you leave your vehicle in the run ignitionstate, it will shut off once it detects a certainamount of battery drain or after 45 minutes.

Luggage Compartment ReleaseFrom Inside Your VehiclePress the button located on the instrumentpanel.

E173604

From Outside Your Vehicle1. Unlock the luggage compartment with

the remote control or power door lockcontrol. The luggage compartmentunlocks when you press the releasebutton if the intelligent access transmitteris within 3 ft (1 m).

58


Locks

E173605

2. Press the release button.

KEYLESS ENTRYSECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRYKEYPADThe keypad is located near the driver window.It is invisible until touched and then it lightsup so you can see and touch the appropriatebuttons.Note: If you enter your entry code too fast onthe keypad, the unlock function may not work.Re-enter your entry code more slowly.

E138637

You can use the keypad to:• Lock or unlock the doors.• Open the luggage compartment.• Recall memory features.• Enable or disable the autolock and

autounlock.• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.You can operate the keypad with thefactory-set five-digit entry code. The code islocated on the owner’s wallet card in theglove box and is available from an authorizeddealer. You can also create up to five of yourown five-digit personal entry codes.

Programming a Personal Entry Code1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five

seconds.3. Enter your personal five-digit code. You

must enter each number within fiveseconds of each other.

4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save personalcode 1.

The doors will lock and then unlock toconfirm that programming is complete.

59


Locks

To program additional personal entry codes,repeat steps 1 through 3, then for step 4:• Press 3·4 to save personal code 2.• Press 5·6 to save personal code 3.• Press 7·8 to save personal code 4.• Press 9·0 to save personal code 5.You may also program a personal entry codeusing the touchscreen.Tips:• Do not set a code that uses five of the

same number.• Do not use five numbers in sequential

order.• The factory-set five-digit code will work

even if you have set your own personalcode.

Recalling Memory Positions (IfEquipped)The programmed entry codes recall drivermemory positions as follows:• Entry code 1 recalls driver 1 memory

positions.• Entry code 2 recalls driver 2 memory

positions.• Entry code 3 recalls driver 3 memory

positions.

Note: Personal entry codes 4 and 5 will notrecall memory positions.Note: The factory-set five-digit code cannotbe associated with a memory setting.

Erasing a Personal Code1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad

within five seconds.3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds. You

must do this within five seconds ofcompleting Step 2.

All personal codes are now erased and onlythe factory-set five–digit code will work.

Anti-Scan FeatureThe keypad will go into an anti-scan mode ifyou enter the wrong code seven times (35consecutive button presses). This modedisables the keypad for one minute and thekeypad lamp will flash.The anti-scan feature will turn off after:• One minute of keypad inactivity.• Pressing the unlock button on the remote

control.

• Switching the ignition on.• Unlocking your vehicle using intelligent

access.

Unlocking and Locking the Doors

To Unlock the Driver DoorEnter the factory-set five-digit code or yourpersonal code. You must press each numberwithin five seconds of each other. The interiorlamps will illuminate.Note: All doors will unlock if you disable thetwo-stage unlocking feature. See Lockingand Unlocking (page 56).

To Unlock All DoorsEnter the factory-set five-digit code or yourpersonal code, then press 3·4 within fiveseconds.

To Lock All DoorsPress and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same time(with the driver door closed). You do notneed to enter the keypad code first.

Displaying the Factory Set CodeNote: You will need to have two programmedintelligent access keys for this procedure.

60


Locks

To display the factory-set five-digit code inthe information display:

E173591

1. Place the first programmed key in thebackup slot inside the glovecompartment. The key ring must be atthe top with the buttons facing towardthe rear.

2. Press the START/STOP button onceand wait a few seconds.

3. Press the START/STOP button againand remove the key.

4. Insert the second programmed key intothe backup slot, then press theSTART/STOP button.

The factory-set five-digit code will appear inthe information display for a few seconds.

Note: The code may not display until afterany other warning messages first display.

INTERIOR LUGGAGECOMPARTMENT RELEASE

WARNINGSKeep vehicle doors and luggagecompartment locked and keep keysand remote transmitters out of a child’s

reach. Unsupervised children could lockthemselves in the trunk and risk injury.Children should be taught not to play invehicles.

Do not leave children or animalsunattended in the vehicle. On hot days,the temperature in the luggage

compartment or vehicle interior can rise veryquickly. Exposure of people or animals tothese high temperatures for even a short timecan cause death or serious heat-relatedinjuries, including brain damage. Smallchildren are particularly at risk.

Your vehicle is equipped with a releasehandle that provides a means of escape forchildren and adults if they become lockedinside the luggage compartment.

Adults should familiarize themselves withthe operation and location of the releasehandle.

E144403

61


Locks

The handle is located inside the luggagecompartment either on the luggagecompartment door (lid) or near the taillamps. It is composed of a material that willglow for hours in darkness following briefexposure to ambient light.Pull the handle and push up on the luggagecompartment door (lid) to open from withinthe luggage compartment.

62


Locks

PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEMNote: The system is not compatible withnon-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.Use of these systems may result in vehiclestarting problems and a loss of securityprotection.Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices ora second coded key on the same key chainmay cause vehicle starting problems if theyare too close to the key when starting yourvehicle. Prevent these objects from touchingthe coded key while starting your vehicle.Switch the ignition off, move all objects on thekey chain away from the coded key and restartyour vehicle if a problem occurs.Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key inyour vehicle. Always take your keys and lockall doors when leaving your vehicle. Thesystem is an engine immobilization system. Itwill not start without a coded key programmedto your vehicle. If you use the wrong key, amessage may appear in the informationdisplay.

SecuriLockThe system helps prevent your vehicle fromstarting unless you use a coded keyprogrammed to your vehicle. Using the wrongkey may prevent your vehicle from starting.A message may appear in the informationdisplay.If you are unable to start your vehicle with acorrectly coded key, it is not operatingproperly. A message may appear in theinformation display.

Automatic ArmingYour vehicle arms immediately afterswitching the ignition off.

Automatic DisarmingSwitching the ignition on with a coded keydisarms your vehicle.

Replacement KeysNote: Your vehicle comes equipped with twointelligent access keys.The intelligent access key functions as aprogrammed key that operates the driverdoor lock and activates the intelligent accesswith push button start system, as well as aremote control.

If your programmed transmitters are lost orstolen and you do not have an extra codedkey, you will need to have your vehicle towedto an authorized dealer. You need to erasethe key codes from your vehicle and programnew coded keys.Store an extra programmed key away fromyour vehicle in a safe place to help preventany inconveniences. Contact your authorizeddealer to purchase additional spare orreplacement keys.

Programming a Spare Intelligent AccessKeyNote: You can program a maximum of fourintelligent access keys to your vehicle.You must have two previously programmedintelligent access keys inside your vehicle andthe new unprogrammed intelligent accesskeys readily accessible. Contact anauthorized dealer to have the spare keyprogrammed if two previously programmedkeys are not available.

63


Security

Make sure that your vehicle is off beforebeginning this procedure. Make sure that youclose all the doors before beginning and thatthey remain closed throughout the procedure.Perform all steps within 30 seconds ofstarting the sequence. Stop and wait for atleast one minute before starting again if youperform any steps out of sequence.Read and understand the entire procedurebefore you begin.

E173591

1. Place the first programmed key in thebackup slot inside the glovecompartment, then press the push buttonignition switch.

2. Wait five seconds and then press thepush button ignition switch again.

3. Remove the intelligent access key.

4. Within 10 seconds, place a secondprogrammed intelligent access key in thebackup slot. Press the push buttonignition switch.

5. Wait five seconds and then press thepush button ignition switch again.

6. Remove the intelligent access key.7. Place the unprogrammed intelligent

access key in the backup slot and pressthe push button ignition switch.

Programming is now complete. Verify theremote control functions operate and yourvehicle starts with the new intelligent accesskey.If programming was not successful, wait 10seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 7. If youare still unsuccessful, take your vehicle toyour authorized dealer.

ANTI-THEFT ALARMThe system will warn you of an unauthorizedentry to your vehicle. Anyone opening anydoor, the luggage compartment or the hoodwithout using a valid key, remote control orkeyless entry keypad will set off the alarm.The turn signal lamps will flash and soundthe horn up to a total of 10 times.

Take all remote controls to an authorizeddealer if there is any potential alarm problemwith your vehicle.

Arming the AlarmThe alarm is ready to arm when there is nota key in the ignition. Electronically lock thevehicle to arm the alarm.

Disarming the AlarmTo disarm the alarm do any of the following:• Press the power door unlock button

within the 20-second pre-arm period.• Unlock the doors with the keyless entry

pad.• Press the unlock button on the remote

control.• Enter the vehicle using intelligent access.• Press the panic button on the remote

control. The alarm system remainsarmed, but the horn and turn indicatorsshut off.

Note: If the driver door is unlocked with a key,a tone will sound when you open the door anda message will appear in the informationdisplay. You will have 12 seconds to disarmthe alarm using any of the actions above,otherwise the alarm goes off.

64


Security

ADJUSTING THE STEERINGWHEELNote: Make sure that you are sitting in thecorrect position. See Sitting in the CorrectPosition (page 109).

WARNINGDo not adjust the steering wheel whenyour vehicle is moving.

E161834

Use the control on the side of the steeringcolumn to adjust the position.To adjust:• Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the

control.• Telescope: Press the front or rear of the

control.

End of Travel PositionThe steering column sets a stopping positionjust short of the end of the column positionto prevent damage to the steering column.A new stopping position sets if the steeringcolumn encounters an object when tilting ortelescoping.To reset the steering column to its normalstopping position:1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing the

motion of the steering column.2. Press and hold the steering column

control until the steering column stopsmoving.

3. Press the steering column control again.The steering column may begin to moveagain.

4. When the steering column stops,continue holding the control for anadditional few seconds.

5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.A new stopping position is set. The next timeyou tilt or telescope the steering column, itwill stop just short of the end of the columnposition.

Memory FeatureYou can save and recall the steering columnposition with the memory function. SeeMemory Function (page 114).Note: Pressing the adjustment control duringmemory recall cancels the operation.

Easy Entry and Exit FeatureWhen you switch the ignition off, the steeringcolumn will move to allow extra room to exityour vehicle. The column will return to theprevious setting when you switch the ignitionon. You can enable or disable this feature inthe information display. See InformationDisplays (page 89).

AUDIO CONTROLYou can operate the following functions withthe control:

65


Steering Wheel

E173608

Seek up and down or next.AMedia.BVolume up or down.CMute.D

MEDIAPress repeatedly to scroll through availableaudio modes.

Seek, Next or PreviousPress the seek button to:• Tune the radio to the next or previous

stored preset.• Play the next or the previous track.

Press and hold the seek button to:• Tune the radio to the next station up or

down the frequency band.• Seek through a track.

VOICE CONTROL

E173609

V

Phone mode.AVoice recognition.B

See your SYNC information.

CRUISE CONTROLType 1

E173610

66


Steering Wheel

Type 2

E173611

See Cruise Control (page 166).

INFORMATION DISPLAYCONTROL

E173617

See Information Displays (page 89).

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If

Equipped)


67


Steering Wheel

ADJUSTING THE PEDALS

WARNINGNever use the controls while your feetare on the accelerator and brake pedalsand the vehicle is moving.

You can find the control on the left side ofthe steering column. Press and hold theappropriate side of the control to move thepedals.

A B

E162916

A. FartherB. CloserYou can save and recall the pedal positionswith the memory feature. See MemoryFunction (page 114).

Note: Adjust the pedals only when yourvehicle is in P (Park).

68


Pedals (If Equipped)

WINDSHIELD WIPERS

E173262

Rotate the end of the control away from youto increase the speed of the wipers. Rotatetoward you to decrease the speed of thewipers.Note: Fully defrost the windshield beforeswitching on the windshield wipers.Note: Make sure you switch off the windshieldwipers before entering a car wash.Note: Clean the windshield and wiper bladesif they begin to leave streaks or smears. If thatdoes not resolve the issue, install new wiperblades.

Note: Do not operate the wipers on a drywindshield. This may scratch the glass,damage the wiper blades or cause the wipermotor to burn out. Always use the windshieldwashers before wiping a dry windshield.

AUTOWIPERS

E173262

Adjust the rotary control to increase ordecrease the sensitivity of the rain sensor. Onthe lowest sensitivity setting, the wipers turnon when there is a large amount of moistureon the windshield. On the highest sensitivitysetting, the wipers turn on when there is asmall amount of moisture on the windshield.

Autowipers uses a rain sensor, located nearthe interior mirror. The rain sensor monitorsthe amount of moisture on the windshield. Itturns on the wipers and adjusts the wiperspeed by the amount of moisture that thesensor detects on the windshield. You canturn this feature on and off in the informationdisplay. See General Information (page89).Keep the outside of the windshield clean. Therain sensor is very sensitive. If the area aroundthe mirror is dirty, then the wipers mayoperate if dirt, mist or insects hit thewindshield.Note: Fully defrost the windshield before youswitch on the windshield wipers.Note: Make sure you switch off the windshieldwipers before entering a car wash.Note: Clean the windshield and wiper bladesif they begin to leave streaks or smears. If thatdoes not resolve the issue, install new wiperblades.Note: If you switch autolamps on inconjunction with autowipers, your low beamheadlamps will turn on automatically whenthe rain sensor turns on the windshield wiperscontinuously.

69


Wipers and Washers

Note: Wet or winter driving conditions withice, snow or salty road mist can causeinconsistent and unexpected wiping orsmearing.In these conditions, you can do the followingto help keep your windshield clear:• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers

to reduce the amount of smearing.• Adjust the rotary control to normal or

high-speed wipe.• Switch off the autowipers.

WINDSHIELD WASHERS

E173263

Press the end of the stalk to operate thewasher.• A brief press causes a single wipe without

washer fluid.• A quick press and hold causes the wipers

to swipe three times with washer fluid.• A long press and hold will operate the

wipers and washer fluid for a short time.A wipe will occur a few seconds afterwashing to clear any remaining washer fluid.This feature can be switched on or off in theinformation display. See GeneralInformation (page 89).Note: Do not operate the washers when thewasher reservoir is empty. This may cause thewasher pump to overheat.

70


Wipers and Washers

GENERAL INFORMATIONCondensation in Lamp AssembliesExterior lamps have vents to accommodatenormal changes in air pressure.Condensation can be a natural by-productof this design. When moist air enters the lampassembly through the vents, there is apossibility that condensation can occur whenthe temperature is cold. When normalcondensation occurs, a fine mist can form onthe interior of the lens. The fine misteventually clears and exits through the ventsduring normal operation.Clearing time may take as long as 48 hoursunder dry weather conditions.Examples of acceptable condensation are:• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,

drip marks or large droplets).• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the

lens.Examples of unacceptable condensation are:• A water puddle inside the lamp.• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets

present on the interior of the lens.

If you see any unacceptable condensation,have your vehicle checked by an authorizeddealer.

LIGHTING CONTROL

E173257

A

Off.AParking lamps, instrument panellamps, license plate lamps and taillamps.

B

Headlamps.C

High Beams

E167827

Push the lever away from you to switch thehigh beam on.Push the lever away from you again or pullthe lever toward you to switch the high beamoff.

71


Lighting

Headlamp Flasher

E163268

Slightly pull the lever toward you and releaseit to flash the headlamps.

AUTOLAMPS

WARNINGThe autolamps switch position may notactivate the headlamps in all lowvisibility conditions, such as daytime

fog. Make sure the headlamps are switchedto auto or on, as appropriate, during all lowvisibility conditions. Failure to do so mayresult in a crash.

E173258

A

When the lighting control is in the autolampsposition, the headlamps automatically turnon in low light situations or when the wipersactivate.If equipped, the following also activate whenthe lighting control is in the autolampsposition and you switch them on in theinformation display:• Configurable daytime running lamps.• Automatic high beam control.• Adaptive headlamp control.The headlamps remain on for a period of timeafter you switch the ignition off. Use theinformation display controls to adjust theperiod of time that the headlamps remainon. See Information Displays (page 89).

Note: With the headlamps in the autolampsposition, you cannot switch the high beamheadlamps on until the autolamps systemturns the low beam headlamps on.

Windshield Wiper ActivatedHeadlampsThe windshield wiper activated headlampsturn on within 10 seconds when you switchthe windshield wipers on and the lightingcontrol is in the autolamps position. Theyturn off approximately 60 seconds after youswitch the windshield wipers off.The headlamps do not turn on by wiperactivation:• During a mist wipe.• When the wipers are on to clear washer

fluid during a wash condition.• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.Note: If you switch autolamps and autowiperson, the headlamps will automatically turn onwhen the windshield wipers continuouslyoperate.

72


Lighting

INSTRUMENT LIGHTINGDIMMERNote: If you disconnect and connect thebattery, or fully discharge and charge thebattery, the lighting level will switch to themaximum setting.

E173259

Use the instrument lighting dimmer to adjustthe brightness of the instrument panel andall applicable lighting in your vehicle.• Tap the top or bottom of the control to

the first detent to brighten or dim allinterior lighting incrementally.

• Press and hold the top or bottom of thecontrol to the first detent until you reachthe desired lighting level.

• Press and hold the top of the control tothe second detent to switch the interiorlights on.

• Press and hold the bottom of the controlto the second detent to switch the interiorlights off.

HEADLAMP EXIT DELAYAfter you switch the ignition off, you canswitch the headlamps on by pulling thedirection indicator lever toward you. You willhear a short tone. The headlamps will switchoff automatically after three minutes withany door open or 30 seconds after the lastdoor has been closed. You can cancel thisfeature by pulling the direction indicatortoward you again or switching the ignition on.

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If

Equipped)

WARNINGAlways remember to switch yourheadlamps on in low light situations orduring inclement weather. The system

does not activate the tail lamps and may notprovide adequate lighting during theseconditions. Failure to activate yourheadlamps under these conditions may resultin a collision.

The system switches the signature lamps onin day light conditions.To switch the system on, switch the ignitionon, and switch the lighting control to the off,autolamp, or parking lamp position.

73


Lighting

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAMCONTROL (If Equipped)

The system will automatically turn on yourhigh beams if it is dark enough and no othertraffic is present. When it detects theheadlights of an approaching vehicle, the taillamps of the preceding vehicle or streetlighting, the system will turn off the highbeams before they distract other drivers. Thelow beams remain on.Note: If it appears that automatic control ofthe high beams is not functioning properly,check the windshield in front of the camerafor a blockage. A clear view of the road isrequired for proper system operation. Haveany windshield damage in the area of thecamera’s field-of-view repaired.Note: If the system detects a blockage suchas bird droppings, bug splatter, snow or ice,and you do not observe changes, the systemwill go into low beam mode until you clear theblockage. A message may also appear in theinstrument cluster display noting the frontcamera is blocked.

Note: Typical road dust, dirt and water spotswill not affect the performance of theautomatic high beam system. However, in coldor inclement weather conditions, you willnotice a decrease in the availability of the highbeam system, especially at start up. If youwant to change the beam state independentlyof the automatic control, you may switch thehigh beams on or off using the lever. Automaticcontrol will resume when conditions arecorrect.Note: Modification of the vehicle ride heightsuch as using much larger tires, may degradefeature performance.A camera sensor, centrally mounted behindthe windshield of your vehicle, continuouslymonitors conditions to decide when to turnthe high beams off and on.Once the system is active, the high beamswill turn on if:• The ambient light level is low enough.• There is no traffic in front of the vehicle.• The vehicle speed is greater than 32 mph

(52 km/h).

The high beams will turn off if:• The system detects the headlamps of an

approaching vehicle or the tail lamps ofa preceding vehicle.

• Vehicle speed falls below 27 mph(44 km/h).

• The ambient light level is high enoughthat high beams are not required.

• The system detects severe rain, snow orfog.

• The camera is blocked.

Activating the SystemSwitch on the system using the informationdisplay and autolamps. See InformationDisplays (page 89).Switch the lighting control to the autolamps position.

74


Lighting

Manually Overriding the System

E167827

When the automatic control has activatedthe high beams, pushing or pulling the stalkwill provide a temporary override to lowbeam.Use the information display menu topermanently deactivate the system, or switchthe lighting control from autolamps toheadlamps.

FRONT FOG LAMPS

E193834

A

Pull the lighting control toward you to switchthe fog lamps on.You can switch the fog lamps on when thelighting control is in any position except Offand the high beams are not on.

ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPSThe headlamp beams move in the samedirection as the steering wheel. This providesmore visibility when driving around curves.A. Without adaptive headlamps.B. With adaptive headlamps.

E161714

B

A

The system only works with the lightingcontrol in the autolamp position.Note: There is a delay of two to five secondsbefore the system operates when you driveyour vehicle.

75


Lighting

Note: The system is only active at speedsabove 3 mph (5 km/h).The system has a power-up movement checkfeature. When your start your vehicle, thelamps track left to right, then back to centerto alert the driver that the system is workingproperly.

DIRECTION INDICATORS

E163272

• To operate the left-hand directionindicator, push the lever down until itstops.

• To operate the right-hand directionindicator, push the lever up until it stops.

• To manually cancel direction indicatoroperation, push the lever again in eitherdirection.

Lane ChangeTo indicate a left or right lane change:• Push the lever up or down to the first stop

position and release. The directionindicator will flash three times and stop.

• Push the lever up or down to the first stopposition and hold. The direction indicatorwill flash for as long as you hold the leverin this position.

INTERIOR LAMPSThe lamps will switch on when you have metone of the following conditions:• You open any door.• You press a remote control button.• You press the outer edge of the clear lens

on the front row map lamp.

Front Row Map Lamps

E166237

To switch on the map lamps, press the outeredge of the clear lens.The front row map lamp will automaticallyturn on when:• Any door is opened.• You press and hold the top of the

instrument lighting dimmer switch pastthe first detent.

• You press any of the remote entrycontrols and the ignition is in the offposition.

76


Lighting

Second Row Map Lamps

E173272

The second row lamps light when:• Any door is open.• You press and hold the top of the

instrument lighting dimmer switch pastthe first detent.

• You press any of the remote entrycontrols and the ignition is in the offposition.

Press the lamp lens to activate the readinglamps.

AMBIENT LIGHTINGAdjust the ambient lighting using thetouchscreen.

77


Lighting

POWER WINDOWS

WARNINGSDo not leave children unattended inyour vehicle and do not let them playwith the power windows. They may

seriously injure themselves.When closing the power windows, youshould verify they are free ofobstructions and make sure that

children and pets are not in the proximity ofthe window openings.

E146043

Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when justone of the windows is open. Lower theopposite window slightly to reduce this noise.

Press the switch to open the window.Lift the switch to close the window.

One-Touch DownPress the switch fully and release it. Pressagain or lift it to stop the window.

One-Touch UpLift the switch fully and release it. Press orlift it again to stop the window.

Bounce-BackThe window will stop automatically whileclosing. It reverses some distance if there isan obstacle in the way.

Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature

WARNINGWhen you override the bounce-backfeature the window will not reverse ifit detects an obstacle. Take care when

closing the windows to avoid personal injuryor damage to your vehicle.

Pull up the window switch and hold within afew seconds of the window reaching thebounce-back position. The window travelsup with no bounce-back protection. Thewindow stops if you release the switch beforethe window closes fully.

Window Lock

E144072

Press the control to lock or unlock the rearwindow controls. It will illuminate when youlock the rear window controls.

Accessory DelayYou can use the window switches for severalminutes after you switch the ignition off oruntil you open either front door.

78


Windows and Mirrors

GLOBAL OPENING AND CLOSINGYou can use the remote control to operatethe windows with the ignition off.Note: You can enable or disable this featurein the information display or see an authorizeddealer. See General Information (page 89).Note: To operate this feature, accessory delaymust not be active.

Opening the WindowsYou can only open the windows for a shorttime after you unlock your vehicle with theremote control. After you unlock your vehicle,press and hold the remote control unlockbutton to open the windows and vent themoonroof. Release the button oncemovement starts. Press the lock or unlockbutton to stop movement.

Closing the WindowsWARNING

When closing the windows andmoonroof, you should verify they arefree of obstructions and make sure that

children and pets are not in the proximity ofthe window openings.

To close the windows and moonroof, pressand hold the remote control lock button.Release the button once movement starts.Press the lock or unlock button to stopmovement.

EXTERIOR MIRRORSPower Exterior Mirrors

WARNINGDo not adjust the mirrors when yourvehicle is moving.

E144073

Left-hand mirrorAAdjustment controlBRight-hand mirrorC

To adjust a mirror:1. Select the mirror you want to adjust. The

control will illuminate.2. Adjust the position of the mirror.3. Press the mirror switch again.

Fold-Away Exterior MirrorsPush the mirror toward the door windowglass. Make sure that you fully engage themirror in its support when returning it to itsoriginal position.

79


Windows and Mirrors

Heated Exterior MirrorsSee Heated Windows and Mirrors (page107).

Memory MirrorsYou can save and recall the mirror positionsthrough the memory function. See MemoryFunction (page 114).

Auto-Dimming FeatureThe driver’s exterior mirror will automaticallydim when the interior auto-dimming mirroris activated.

Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors (If

Equipped)

WARNINGObjects in the blind spot mirror arecloser than they appear.

Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convexmirror built into the upper outboard cornerof the exterior mirrors. They are designed toincrease your visibility along the side of yourvehicle.

Check the main mirror first before a lanechange, then check the blind spot mirror. Ifno vehicles are present in the blind spotmirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane isat a safe distance, signal that you intend tochange lanes. Glance over your shoulder toverify traffic is clear and carefully changelanes.

A

B

C

E138665

80


Windows and Mirrors

The image of the approaching vehicle is smalland near the inboard edge of the main mirrorwhen it is at a distance. The image becomeslarger and begins to move outboard acrossthe main mirror as the vehicle approaches(A). The image will transition from the mainmirror and begin to appear in the blind spotmirror as the vehicle approaches (B). Thevehicle will transition to your peripheral fieldof view as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C).

Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)

See Blind Spot Information System (page179).

INTERIOR MIRROR

WARNINGDo not adjust the mirror when yourvehicle is moving.

Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of anymirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or otherpetroleum or ammonia-based cleaningproducts.You can adjust the interior mirror to yourpreference. Some mirrors also have a secondpivot point. This lets you move the mirrorhead up or down and from side to side.

Auto-Dimming MirrorNote: Do not block the sensors on the frontand back of the mirror. Mirror performancemay be affected. A rear center passenger orraised rear center head restraint may alsoblock light from reaching the sensor.The mirror will dim automatically to reduceglare when bright lights are detected frombehind your vehicle. It will automaticallyreturn to normal reflection when you selectreverse gear to make sure you have a clearview when backing up.

SUN VISORS

E138666

Rotate the sun visor toward the side windowand extend it rearward for extra shade.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

E162197

Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.

SUN SHADES (If Equipped)

Note: Do not try to move the sun shademanually.The power rear sun shade covers the rearwindow of the vehicle.

81


Windows and Mirrors

E187440

The control is on the center console.The sun shade has a one-touch up and downfeature. Press and release the control tomove the sun shade. To stop motion, pressthe control a second time.The sun shade automatically retracts whenyou shift the transmission into reverse (R).

MOONROOF (If Equipped)

WARNINGSDo not let children play with themoonroof or leave them unattended inthe vehicle. They may seriously hurt

themselves.

WARNINGSWhen closing the dual panel moonroof,you should verify that it is free ofobstructions and make sure that

children and pets are not in the proximity ofthe roof opening.

The moonroof and sunscreen controls are onthe overhead console.The moonroof and sunscreen have aone-touch open and close feature. To stopthe motion during a one-touch operation,touch the control a second time.

Opening and Closing the Sunscreen

E187439

Press and release the control to open thesunscreen.

Note: The sunscreen stops at the first panelfor the dual panel moonroof. Press and releasethe control again to continue opening thesunscreen past the second panel.Pull and release the control to close thesunscreen. If open, the moonroofautomatically closes prior to the sunscreenclosing.

Opening and Closing the MoonroofPress and release the SLIDE control to openthe moonroof. The sunscreen, if closed,automatically opens prior to the moonroofopening.Pull and release the SLIDE control to closethe moonroof.

Bounce-BackThe moonroof automatically stops closingand reverses if it detects an obstacle whenclosing.To override the bounce-back function, pulland hold the SLIDE control within twoseconds of a bounce-back event. In this case,the closing force begins to increase each ofthe next three times the moonroof closes.

82


Windows and Mirrors

Venting the MoonroofPress and release the TILT control to ventthe moonroof.Pull and release the TILT control to close themoonroof.

83


Windows and Mirrors

GAUGES Note: Cluster shown in standard measure –metric clusters similar.

E173225

Left information display. See General Information (page 89).ASpeedometerBRight information display.C

84


Instrument Cluster

WARNING LAMPS ANDINDICATORSThe following warning lamps and indicatorswill alert you to a vehicle condition that maybecome serious. Some lamps will illuminatewhen you start your vehicle to make sure theywork. If any lamps remain on after startingyour vehicle, refer to the respective systemwarning lamp for further information.Note: Some warning indicators appear in theinformation display and function the same asa warning lamp, but do not display when youstart your vehicle.

Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)

E144524

The speed control system indicatorlight changes color to indicatewhat mode the system is in: See

Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 167).On (white light): Illuminates when theadaptive cruise control system is turned on.Turns off when the speed control system isturned off.Engaged (green light): Illuminates when theadaptive cruise control system is engaged.Turns off when the speed control system isdisengaged.

Anti-Lock Braking SystemIf it illuminates when you aredriving, this indicates amalfunction. You will continue to

have the normal braking system (withoutABS) unless the brake system warning lampis also illuminated. Have the system checkedby your authorized dealer.

BatteryIf it illuminates while driving, itindicates a malfunction. Switch offall unnecessary electrical

equipment and have the system checked byyour authorized dealer immediately.

Brake System

E144522

It will illuminate when you engagethe parking brake with the ignitionon.

If it illuminates when you are driving, checkthat the parking brake is not engaged. If theparking brake is not engaged, this indicateslow brake fluid level or a brake systemmalfunction. Have the system checkedimmediately by your authorized dealer.

WARNINGDriving your vehicle with the warninglamp on is dangerous. A significantdecrease in braking performance may

occur. It will take you longer to stop yourvehicle. Have your vehicle checked by yourauthorized dealer immediately. Drivingextended distances with the parking brakeengaged can cause brake failure and the riskof personal injury.

Cruise Control (If Equipped)

E71340

It will illuminate when you switchthis feature on.

Direction IndicatorIlluminates when the left or rightturn signal or the hazard warningflasher is turned on. If the

indicators stay on or flash faster, check for aburned out bulb. See Changing a Bulb(page 259).

Door AjarDisplays when the ignition is on andany door is not completely closed.

85


Instrument Cluster

Engine Coolant TemperatureIlluminates when the enginecoolant temperature is high. Stopthe vehicle as soon as possible,

switch off the engine and let cool. SeeEngine Coolant Check (page 247).

Engine OilIf it illuminates with the enginerunning or when you are driving, thisindicates a malfunction. Stop your

vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so andswitch the engine off. Check the engine oillevel. See Engine Oil Check (page 245).Note: Do not resume your journey if itilluminates despite the level being correct.Have the system checked by your authorizeddealer immediately.

Fasten Safety BeltIt will illuminate and a chime willsound to remind you to fasten yoursafety belt. See Seatbelt

Reminder (page 33).

Front AirbagIf it fails to illuminate when youstart your vehicle, continues toflash or remains on, it indicates a

malfunction. Have the system checked byyour authorized dealer.

Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped)

Lights when you switch the frontfog lamps on.

Grade Assist (If Equipped)

E144523

It will illuminate when the gradeassist function has been turned on.

Heads Up Display (If Equipped)

E156133

A red beam of lights will illuminateon the windshield in certaininstances when using adaptive

cruise control and/or the collision warningsystem. It will also illuminate momentarilywhen you start your vehicle to make sure thedisplay works.

High BeamIt will illuminate when you switchthe high beam headlamps on. It willflash when you use the headlamp

flasher.

Low Fuel LevelIt will illuminate when the fuel levelis low or the fuel tank is nearlyempty. Refuel as soon as possible.

Low Tire Pressure WarningIt will illuminate when your tirepressure is low. If the lamp remainson with the engine running or when

driving, check your tire pressure as soon aspossible.It will also illuminate momentarily when youswitch the ignition on to confirm the lamp isfunctional. If it does not illuminate when youswitch the ignition on, or begins to flash atany time, have the system checked by yourauthorized dealer.

Low Washer Fluid

E132353

It will illuminate when thewindshield washer fluid is low.

86


Instrument Cluster

Parking LampsIt will illuminate when you switchthe parking lamps on.

Powertrain FaultIlluminates when a powertrain oran AWD fault has been detected.Contact your authorized dealer as

soon as possible.

Service Engine SoonIf the service engine soon indicatorlight stays illuminated after theengine is started, it indicates that

the On Board Diagnostics system (OBD) hasdetected a malfunction of the vehicleemissions control system. Refer to On boarddiagnostics (OBD) in the Fuel and Refuelingchapter for more information about havingyour vehicle serviced. See Emission ControlSystem (page 137).

If the light is blinking, engine misfire isoccurring which could damage your catalyticconverter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoidheavy acceleration and deceleration) andhave your vehicle serviced immediately.

WARNINGUnder engine misfire conditions,excessive exhaust temperatures coulddamage the catalytic converter, the

fuel system, interior floor coverings or othervehicle components, possibly causing a fire.Have an authorized dealer service yourvehicle immediately.

The service engine soon indicator lightilluminates when the ignition is first turnedon prior to engine start to check the bulb andto indicate whether the vehicle is ready forInspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing.Normally, the service engine soon light willstay on until the engine is cranked, then turnitself off if no malfunctions are present.However, if after 15 seconds the serviceengine soon light blinks eight times, it meansthat the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing.See Emission Control System (page 137).

Stability Control

E138639

It will flash when the system isactive. If it remains illuminated ordoes not illuminate when you

switch the ignition on, this indicates amalfunction. During a malfunction the systemwill switch off. Have the system checked byyour authorized dealer immediately. SeeUsing Stability Control (page 155).

Stability Control OffIt will illuminate when you switchthe system off. It will go out whenyou switch the system back on or

when you switch the ignition off. See UsingStability Control (page 155).

AUDIBLE WARNINGS ANDINDICATORSKeyless Warning AlertThe horn will sound twice when you exit yourvehicle with the intelligent access key andyour vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicleis still on.

87


Instrument Cluster

Headlamps On Warning ChimeSounds when you remove the key from theignition and open the driver's door and youhave left the headlamps or parking lamps on.

Parking Brake On Warning ChimeSounds when you have left the parking brakeon and drive your vehicle. If the warningchime remains on after you have releasedthe parking brake, have the system checkedby your authorized dealer immediately.

88


Instrument Cluster

GENERAL INFORMATION



Various systems on your vehicle can becontrolled using the information displaycontrols on the steering wheel.Corresponding information is displayed in theinformation display.

Information Display Controls

E173228

• Press the up and down arrow buttons toscroll through and highlight the optionswithin a menu.

• Press the right arrow button to enter asub-menu.

• Press the left arrow button to exit a menu.• Press and hold the left arrow button at

any time to return to the main menudisplay (escape button).

• Press the OK button to choose andconfirm settings or messages.

E204495

This icon gives you the ability toswitch a feature on or off. A checkin the box indicates the feature is

enabled, and unchecked indicates the featureis disabled.

Main menuFrom the main menu bar on the left side ofthe information display, you can choose fromthe following categories:Scroll up or down to highlight one of thecategories and then press the right arrow keyor OK to enter into that category. Press theleft arrow key as needed to exit back to themain menu.• Display Mode• Trip 1 & 2• Fuel Economy• Driver Assist• Settings

Display ModeUse the up or down arrow buttons to choosebetween the following display options.

89


Information Displays

Display Mode

XXX mi (km) to empty, Fuel gauge and Total odometerOption 1

Round tachometer, Fuel gauge and Total odometerOption 2

Round tachometer, Engine coolant temp gauge, Fuel gauge and Total odometerOption 3

Digital speedometer, Fuel gauge and Total odometerOption 4

Regardless of display mode chosen, when you use the SelectShift Automatic™ transmission (SST), the cluster will change to the roundtachometer if not already selected.

XXX mi (km) to emptyShows approximate fuel level before the fueltank reaches empty. The value is dynamicand can change (raise or lower) dependingon driving style.

Fuel gaugeSwitch the ignition on. The fuel gauge willindicate approximately how much fuel is inthe fuel tank. The arrow next to the fuel pumpsymbol shows the fuel filler door side of yourvehicle. When the fuel level becomes low,the level indicator will change to amber.When the fuel level becomes critically low,the level indicator will change to red.

Note: The fuel gauge level may vary slightlywhen your vehicle is moving or when drivingon a slope.Note: When a MyKey® is in use, low fuelwarnings will display earlier.

Round tachometerIndicates the engine speed in revolutions perminute. Driving with your tachometer pointercontinuously at the top of the scale maydamage the engine. During SelectShiftAutomatic™ transmission (SST) use, thecurrently selected gear will appear in thedisplay.

Engine coolant temperature gaugeIndicates engine coolant temperature. Atnormal operating temperature, the levelindicator will be in the normal range. If theengine coolant temperature exceeds thenormal range, stop your vehicle as soon assafely possible, switch off the engine and letthe engine cool.

Trip 1 & 2Choose between the following trip displays.

90



Trip 1 & 2

Trip distance

Average fuel economy

Elapsed trip time

Hold OK to Reset

Note: Press and hold OK to reset the currentlydisplayed trip information.

Trip distanceShows the accumulated trip distance.

Average fuel economyShows the average fuel economy for a giventrip.

Elapsed trip timeWhen you switch off your vehicle the timerstops and restarts when you restart yourvehicle.

Fuel EconomyUse the left or right arrow buttons to choosethe desired fuel economy display.

Fuel Economy

Inst Fuel Economy

30 Min Fuel History

Note: Press and hold OK to reset the currentlydisplayed fuel usage information.

Inst Fuel EconomyThis display shows a visual graph of yourinstantaneous fuel economy.

30 Min Fuel HistoryThis display shows a bar chart of your fuelhistory.

91



Driver Assist Use the up or down arrow buttons to choosebetween the following display options.

Note: Some items are optional and may notappear.

Driver Assist

Traction Control

Blindspot

High, Normal or LowSensitivityCollision Warn

Cross Traffic

—Adaptive or NormalCruise Control

Driver Alert

Front Park Aid

Alert, Aid or BothModeLane Keeping

High, Normal or LowIntensity

Rear Park Aid

SettingsIn this mode, you can configure differentdriver setting choices.

Note: Some items are optional and may notappear.

92



Settings

Comfort, Normal or SportHandling in DDrive ControlVehicle

Normal or SportHandling in S

Auto Engine Off

Normal or TowingDTE Calculation

Easy Entry / Exit

Auto HighbeamLighting

Select time intervalAutolamp Delay

AutolockLocks

Autounlock

All Doors or Driver's DoorRemote Unlocking

Remaining Life XXX% - Hold OK to ResetOil Life Reset

Auto or Last SettingsClimate ControlRemote Start

Auto Heated or OffFront SeatsFront Seats and Steering Wheel

5, 10 or 15 minutesDuration

System

Remote OpenWindows

93



Settings

Remote Close

Courtesy WipeWipers

Rain Sensing

MyKeys and Admin KeysMykey StatusMyKey

Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKey

Always On or User Selectable911 Assist

Traction Control

Choose desired speed or offMax Speed

Speed Minder

Volume Limiter

Always On or User SelectableDo Not Disturb

Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear MyKeys

Miles & GAL, l/100km or km/lDistanceDisplay Settings

Fuel Gauge or Fuel + TachGauge Display

Choose your applicable setting - Hold OK to SetLanguage

Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C)Temperature

Note: Some MyKey items will only appear ifa MyKey is set.

94



INFORMATION MESSAGESNote: Depending on the vehicle optionsequipped with your vehicle, not all of themessages will display or be available. Certainmessages may be abbreviated or shorteneddepending upon which cluster type you have.

E173229

Press the OK button to acknowledge andremove some messages from the informationdisplay. Other messages will be removedautomatically after a short time.Certain messages need to be confirmedbefore you can access the menus.

Adaptive Cruise Control

ActionMessage

A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise from engaging. See Using Adaptive CruiseControl (page 167).

Adaptive Cruise Malfunction

Conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise cannot function properly. See Using AdaptiveCruise Control (page 167).

Adaptive Cruise Not Available

The radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or ice/mud/water in frontof radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control

(page 167).

Adaptive Cruise Not Available SensorBlocked See Manual

AdvanceTrac™

ActionMessage

The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.Service AdvanceTrac

The traction control has been disabled or enabled by the driver.AdvanceTrac Off On

95



Alarm

ActionMessage

The alarm has been triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft Alarm (page 64).Vehicle Alarm To Stop Alarm, Start Vehicle.

Automatic Engine Shutdown

ActionMessage

The engine is getting ready to shut off.Engine Shuts Off In {seconds to shutoff:#0} Seconds

The engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy.Engine Shut Off For Fuel Economy

The engine is getting ready to shut off. You can press OK on the left steering wheel button tooverride the shut down.

Engine Shuts Off in {seconds to shutoff:#0} Seconds Press Ok to Override

AWD

ActionMessage

The all-wheel drive system has automatically disabled itself due to the system overheating oryou are using the spare tire. The all-wheel drive system will resume normal function and clear

this message after cycling the ignition and driving a short distance with the road tire re-installedor after the system cools.

AWD OFF

The all-wheel drive system is not operating properly and the powertrain fault indicator is illumin-ated. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 85). If the warning stays illuminated or continues

to illuminate, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Check AWD

96



Battery and Charging System

ActionMessage

The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contactan authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Check Charging System

The battery management system determines that the battery is at a low state of charge. Turnthe ignition off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once the vehiclehas been started and the battery state of charge has recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical

loads will allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery.

Turn Power Off To Save Battery

Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System

ActionMessage

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Blindspot System Fault

The system sensors are blocked. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. See BlindSpot Information System (page 179).

Blindspot Not Available Sensor BlockedSee Manual

The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information System (page 179).Vehicle Coming From X

The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked. See BlindSpot Information System (page 179).

Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor BlockedSee Manual

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Cross Traffic System Fault

97



Brake System

ActionMessage

The brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately. See BrakeFluid Check (page 254).

Brake Fluid Level Low

The brake system needs servicing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.Check Brake System

The parking brake is set, the engine is running and you drive your vehicle more than 3 mph (5 km/h).If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released, contact an authorized dealer as soon

as possible.

Park Brake Engaged

Collision Warning System

ActionMessage

There is a system malfunction with the collision warning system. The system will be disabled.Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Collision Warning Malfunction

The collision warning system radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad weatheror ice/mud/water in front of the radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve. Contact

an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Collision Warning Not Available SensorBlocked See Manual

There is a system malfunction with the collision warning system. The system will be disabled.Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Collision Warning Not Available

98



Doors and Locks

ActionMessage

The door listed is not completely closed.X Door Ajar

The luggage compartment is not completely closed.Trunk Ajar

The driver’s door is opened, your vehicle is in park and the engine is on.Engine ON

Fuel

ActionMessage

An early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low

The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet

Keys and Intelligent Access

ActionMessage

A reminder to press the brake while starting your vehicle.To START Press Brake

The key is not detected by the system. See Keyless Starting (page 127).No Key Detected

The Start Stop button is pressed to shut off the engine and an Intelligent Access key is not detectedinside your vehicle.

Restart Now or Key is Needed

Your vehicle is in the accessory ignition state.Accessory Power is Active

99



ActionMessage

There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See an authorized dealer for service.Starting System Fault

During spare key programming, an intelligent access key is programmed to the system.Key Programmed x Keys Total

During spare key programming, the maximum number of keys have been programmed.Max Number of Keys Learned

Lane Keeping System

ActionMessage

The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Lane Keeping Sys. Malfunction ServiceRequired

The system has detected a condition that has caused the system to be temporarily unavailable.Front Camera Temporarily Not Available

The system has detected a condition that requires the windshield to be cleaned to operateproperly.

Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen

The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Front Camera Malfunction ServiceRequired

The system requests the driver to keep their hands on the steering wheel.Keep Hands on Steering Wheel

100



Maintenance

ActionMessage

Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the engine. Check the oil level. If the warningstays on or continues to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized dealer as soon

as possible.

Low Engine Oil Pressure

The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Engine Oil Check (page 245).Change Engine Oil Soon

The oil life left reaches 0%. See Engine Oil Check (page 245).Oil Change Required

The engine coolant temperature is excessively high.Engine Coolant Over Temperature

The washer fluid is low and needs to be refilled.Washer Fluid Level Low

There is a malfunction with one of the features that is a part of your drive control system. See anauthorized dealer.

Drive Control Malfunction Service Required

Indicates that your vehicle is still in Transport mode. This may not allow some features to operateproperly. Contact an authorized dealer.

Transport Mode Contact Dealer

Indicates that your vehicle is still in Factory mode. This may not allow some features to operateproperly. Contact an authorized dealer.

Factory Mode Contact Dealer

101



MyKey

ActionMessage

MyKey cannot be programmed during key programming .MyKey not Created

MyKey is active.MyKey Active Drive Safely

When starting your vehicle, a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on.Speed Limited to XX MPH/km/h

When a MyKey is in use, the MyKey speed limit is on and your vehicle speed is approaching 81 mph(130 km/h).

Near Vehicle Top Speed

MyKey is active.Check Speed Drive Safely

A MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder is activated.Buckle Up to Unmute Audio

An attempt is made to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys.Could Not Program Integrated Key

Park Aid

ActionMessage

The system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact your authorized dealer.Check Park Aid

The system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact your authorized dealer.Check Rear Park Aid

The park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off

102



Power Steering

ActionMessage

The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service. See an authorizeddealer.

Steering Fault Service Now

The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle a safe place. Contact an authorizeddealer.

Service Power Steering Now

The power steering system has detected a condition within the power steering system or passiveentry or passive start system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.

Steering Assist Fault Service Required

Seats

ActionMessage

Objects are by the passenger seat. After the objects are moved away from the seat, if the warningstays on or continues to come on contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Occupant Sensor BLOCKED RemoveObjects Near Passenger Seat

103



Tire Pressure Monitoring System

ActionMessage

One or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System(page 286).

Tire Pressure Low

The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues tocome on, contact an authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 286).

Tire Pressure Monitor Fault

A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. If the warning stays on orcontinues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. See Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (page 286).

Tire Pressure Sensor Fault

Transmission

ActionMessage

You switched the engine off and shift select lever is in any position other than park (P).Shift to Park

104



AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL Note: You can switch temperature unitsbetween Fahrenheit and Celsius. See yourSYNC information.

E173267

MY TEMP: Adjust the temperature setting on the driver side. This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature when youswitch off dual zone mode.

A

Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.BDUAL: Adjust the temperature setting on the passenger side.CRecirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates.This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.

D

105


Climate Control

Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes duringhot weather to improve cooling efficiency.MAX A/C: Adjust for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automaticallyturns on and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.

E

A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reacha comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents.

F

Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even thoughthe air conditioning is switched off.Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.GAUTO: Press to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the desired temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioningoperation, and outside or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the desired temperature.You can also switch off dual zone mode by pressing and holding for more than two seconds.

H

Heated rear window: Press to switch the heated rear window on and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 107).IDefrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution to the instrument panel and footwell vents turnsoff. You can also use this setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.

J

HINTS ON CONTROLLING THEINTERIOR CLIMATEGeneral HintsNote: Prolonged use of recirculated air maycause the windows to fog up.Note: You may feel a small amount of air fromthe footwell air vents regardless of the airdistribution setting.

Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside yourvehicle, do not drive with the system switchedoff or with recirculated air always switched on.Note: Do not place objects under the frontseats as this may interfere with the airflow tothe rear seats.Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves fromthe air intake area at the base of thewindshield.

Note: To improve the time to reach acomfortable temperature in hot weather, drivewith the windows open until you feel cold airthrough the air vents.

106


Climate Control

Automatic Climate ControlNote: Adjusting the settings when your vehicleinterior is extremely hot or cold is notnecessary. The system automatically adjuststo heat or cool the cabin to your selectedtemperature as quickly as possible. For thesystem to function efficiently, the instrumentpanel and side air vents should be fully open.Note: If you select AUTO during cold outsidetemperatures, the system directs airflow tothe windshield and side window vents. Inaddition, the fan may run at a slower speeduntil the engine warms up.Note: If you select AUTO during hot outsidetemperatures, or when the inside of the vehicleis hot, the system automatically usesrecirculated air to maximize interior cooling.When the interior reaches the selectedtemperature, the system automaticallyswitches to using outside air.

Heating the Interior Quickly1. Select the AUTO function.2. Adjust the temperature function to the

desired setting.

Recommended Settings for Heating1. Select the AUTO function.

2. Adjust the temperature function to thedesired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as astarting point, then adjust the setting asnecessary.

Cooling the Interior Quickly1. Select the MAX A/C function.

Recommended Settings for Cooling1. Select the AUTO function.2. Adjust the temperature function to the

desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as astarting point, then adjust the setting asnecessary.

Side Window Defogging in ColdWeather1. Press the defrost button.2. Adjust the temperature control to the

desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as astarting point, then adjust the setting asnecessary.

HEATED WINDOWS ANDMIRRORS (If Equipped)

Heated Rear WindowNote: Make sure the engine is running beforeoperating the heated windows.

E184884

Press the button to clear theheated rear window of thin ice andfog. The heated rear window will

automatically turn off after a short period oftime. Start the engine before you switch theheated rear window on.Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharpobjects to clean or remove decals from theinside of the heated rear window. The vehiclewarranty does not cover damage caused tothe heated rear window grid lines.

Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)

When you switch the heated rear window on,the heated exterior mirrors will automaticallyturn on.Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors witha scraper or adjust the mirror glass when it isfrozen in place.Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or glasswith harsh abrasives, fuel or otherpetroleum-based cleaning products.

107


Climate Control

CABIN AIR FILTERYour vehicle is equipped with a cabin air filter,which gives you and your passengers thefollowing benefits:• It improves your driving comfort by

reducing particle concentration.• It improves the interior compartment

cleanliness.• It protects the climate control

components from particle deposits.You can locate the cabin air filter behind theglove box.Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filterinstalled at all times. This prevents foreignobjects from entering the system. Running thesystem without a filter in place could result indegradation or damage to the system.Replace the filter at regular intervals. SeeScheduled Maintenance (page 321).For additional cabin air filter information, orto replace the filter, see an authorized dealer.

REMOTE STARTThe remote start feature allows you topre-condition the interior of your vehicle. Theclimate control system works to achievecomfort according to your pre-selectedsettings.Note: You cannot adjust the system duringremote start operation. You cannot switch onthe displays or indicators during remote start.Switch the ignition on to return the systemto its previous settings. The followingfeatures remain on if they automaticallyturned on during remote start, or remain offif they did not turn on during remote start.• Heated seats.• Cooled seats.• Heated steering wheel.• Heated mirrors.• Heated rear window.Note: Passenger heated and cooled seatsonly remain on during remote start if they wereon when you switched the vehicle off.You can adjust the default remote startsettings using the information displaycontrols. See Information Displays (page89).

Automatic SettingsIn hot weather, the system is set to 72°F(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high (ifavailable, and selected to AUTO in theinformation display).In moderate weather, the system either heatsor cools (based on pre-selected settings).The rear defroster, heated mirrors and heatedseats do not automatically switch on.In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F(22°C). The heated and cooled seats andheated steering wheel are set to high (ifavailable, and selected to AUTO in theinformation display). The rear defroster andheated mirrors automatically switch on.

108


Climate Control

SITTING IN THE CORRECTPOSITION

WARNINGSSitting improperly, out of position orwith the seatback reclined too far cantake weight off the seat cushion and

affect the decision of the passenger sensingsystem, resulting in serious injury or death inthe event of a crash. Always sit uprightagainst your seat back, with your feet on thefloor.

Do not recline the seatback as this cancause the occupant to slide under thesafety belt, resulting in serious injury in

the event of a crash.Do not place objects higher than theseatback to reduce the risk of seriousinjury in the event of a crash or during

heavy braking.

E68595

When you use them properly, the seat, headrestraint, safety belt and airbags will provideoptimum protection in the event of a crash.We recommend that you follow theseguidelines:• Sit in an upright position with the base of

your spine as far back as possible.• Do not recline the seatback more than

30 degrees.• Adjust the head restraint so that the top

of it is level with the top of your head andas far forward as possible. Make sure thatyou remain comfortable.

• Keep sufficient distance between yourselfand the steering wheel. We recommenda minimum of 10 in (25 cm) between yourbreastbone and the airbag cover.

• Hold the steering wheel with your armsslightly bent.

• Bend your legs slightly so that you canpress the pedals fully.

• Position the shoulder strap of the safetybelt over the center of your shoulder andposition the lap strap tightly across yourhips.

Make sure that your driving position iscomfortable and that you can maintain fullcontrol of your vehicle.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

WARNINGSFully adjust the head restraint beforeyou sit in or operate your vehicle. Thiswill help minimize the risk of neck injury

in the event of a crash. Do not adjust the headrestraint when your vehicle is moving.

The head restraint is a safety device.Whenever possible it should beinstalled and properly adjusted when

the seat is occupied.

109


Seats

WARNINGSInstall the head restraint properly tohelp minimize the risk of neck injury inthe event of a crash.

Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright drivingposition before adjusting the head restraint.Adjust the head restraint so that the top of itis level with the top of your head and as farforward as possible. Make sure that you remaincomfortable. If you are extremely tall, adjustthe head restraint to its highest position.Front seat head restraint

E138642

The head restraints consist of:

An energy absorbing head restraint.ATwo steel stems.BGuide sleeve adjust and unlockbutton.

C

Guide sleeve unlock and removebutton.

D

Adjusting the Head RestraintRaising the Head RestraintPull the head restraint up.

Lowering the Head Restraint1. Press and hold button C.2. Push the head restraint down.

Removing the Head Restraint1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches

its highest position.2. Press and hold buttons C and D.3. Pull the head restraint up.

Installing the Head RestraintAlign the steel stems into the guide sleevesand push the head restraint down until itlocks.

Rear seat non-adjustable outboard headrestraints

E162605

An energy absorbing head restraint.ATwo steel stems.BGuide sleeve unlock and removebutton.

C

Fold button.D

110


Seats

Removing the Head Restraint1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches

its highest position.2. Press and hold both C buttons.3. Pull the head restraint up.

Installing the Head RestraintAlign the steel stems into the guide sleevesand push the head restraint down until itlocks.

Folding the Head Restraint1. Press and hold button D.2. Pull it back up to reset.

Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped)

The front head restraints tilt for extracomfort. To tilt the head restraint, do thefollowing:

E144727

1. Adjust the seatback to an upright drivingor riding position.

2. Pivot the head restraint forward towardyour head to the desired position.

After the head restraint reaches theforward-most tilt position, pivoting it forwardagain will then release it to the rearward,untilted position.

POWER SEATS

WARNINGSDo not adjust the front seat or seatbackwhen your vehicle is moving. This mayresult in sudden seat movement,

causing the loss of control of your vehicle.Do not place cargo or any objectsbehind the seatback before returningit to the original position.

111


Seats

E138647

112


Seats

Note: On vehicles with memory seats, toprevent damage to the seat, the power seatsare designed to set a stopping position justshort of the end of the seat track. If the seatencounters an object while moving forward orbackward, a new stopping position will be set.To reset the seat to its normal stoppingposition:1. After encountering the new stopping

position, press the power seat controlagain to override.

2. Continue pressing the control until itreaches the end of the seat track.

3. Continue pressing the control for abouttwo seconds. You will feel the seatbounce back slightly.

Power Lumbar

E173201

Press the top of the control (A) to raise theheight of the lumbar support. Press thebottom of the control (A) to lower the heightof the lumbar supportPress the front of the control (B) to adjustfirmness. Press the rear of the control (B) toadjust softness.

Multi-Contour Front Seats WithActive Motion (If Equipped)Note: The massage system will turn off after20 minutes.Note: The engine must be running or thevehicle must be in accessory mode to activatethe seats.Note: Allow a few seconds for any selectionto activate. The seatback and cushionmassage cannot function at the same time.

E173202

Cushion and seat back massagecontrol.

A

Lumbar control�.BPower seat controls.C

• Seat cushion massage: Press and releasethe front portion of the massage control(A). Press again to cancel or press thelumbar control to cancel.

• Seatback massage: Press and release therear portion of the massage button (A).Press again to cancel or press the lumbarcontrol to cancel.

• Lumbar selection: Press either up or downon the lumbar control (B) to select thetop, middle, or bottom part of theseatback.

113


Seats

• Lumbar adjust: Press and hold the frontof the lumbar control (B) to increase thefirmness of the selected portion of theseatback. Press and hold the rear of thelumbar to decrease the firmness.

• Power seat controls (C).We recommend first selecting the lumbar tothe desired setting and then selecting theback or cushion massage setting.

MEMORY FUNCTION

WARNINGSBefore activating the seat memory,make sure that the area immediatelysurrounding the seat is clear of

obstructions and that all occupants are clearof moving parts.

Do not use the memory function whenyour vehicle is moving.

This function automatically recalls theposition of these features.• Driver seat.• Power mirrors.• Optional power adjustable pedals• Optional power steering column.

The memory control is on the driver door.

E142554

Saving a Preset Position1. Switch the ignition on.2. Adjust the features to your desired

positions.3. Press and hold the desired preset button

until you hear a tone sound.You can save up to three preset memorypositions. You can save a memory preset atany time.

Recalling a Preset PositionPress and release the desired memory presetbutton to recall a saved memory position.

Note: You can recall a programmed memoryposition:• In any gearshift position if you have

switched the ignition off.• Only in park (P) or neutral (N) if you have

switched the ignition on.You can also recall a preset memory positionby:• Pressing the unlock button on your

intelligent access key fob if it is linked toa preset position.

• Unlocking the intelligent driver doorhandle if a linked key fob is present.

• Entering a personal entry code on theSecuricode keypad. See Locks (page56).

Note: When the ignition is off, a linked fobused to recall your memory position movesthe seat and steering column to the Easy Entryposition if the Easy Entry and Exit feature isenabled in the information display.Note: During a memory recall, pressing anyseat, steering column, mirror, or memorybutton cancels the operation.

114


Seats

Linking a Preset Position to YourRemote Control or Intelligent AccessKeyYou can save the preset memory positionsfor up to three remote controls or intelligentaccess (IA) keys.1. With the ignition on, move the memory

positions to the desired positions.2. Press and hold the desired preset button

for five seconds. A tone sounds afterabout two seconds. Continue holdinguntil you hear a second tone.

3. Within three seconds, press the lockbutton on the remote control you arelinking.

To unlink a remote control, follow the sameprocedure – except in Step 3, press theunlock button on the remote control.

Easy Entry and Exit FeatureIf you enable the easy entry and exit feature,it automatically moves the driver seatposition rearward up to two inches (fivecentimeters) and the steering column up andforward when you switch the ignition off.When you switch the ignition on, the driverseat and steering column return to theprevious position.

You can enable or disable this feature in theinformation display. See InformationDisplays (page 89).

CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS(If Equipped)

Heated SeatsWARNING

Persons who are unable to feel pain tothe skin because of advanced age,chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord

injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,or other physical conditions, must exercisecare when using the seat heater. The seatheater may cause burns even at lowtemperatures, especially if used for longperiods of time. Do not place anything on theseat that insulates against heat, such as ablanket or cushion, because this may causethe seat heater to overheat. Do not puncturethe seat with pins, needles, or other pointedobjects because this may damage theheating element which may cause the seatheater to overheat. An overheated seat maycause serious personal injury.

Note: Do not do the following:

• Place heavy objects on the seat.• Operate the seat heater if water or any

other liquid spills on the seat. Allow theseat to dry thoroughly.

The heated seats will only function when theengine is running.

E146322

Press the heated seat symbol located on thetouchscreen to cycle through the various heatsettings and off. Warmer settings areindicated by more indicator lights.If the engine falls below 350 RPM while theheated seats are on, the feature will turnitself off. You will need to reactivate it.After 60 minutes of operation, the heatedseats automatically turn off. Press thesymbol to switch the heated seats on.

115


Seats

Cooled SeatsThe cooled seats will only function when theengine is running.

E146309

Press the cooled seat symbol located on thetouchscreen to cycle through the variouscooling settings and off. Cooler settings areindicated by more indicator lights.If the engine falls below 350 RPM while thecooled seats are on, the feature will turn itselfoff. You will need to reactivate it.After 60 minutes of operation, the cooledseats automatically turn off. Press thesymbol to switch the cooled seats on.

Heated and Cooled Seat Air FilterReplacement (If Equipped)The climate controlled seat system includesair filters. You must replace them periodically.See Scheduled Maintenance (page 321).

Locate the filters under each front seat andaccess them from the second-row footwellarea. Move the front seats all the wayforward and to the full up positions to easeaccess.

E146319

To remove an air filter:1. Turn the vehicle off.2. Push up on the outside rigid edge of the

filter and rotate counterclockwise oncethe tabs are released, then remove thefilter.

E146321

To install a filter:1. First, position the filter in its housing

making sure that the far forward end isall the way up in the housing.

2. Push in on the center of the outside edgeof the filter and rotate up into the housinguntil it clips into position.

116


Seats

Rear Heated Seats

WARNINGPersons who are unable to feel pain tothe skin because of advanced age,chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord

injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,or other physical conditions, must exercisecare when using the seat heater. The seatheater may cause burns even at lowtemperatures, especially if used for longperiods of time. Do not place anything on theseat that insulates against heat, such as ablanket or cushion, because this may causethe seat heater to overheat. Do not puncturethe seat with pins, needles, or other pointedobjects because this may damage theheating element which may cause the seatheater to overheat. An overheated seat maycause serious personal injury.

Note: Do not do the following:• Place heavy objects on the seat.• Operate the seat heater if water or any

other liquid spills on the seat. Allow theseat to dry thoroughly.

The rear seat heat controls are located onthe rear of the center console.

The heated seats only operate when theignition is on.

E166817

• Press the indicated side of the control forminimum heat.

• Press again to turn off.

E146322

• Press the indicated side of the control formaximum heat.

• Press again to turn off.The indicator light will illuminate when youswitch on the heated seats.

After 60 minutes of operation, the heatedseats automatically turn off. Press thesymbol to switch the heated seats on.

REAR SEAT ARMREST

E144635

Fold the armrest down to use the armrestand cupholder. To open the storage lid, pullup on the latch located between thecupholders.

Armrest pass-throughNote: Do not exceed 80 pounds (36kilograms) of weight on the pass-through door.

117


Seats

E152622

Release the latch, then pull down on the doorlocated in the back of the armrest. You canstore cargo of a longer length such as skis orlumber.

118


Seats

HomeLink Wireless Control SystemWARNINGS

Make sure that the garage door andsecurity device are free fromobstruction when you are

programming. Do not program the systemwith the vehicle in the garage.

Do not use the system with any garagedoor opener that does not have thesafety stop and reverse feature as

required by U.S. Federal Safety Standards(this includes any garage door openermanufactured before April 1, 1982). A garagedoor opener which cannot detect an object,signaling the door to stop and reverse, doesnot meet current federal safety standards.Using a garage door opener without thesefeatures increases the risk of serious injury ordeath.

Note: Make sure you keep the original remotecontrol transmitter for use in other vehicles aswell as for future system programming.Note: We recommend that upon the sale orlease termination of your vehicle, you erasethe programmed function buttons for securityreasons. See Erasing the Function ButtonCodes.

Note: You can program a maximum of threedevices. To change or replace any of the threedevices after it has been initially programmed,you must first erase the current settings. SeeErasing the Function Button Codes.

E142657

The universal garage door opener replacesthe common hand-held garage door openerwith a three-button transmitter that isintegrated into the driver’s sun visor.The system includes two primary features, agarage door opener and a platform forremote activation of devices within the home.As well as being programmed for garagedoors, the system transmitter can beprogrammed to operate entry gate operators,security systems, entry door locks and homeor office lighting.

Additional system information can be foundonline at www.homelink.com,www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or bycalling the toll-free help line on1-800-355-3515.

In-Vehicle ProgrammingThis process is to program your hand-heldtransmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLinkbutton.Note: The programming steps below assumeyou will be programming HomeLink that wasnot previously programmed.Note: Put a new battery in the hand-heldtransmitter. This will ensure quicker trainingand accurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

E142658

1. With your vehicle parked outside of thegarage, turn your ignition to the onposition, but do not start your vehicle.

119


Universal Garage Door Opener

2. Hold your hand-held garage doortransmitter 2–6 in (5–14 cm) away fromthe HomeLink button you want toprogram.

3. Using both hands, simultaneously, pressand hold the desired HomeLink buttonand the hand-held transmitter button.DO NOT release either one until theHomeLink indicator light flashes slowlyand then rapidly. When the indicator lightflashes rapidly, both buttons may bereleased. The rapid flashing indicatessuccessful training.

Note: You may need to use a different methodif you live in Canada or have difficultiesprogramming your gate operator or garagedoor opener. See Gate Operator / CanadianProgramming.4. Press and hold the HomeLink button you

programmed for two seconds, thenrelease. You may need to do this twice toactivate the door. If your garage doordoes not operate, watch the HomeLinkindicator light.

If the indicator light stays on, theprogramming is complete. No furtheraction is needed.

If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2seconds and then turns to a constant light,the HomeLink button is not programmed yet.See Programming Your Garage DoorOpener Motor.To program additional buttons, repeat Steps1 – 4.For questions or comments, please contactHomeLink at www.homelink.com,www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or1-800-355-3515.

Programming Your Garage Door OpenerMotorNote: You may need a ladder to reach the unitand you may need to remove the cover or lamplens on your garage door opener.

E142659

1. Press the learn button on the garage dooropener motor and then you have 30seconds to complete the next two steps.

2. Return to your vehicle.

E142658

3. Press and hold the function button youwant to program for 2 seconds, thenrelease. Repeat this step. Depending onyour brand of garage door opener, youmay need to repeat this sequence a thirdtime.

Gate Operator / Canadian ProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws requiretransmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)after several seconds of transmission – whichmay not be long enough for HomeLink to pickup the signal during programming. Similar tothis Canadian law, some U.S. gate operatorsare designed to “time-out” in the samemanner.Note: If programming a garage door openeror gate operator, it is advised to unplug thedevice during the “cycling” process to preventpossible overheating.

120



1. Press and hold the HomeLink buttonwhile you press and release, every twoseconds, your hand-held transmitteruntil the HomeLink indicator lightchanges from a slow to a rapidly blinkinglight.

2. Release both the HomeLink andhand-held transmitter buttons.

3. Continue programing HomeLink. SeeIn-Vehicle Programming.

Erasing the Function Button CodesNote: You cannot erase individual buttons.

E142660

1. Press and hold the outer two functionbuttons simultaneously for approximately20 seconds until the indicator lightsabove the buttons flash rapidly.

2. When the indicator lights flash, releasethe buttons. The codes for all buttons areerased.

Reprogramming a Single ButtonTo program a device to a previously trainedbutton, follow these steps:1. Press and hold the desired button. Do

NOT release the button.2. The indicator light will begin to flash after

20 seconds. Without releasing the button,follow Step 1 in the Programming section.

For questions or comments, contactHomeLink at www.homelink.com,www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or1-800-355-3515.

Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2Garage Door OpenerNote: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter mustalready be programmed to operate with thegarage door opener.Note: To program HomeLink to thetransmitter you must first put the transmitterinto programming mode.

BAE142661

Red indicator lightA.Green indicator lightB.

1. Press and hold one of the buttons on thehand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. Theindicator light will change from green tored and green.

2. Press the same button twice to confirmthe change to programming mode. Ifdone properly the indicator light willappear red.

3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches(2–8 centimeters) of the button on thevisor you want to program.

121



4. Press and hold both the programmedGenie button on the hand-heldtransmitter and the button you want toprogram. The indicator light on the visorwill flash rapidly when the programmingis successful.

Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit forup to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does notprogram within 30 seconds the Genietransmitter will need to be pressed again. Ifthe Genie transmitter indicator light displaysgreen and red, release the button until theindicator light turns off before pressing thebutton again.Once HomeLink has been programmedsuccessfully, the Genie transmitter must bechanged out of program mode. To do this:1. Press and hold the previously

programmed Genie button on thehand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. Theindicator light will change from red to redand green.

2. Press the same button twice to confirmthe change. If done correctly the indicatorlight will turn green.

Programming HomeLink to the GenieIntellicode Garage Door Opener MotorNote: You may need a ladder to access thegarage door opener motor.

E142662

1. Press and hold the program button onthe garage door opener motor until bothblue indicator lights turn on.

2. Release the program button. Only thesmaller round indicator light should beon.

3. Press and release the program button.The larger purple indicator light will flash.

Note: The next two steps must be completedin 30 seconds.4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode 2

hand-held transmitter’s previouslyprogrammed button. Both indicator lightson the garage door opener motor unitshould now flash purple.

5. Press and hold the previouslyprogrammed button on the visor for 2seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 timesuntil the garage door moves.

Programming is now complete.

Clearing a HomeLink DeviceTo erase programming from the threeHomeLink buttons press and hold the twoouter HomeLink buttons until the indicatorlight begins to flash. The indicator light willbegin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at whichtime both buttons should be released.Programming has now been erased, and theindicator light should blink slowly to indicatethe device is in train mode when any of thethree HomeLink buttons are pressed.

FCC and RSS-210 Industry CanadaComplianceThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

122



Changes or modifications to your device notexpressly approved by the party responsiblefor compliance can void the user’s authorityto operate the equipment.

123



12 Volt DC Power PointWARNING

Do not plug optional electricalaccessories into the cigar lighter socket(if equipped). Improper use of the

lighter can cause damage not covered byyour warranty, and can result in fire or seriousinjury.

Note: If used when the vehicle is not running,the battery will discharge. There may beinsufficient power to restart your vehicle.Note: Do not insert objects other than anaccessory plug into the power point. This willdamage the outlet and blow the fuse.Note: Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug.Note: Do not use the power point over thevehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or afuse may blow.Note: Do not use the power point foroperating a cigar lighter element.Note: Improper use of the power point cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Note: Always keep the power point capsclosed when not in use.

Run the vehicle for full capacity use of thepower point. To prevent the battery fromdischarging accidentally:• Do not use the power point longer than

necessary when the vehicle is not running.• Do not leave devices plugged in overnight

or when you park your vehicle forextended periods.

LocationsPower points may be in the followinglocations:• In the front of the center console.• Inside the center console storage bin.• On the rear of the center console.

110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)

WARNINGDo not keep electrical devices pluggedin the power point whenever the deviceis not in use. Do not use any extension

cord with the 110 volt AC power point, sinceit will defeat the safety protection design.Doing so my cause the power point tooverload due to powering multiple devicesthat can reach beyond the 150 watt load limitand could result in fire or serious injury.

Note: Keep the vehicle running to use thepower point.

E143941

You can use the power point for poweringelectrical devices that require up to 150watts. It is on the rear of the center console.When the indicator light, located on thepower point is:• On — power point is ready to supply

power.• Off — power point power supply is off;

ignition is not on.• Flashing — power point is in fault mode.

124


Auxiliary Power Points

The power outlet temporarily turns off powerwhen in fault mode if the device exceeds the150 watt limit. Unplug your device and switchthe ignition off. Switch the ignition back on,but do not plug your device back in. Let thesystem cool off and switch the ignition off toreset the fault mode. Switch the ignition backon and make sure the indicator light remainson.Do not use the power point for certain electricdevices, including:• Cathode ray tube type televisions.• Motor loads, for example vacuum

cleaners, electric saws and other electricpower tools, or compressor-drivenrefrigerators.

• Measuring devices which process precisedata, for example medical equipment ormeasuring equipment.

• Other appliances requiring an extremelystable power supply, for examplemicrocomputer-controlled electricblankets or touch sensor lamps.

125


Auxiliary Power Points

CENTER CONSOLEStow items in the cupholder carefully asitems may become loose during hard braking,acceleration or collisions, including hot drinkswhich may spill.Available console features include:

E173268

CupholdersASliding driver and passenger armrests, utility compartment withaudio input jack, USB port andpower point

B

Rear power point, heated seatswitches and air vents

C

Power point door and a power rearsunshade control

D

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

E75193

Press near the rear edge of the door to openit.

126


Storage Compartments

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNINGSExtended idling at high engine speedscan produce very high temperatures inthe engine and exhaust system,

creating the risk of fire or other damage.Do not park, idle or drive your vehicleon dry grass or other dry ground cover.The emission system heats up the

engine compartment and exhaust system,creating the risk of fire.

Do not start the engine in a closedgarage or in other enclosed areas.Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always

open the garage door before you start theengine.

If you smell exhaust fumes inside yourvehicle, have your vehicle checked byan authorized dealer immediately. Do

not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaustfumes.

If you disconnect the battery, your vehiclemay exhibit some unusual drivingcharacteristics for approximately 5 miles (8kilometers) after you reconnect it. This isbecause the engine management systemmust realign itself with the engine. You candisregard any unusual driving characteristicsduring this period.The powertrain control system meets allCanadian interference-causing equipmentstandard requirements regulating the impulseelectrical field or radio noise.When you start the engine, avoid pressingthe accelerator pedal before and duringoperation. Only use the accelerator pedalwhen you have difficulty starting the engine.

KEYLESS STARTINGNote: The keyless starting system may notfunction if the key is close to metal objects orelectronic devices such as cellular phones.Note: A valid key must be located inside yourvehicle to switch the ignition on and start theengine.

Note: When locking your vehicle, any remotecontrols left inside the vehicle may becomedisabled. A message may appear in theinformation display indicating that there is nokey detected if you try to start the engine.Press the unlock button on the remote controlto enable it, and then start the engine.

Ignition Modes

E142555

Off: Turns the ignition off.

127


Starting and Stopping the Engine

• Without applying the brake pedal, pressand release the button once when theignition is in the on mode, or when theengine is running but the vehicle is notmoving.

On: All electrical circuits are operational andthe warning lamps and indicators illuminate.• Without applying the brake pedal, press

and release the button once.Start: Starts the engine.• Press the brake pedal, and then press the

button for any length of time. An indicatorlight on the button illuminates when thenignition is on and when the engine starts.

STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINEWhen you start the engine, the idle speedincreases, this helps to warm up the engine.If the engine idle speed does not slow downautomatically, have your vehicle checked byan authorized dealer.

Note: You can crank the engine for a total of60 seconds (without the engine starting)before the starting system temporarilydisables. The 60 seconds does not have to beall at once. For example, if you crank theengine three times for 20 seconds each time,without the engine starting, you reached the60-second time limit. A message appears inthe information display alerting you that youexceeded the cranking time. You cannotattempt to start the engine for at least 15minutes. After 15 minutes, you are limited to a15-second engine cranking time. You need towait 60 minutes before you can crank theengine for 60 seconds again.Before starting the engine, check thefollowing:• Make sure all occupants have fastened

their safety belts.• Make sure the headlamps and electrical

accessories are off.• Make sure the parking brake is on.• Put the transmission in park (P).Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.1. Fully press the brake pedal.2. Press the button.

The system does not function if:• The key frequencies are jammed.• The key battery has no charge.If you are unable to start the engine, do thefollowing:

E173591

1. With the buttons facing the rear of thevehicle and the key ring up, place the keyinto the backup slot.

2. With the key in this position, press thebrake pedal, then the button to switchthe ignition on and start your vehicle.

Fast RestartThe fast restart feature allows you to restartthe engine within 20 seconds of switching itoff, even if a valid key is not present.

128



Within 20 seconds of switching the engineoff, press the brake pedal and press thebutton. After 20 seconds have expired, youcan no longer restart the engine without thekey present inside your vehicle.Once the engine has started, it remainsrunning until you press the button, even if thesystem does not detect a valid key. If youopen and close a door while the engine isrunning, the system searches for a valid key.You cannot restart the engine if the systemdoes not detect a valid key within 20seconds.

Failure to StartIf you cannot start the engine after threeattempts, wait 10 seconds and follow thisprocedure:1. Fully press the brake pedal.2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and hold

it there.3. Start the engine.

Automatic Engine ShutdownIf your vehicle is equipped with a keylessignition, it has a feature that automaticallyshuts down the engine if it has been idling foran extended period. The ignition also turnsoff in order to save battery power. Before theengine shuts down, a message appears inthe information display showing a timercounting down from 30 seconds. If you donot intervene within 30 seconds, the engineshuts down. Another message appears in theinformation display to inform you that theengine has shut down in order to save fuel.Start your vehicle as you normally do.

Automatic Engine Shutdown OverrideNote: You cannot permanently switch off theautomatic engine shutdown feature. Whenyou switch it off temporarily, it turns on at thenext ignition cycle.You can stop the engine shutdown, or resetthe timer, at any point before the 30-secondcountdown has expired by doing any of thefollowing:

• You can reset the timer by interactingwith your vehicle (such as pressing thebrake pedal or accelerator pedal).

• You can temporarily switch off theshutdown feature any time the ignition ison (for the current ignition cycle only).Use the information display to do so. SeeInformation Displays (page 89).

• During the countdown before engineshutdown, you are prompted to press OKor RESET (depending on your type ofinformation display) to temporarilyswitch the feature off (for the currentignition cycle only).

Stopping the Engine When YourVehicle is Stationary1. Put the transmission in park (P).2. Press the button once.3. Apply the parking brake.Note: This switches off the ignition, allelectrical circuits, warning lamps andindicators.

129



Stopping the Engine When YourVehicle is Moving

WARNINGSwitching off the engine when thevehicle is still moving will result in a lossof brake and steering assistance. The

steering will not lock, but higher effort will berequired. When the ignition is switched off,some electrical circuits, including air bags,warning lamps and indicators may also beoff. If the ignition was turned off accidentally,you can shift into neutral (N) and re-start theengine.

1. Press and hold the button for one second,or press it three times within two seconds.

2. Move the transmission selector lever toneutral (N) and use the brakes to bringyour vehicle to a safe stop. When yourvehicle has stopped, move thetransmission selector lever to park (P)and switch the ignition off.

3. Apply the parking brake.

Guarding Against Exhaust FumesWARNING

If you smell exhaust fumes inside yourvehicle, have your vehicle checked byyour authorized dealer immediately. Do

not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaustfumes. Carbon monoxide is present inexhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid itsdangerous effects.

Important Ventilating InformationIf you stop your vehicle and then leave theengine idling for long periods, we recommendthat you do one of the following:• Open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5

centimeters).• Set your climate control to outside air.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If Equipped)

WARNINGSFailure to follow engine block heaterinstructions could result in propertydamage or serious personal injury.

WARNINGSDo not use your heater withungrounded electrical systems ortwo-pronged adapters. There is a risk

of electrical shock.Do not fully close the hood, or allow itto drop under its own weight whenusing the engine block heater. This

could damage the power cable and maycause an electrical short resulting in fire, injuryand property damage.

Note: The heater is most effective whenoutdoor temperatures are below 0°F (-18°C).The heater acts as a starting aid by warmingthe engine coolant. This allows the climatecontrol system to respond quickly. Theequipment includes a heater element(installed in the engine block) and a wireharness. You can connect the system to agrounded 120-volt AC electrical source.

130



We recommend that you do the following fora safe and correct operation:• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord

that is product certified by Underwriter’sLaboratory (UL) or Canadian StandardsAssociation (CSA). This extension cordmust be suitable for use outdoors, in coldtemperatures, and be clearly markedSuitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances.Do not use an indoor extension cordoutdoors. This could result in an electricshock or become a fire hazard.

• Use as short an extension cord aspossible.

• Do not use multiple extension cords.• Make sure that when in operation, the

extension cord plug and heater cord plugconnections are free and clear of water.This could cause an electric shock or fire.

• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a cleanarea, clear of combustibles.

• Make sure the heater, heater cord andextension cord are firmly connected.

• Check for heat anywhere in the electricalhookup once the system has beenoperating for approximately 30 minutes.

• Make sure the system is unplugged andproperly stowed before starting anddriving your vehicle. Make sure theprotective cover seals the prongs of theblock heater cord plug when not in use.

• Make sure the heater system is checkedfor proper operation before winter.

Using the Engine Block HeaterMake sure the receptacle terminals are cleanand dry prior to use. Clean them with a drycloth if necessary.The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours ofenergy per hour of use. The system does nothave a thermostat. It achieves maximumtemperature after approximately three hoursof operation. Using the heater longer thanthree hours does not improve systemperformance and unnecessarily useselectricity.

131



SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNINGSDo not overfill the fuel tank. Thepressure in an overfilled tank maycause leakage and lead to fuel spray

and fire.The fuel system may be under pressure.If you hear a hissing sound near the fuelfiller inlet, do not refuel until the sound

stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, whichcould cause serious personal injury.

Automotive fuels can cause seriousinjury or death if misused ormishandled.Flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzlecan produce static electricity. This cancause a fire if you are filling an

ungrounded fuel container.Gasoline may contain benzene, whichis a cancer-causing agent.When refueling always shut the engineoff and never allow sparks or openflames near the fuel tank filler valve.

Never smoke or use a cell phone whilerefueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardousunder certain conditions. Avoid inhalingexcess fumes.

Observe the following guidelines whenhandling automotive fuel:• Extinguish all smoking materials and any

open flames before refueling your vehicle.• Always turn off the vehicle before

refueling.• Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal

if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline ishighly toxic and if swallowed can causedeath or permanent injury. If fuel isswallowed, call a physician immediately,even if no symptoms are immediatelyapparent. The toxic effects of fuel maynot be visible for hours.

• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling toomuch fuel vapor of any kind can lead toeye and respiratory tract irritation. Insevere cases, excessive or prolongedbreathing of fuel vapor can cause seriousillness and permanent injury.

• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. Iffuel is splashed in the eyes, removecontact lenses (if worn), flush with waterfor 15 minutes and seek medicalattention. Failure to seek proper medicalattention could lead to permanent injury.

• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbedthrough the skin. If fuel is splashed on theskin, clothing or both, promptly removecontaminated clothing and wash skinthoroughly with soap and water.Repeated or prolonged skin contact withfuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.

• Be particularly careful if you are takingAntabuse or other forms of Disulfiram forthe treatment of alcoholism. Breathinggasoline vapors could cause an adversereaction, serious personal injury orsickness. If fuel is splashed on the skin,wash the affected areas immediatelywith plenty of soap and water. Consult aphysician immediately if you experienceany adverse reactions.

FUEL QUALITYChoosing the Right Fuel

E161513

132


Fuel and Refueling

We recommend regular unleaded gasolinewith a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.Some stations offer fuels posted as regularwith an octane rating below 87, particularlyin high altitude areas. We do not recommendfuels with an octane rating below 87. Toprovide improved performance, werecommend premium fuel for severe dutyusage such as trailer tow.Do not use any fuel other than thoserecommended because they could lead toengine damage that may not be covered bythe vehicle Warranty.Note: Use of any fuel other than thoserecommended can impair the emission controlsystem and cause a loss of vehicleperformance.Do not use:• Diesel fuel.• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol

or E85 fuel.• Fuels containing methanol.• Fuels containing metallic-based

additives, including manganese-basedcompounds.

• Fuels containing the octane boosteradditive, methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl (MMT).

• Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel isprohibited by law).

The use of fuels with metallic compoundssuch as methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (commonly known as MMT),which is a manganese-based fuel additive,will impair engine performance and affectthe emission control system.Do not be concerned if the engine sometimesknocks lightly. However, if it knocks heavilyunder most driving conditions while you areusing fuel with the recommended octanerating, contact an authorized dealer toprevent any engine damage.

FUEL FILLER FUNNEL LOCATIONThe fuel filler funnel is located in the sparewheel storage tray.

RUNNING OUT OF FUELRunning out of fuel can cause damage notcovered by the vehicle Warranty.

If your vehicle runs out of fuel:• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel to

restart the engine. If your vehicle is out offuel and on a steep slope, more fuel maybe required.

• You may need to switch the ignition fromoff to on several times after refueling toallow the fuel system to pump the fuelfrom the tank to the engine. Whenrestarting, cranking time takes a fewseconds longer than normal.

Filling a Portable Fuel ContainerUse the following guidelines to avoidelectrostatic charge build-up when filling anungrounded fuel container:• Only use an approved fuel container to

transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place thecontainer on the ground when filling it.

• Do not fill a fuel container when it is insideyour vehicle (including the cargo area).

• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact withthe fuel container when filling it.

• Do not use a device that holds the fuelpump nozzle lever in the fill position.

133


Fuel and Refueling

Adding Fuel From a Portable FuelContainer

WARNINGSDo not insert the nozzle of a fuelcontainer or an aftermarket funnel intothe fuel system filler neck. This may

damage the fuel system filler neck or its sealand cause fuel to run onto the ground.

Do not try to pry open or push open thecapless fuel system with foreignobjects. This could damage the fuel

system and its seal and cause injury to youor others.

Do not dispose of fuel in the householdrefuse or the public sewage system.Use an authorized waste disposal

facility.

When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from afuel container, use the plastic funnel includedwith your vehicle. See Fuel Filler FunnelLocation (page 133).Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as theywill not work with the capless fuel system andcan damage it.When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from afuel container, do the following:

1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until itengages and remove the fuel tank fillercap.

Note: Capless fuel systems do not have a fueltank filler cap.2. Fully insert the plastic funnel into the fuel

tank filler pipe opening.

E157452

3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuelcontainer.

4. Remove the plastic funnel from the fueltank filler pipe opening.

5. Replace the fuel tank filler cap and closethe fuel tank filler door.

6. Clean the plastic funnel and place it backin your vehicle or properly dispose of it.

Note: Extra funnels can be purchased froman authorized dealer if you choose to disposeof the funnel.

REFUELING

WARNINGSFuel vapor burns violently and a fuelfire can cause severe injuries.Read and follow all the instructions onthe pump island.Switch off your engine when you arerefueling.Do not smoke if you are near fuel orrefueling your vehicle.Keep sparks, flames and smokingmaterials away from fuel.Stay outside your vehicle and do notleave the fuel pump unattended whenrefueling your vehicle. This is against

the law in some places.Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.

134


Fuel and Refueling

WARNINGSDo not use personal electronic deviceswhile refueling.

Use the following guidelines to avoidelectrostatic charge build-up when filling anungrounded fuel container:• Place approved fuel container on the

ground.• Do not fill a fuel container while it is in

your vehicle (including the cargo area).• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with

the fuel container while filling.• Do not use a device that would hold the

fuel pump handle in the fill position.

Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel SystemWARNING

The fuel system may be under pressure.If you hear a hissing sound near the fuelfiller door, do not refuel until the sound

stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, whichcould cause serious personal injury.

When fueling your vehicle:1. Put the vehicle in position P and switch

the ignition off.

E175448

2. Press the center-rear edge of the fuelfiller door and release to open.

E156032

Note: Hold the handle of the fuel filler nozzlehigher while you insert the nozzle for easieraccess.

3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully intothe fuel system to open both doors. Leavethe nozzle fully inserted until you havestopped pumping fuel.

E154765

Note: Allow about five to ten seconds afterpumping fuel before removing the fuel fillernozzle. This allows residual fuel to drain backinto the fuel tank and not spill onto the vehicle.4. After you have stopped pumping fuel,

slowly remove the fuel filler nozzle.Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur ifoverfilling the fuel tank. Do not overfill the tankto the point that the fuel is able to bypass thefuel filler nozzle. The overfilled fuel may rundown the drain located below and in front ofthe fuel filler door.

135


Fuel and Refueling

5. To close the fuel filler door, press thecenter-rear edge of the fuel filler door andthen release. The fuel door will latchclosed.

If the fuel fill inlet did not close properly, aCheck Fuel Fill Inlet message may appearon the instrument cluster.At the next opportunity, do the following:1. Safely pull off the road.2. Put the vehicle in position P and switch

the ignition off.3. Open the fuel filler door and remove any

visible debris from the fuel fill opening.4. Insert the fuel fill nozzle, or the fuel fill

funnel provided with the vehicle, severaltimes to allow the inlet to close properly.This will dislodge any debris preventingthe inlet from sealing.

If this action corrects the problem, themessage may not reset immediately. It maytake several driving cycles for the messageto turn off. A driving cycle consists of anengine start-up (after four or more hours withthe engine off) followed by city or highwaydriving. Continuing to drive with the messageon may cause the service engine soon lampto turn on as well.

FUEL CONSUMPTIONEmpty reserve is the amount of fuelremaining in the tank after the fuel gaugeindicates empty. The amount of usable fuelin the empty reserve varies and should notbe relied upon to increase driving range.• The usable capacity of the fuel tank is the

amount of fuel that can be added intothe tank after the gauge indicates empty.

• The advertised capacity is the total fueltank size. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 296). It is thecombined usable capacity plus the emptyreserve.

• Due to the empty reserve, you may notbe able to refuel the full amount of theadvertised capacity of the fuel tank evenwhen the fuel gauge reads empty.

Filling the TankFor consistent results when refueling:• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an

inaccurate reading results if the engine isleft running.

• Use the same fill rate (low-medium-high)each time the tank is filled.

• Allow no more than one automaticshut-off when refueling.

Results are most accurate when the fillingmethod is consistent.

Calculating Fuel EconomyDo not measure fuel economy during the first1,000 mi (1,600 km) of driving (this is yourengine’s break-in period). A more accuratemeasurement is obtained after 2,000 mi(3,200 km) to 3,000 mi (4,800 km). Also,fuel expense, frequency of fill ups or fuelgauge readings are not accurate ways tomeasure fuel economy.1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record

the initial odometer reading.2. Each time you fill the fuel tank, record the

amount of fuel added.3. After at least three fill ups, fill the fuel

tank and record the current odometerreading.

4. Subtract your initial odometer readingfrom the current odometer reading.

To calculate L/100 km (liters per 100kilometers) fuel consumption, multiply theliters used by 100, then divide by kilometerstraveled. To calculate MPG (miles pergallon) fuel consumption, divide milestraveled by gallons used.

136


Fuel and Refueling

Keep a record for at least one month andrecord the type of driving (city or highway).This provides an accurate estimate of yourvehicle’s fuel economy under current drivingconditions. Keeping records during summerand winter will show how temperatureimpacts fuel economy.

Conditions• Heavily loading your vehicle reduces fuel

economy.• Carrying unnecessary weight in your

vehicle may reduce fuel economy.• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle

such as bug deflectors, rollbars or lightbars, running boards and ski racks mayreduce fuel economy.

• Using fuel blended with alcohol maylower fuel economy.

• Fuel economy may decrease with lowertemperatures.

• Fuel economy may decrease when drivingshort distances.

• You will get better fuel economy whendriving on flat terrain than when drivingon hilly terrain.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARNINGSDo not park, idle, or drive your vehiclein dry grass or other dry ground cover.The emission system heats up the

engine compartment and exhaust system,which can start a fire.

Exhaust leaks may result in entry ofharmful and potentially lethal fumesinto the passenger compartment. If you

smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle immediately.Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.

Your vehicle is equipped with variousemission control components and a catalyticconverter that will enable your vehicle tocomply with applicable exhaust emissionstandards.To make sure that the catalytic converter andother emission control components continueto work properly:• Use only the specified fuel listed.• Avoid running out of fuel.

• Do not turn off the ignition while yourvehicle is moving, especially at highspeeds.

• Have the items listed in scheduledmaintenance information performedaccording to the specified schedule.

The scheduled maintenance items listed inscheduled maintenance information areessential to the life and performance of yourvehicle and to its emissions system.If you use anything other than Ford,Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts formaintenance replacements or for service ofcomponents affecting emission control, suchnon-Ford parts should be equivalent togenuine Ford Motor Company parts inperformance and durability.Illumination of the service engine soonindicator, charging system warning light orthe temperature warning light, fluid leaks,strange odors, smoke or loss of engine powercould indicate that the emission controlsystem is not working properly.An improperly operating or damaged exhaustsystem may allow exhaust to enter thevehicle. Have a damaged or improperlyoperating exhaust system inspected andrepaired immediately.

137


Fuel and Refueling

Do not make any unauthorized changes toyour vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle ownersand anyone who manufactures, repairs,services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, orsupervises a fleet of vehicles are notpermitted to intentionally remove anemission control device or prevent it fromworking. Information about your vehicle’semission system is on the Vehicle EmissionControl Information Decal located on or nearthe engine. This decal also lists enginedisplacement.Please consult your warranty information forcomplete details.

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)Your vehicle has a computer known as theon-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) thatmonitors the engine’s emission controlsystem. The system protects theenvironment by making sure that your vehiclecontinues to meet government emissionstandards. The OBD-II system also assists aservice technician in properly servicing yourvehicle.

When the service engine soonindicator illuminates, the OBD-IIsystem has detected a

malfunction. Temporary malfunctions maycause the service engine soon indicator toilluminate. Examples are:

1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—theengine may misfire or run poorly.

2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—theengine may misfire or run poorly.

3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closedproperly. See Refueling (page 134).

4. Driving through deep water—the electricalsystem may be wet.

You can correct these temporarymalfunctions by filling the fuel tank with goodquality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inletor letting the electrical system dry out. Afterthree driving cycles without these or anyother temporary malfunctions present, theservice engine soon indicator should stay offthe next time you start the engine. A drivingcycle consists of a cold engine startupfollowed by mixed city and highway driving.No additional vehicle service is required.

If the service engine soon indicator remainson, have your vehicle serviced at the firstavailable opportunity. Although somemalfunctions detected by the OBD-II maynot have symptoms that are apparent,continued driving with the service enginesoon indicator on can result in increasedemissions, lower fuel economy, reducedengine and transmission smoothness andlead to more costly repairs.

Readiness for Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) TestingSome state and provincial and localgovernments may haveInspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs toinspect the emission control equipment onyour vehicle. Failure to pass this inspectioncould prevent you from getting a vehicleregistration.

If the service engine soon indicatoris on or the bulb does not work,your vehicle may need service. See

On-Board Diagnostics.

138


Fuel and Refueling

Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if theservice engine soon indicator is on or notworking properly (bulb is burned out), or ifthe OBD-II system has determined that someof the emission control systems have notbeen properly checked. In this case, thevehicle is not ready for I/M testing.If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has justbeen serviced, or the battery has recently rundown or been replaced, the OBD-II systemmay indicate that the vehicle is not ready forI/M testing. To determine if the vehicle isready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key tothe on position for 15 seconds withoutcranking the engine. If the service engine soonindicator blinks eight times, it means that thevehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if theservice engine soon indicator stays on solid,it means that your vehicle is ready for I/Mtesting.The OBD-II system checks the emissioncontrol system during normal driving. Acomplete check may take several days.If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, youcan perform the following driving cycleconsisting of mixed city and highway driving:1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an

expressway or highway followed by 20minutes of stop-and-go driving with atleast four 30-second idle periods.

2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least eighthours with the ignition off. Then, start thevehicle and complete the above drivingcycle. The vehicle must warm up to itsnormal operating temperature. Oncestarted, do not turn off the vehicle untilthe above driving cycle is complete.

If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing,you need to repeat the above driving cycle.

139


Fuel and Refueling

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNINGSAlways set the parking brake fully andmake sure the gearshift is latched inPark (P). Turn the ignition to the off

position and remove the key whenever youleave your vehicle.

Do not apply the brake pedal andaccelerator pedal simultaneously.Applying both pedals simultaneously

for more than three seconds will limit enginerpm, which may result in difficultymaintaining speed in traffic and could leadto serious injury.

Understanding the Positions of YourAutomatic TransmissionPutting your vehicle in gear:1. Fully press down the brake pedal.2. Press and hold the button on the front of

the gearshift lever.3. Move the gearshift lever into the desired

gear.4. Release the button and your transmission

will remain in the selected gear.

P

R

N

D

S

E142628

Park (P)This position locks the transmission andprevents the front wheels from turning. Cometo a complete stop before putting yourvehicle into and out of Park (P)

Reverse (R)With the gearshift lever in Reverse (R), yourvehicle will move backward. Always come toa complete stop before shifting into and outof Reverse (R).

Neutral (N)With the gearshift lever in Neutral (N), youcan start your vehicle and it is free to roll.Hold the brake pedal down while in thisposition.

Drive (D)The normal driving position for the best fueleconomy. Transmission operates in gearsone through six.

Sport (S)Moving the gearshift lever to Sport (S):• Provides additional grade (engine)

braking and extends lower gear operationto enhance performance for uphill climbs,hilly terrain or mountainous areas. Thiswill increase engine RPM during enginebraking.

• Provides additional lower gear operationthrough the automatic transmission shiftstrategy.

• Gears are selected more quickly and athigher engine speeds.

140


Transmission

SelectShift Automatic™Transmission (If Equipped)

Your SelectShift Automatic transmissiongives you the ability to change gearsmanually.With your vehicle in Drive (D), the paddleshifters provide temporary manual control.They allow you the ability to shift gearsquickly, without taking your hands off thesteering wheel.You can achieve extensive manual controlby moving the gearshift lever to the Sport (S)position.• Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.• Pull the left paddle (–) to downshift.

E144821

The system determines when temporarymanual control is no longer in use and returnsto automatic control.

Upshift to the recommended shift speedsaccording to the following chart:

Upshifts when accelerating (recommendedfor best fuel economy)

Shift from:

15 mph (24 km/h)1 - 2

25 mph (40 km/h)2 - 3

40 mph (64 km/h)3 - 4

45 mph (72 km/h)4 - 5

50 mph (80 km/h)5 - 6

The instrument cluster will display yourcurrently selected gear.The transmission will automatically upshiftif your engine speed is too high or downshiftif your engine speed is too low.Note: The system will stay in manual controluntil you move the gearshift lever to anotherposition. For example, Drive (D).Note: Engine damage may occur if excessiveengine revving is held without shifting.

Brake-Shift InterlockWARNINGS

Do not drive your vehicle until you verifythat the brake lamps are working.When doing this procedure, you will betaking the vehicle out of park whichmeans your vehicle can roll freely. To

avoid unwanted vehicle movement, alwaysfully set the parking brake prior to doing thisprocedure. Use wheel chocks if appropriate.

If the parking brake is fully released, butthe brake warning lamp remainsilluminated, the brakes may not be

working properly. See your authorized dealer.

Note: See an authorized dealer as soon aspossible if this procedure is used.Note: For some markets this feature will bedisabled.Use the brake shift interlock lever to movethe gearshift lever from the park position inthe event of an electrical malfunction or ifyour vehicle has a dead battery.Apply the parking brake and turn the ignitionoff before performing this procedure.

141


Transmission

E173230

1. Remove the side panel on the left side ofthe gearshift lever.

2. Locate the brake shift interlock lever onthe left side of the gearshift assembly.

3. Apply the brake pedal. Using ascrewdriver (or similar tool), press downand hold the brake shift interlock leverwhile pulling the gearshift lever out ofPark (P) and into Neutral (N).

4. Install the side panel in reverse order.5. Apply brake pedal, start your vehicle, and

release the parking brake.

Automatic Transmission AdaptiveLearningThis feature is designed to increase durabilityand provide consistent shift feel over the lifeof the vehicle. A new vehicle or transmissionmay have firm and/or soft shifts. Thisoperation is considered normal and will notaffect function or durability of thetransmission. Over time, the adaptive learningprocess will fully update transmissionoperation. Additionally, whenever the batteryis disconnected or a new battery installed,the strategy must be relearned.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud orSnowNote: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine isnot at normal operating temperature ordamage to the transmission may occur.

Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more thana minute or damage to the transmission andtires may occur, or the engine may overheat.If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, itmay be rocked out by shifting betweenforward and reverse gears, stopping betweenshifts in a steady pattern. Press lightly on theaccelerator in each gear.

142


Transmission

USING ALL-WHEEL DRIVEAll-wheel drive uses all four wheels to powerthe vehicle. This increases traction, enablingyou to drive over terrain and road conditionsthat a conventional two-wheel drive vehiclecannot. The AWD system is active all the timeand requires no input from the operator.

Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended foroff-road use. The AWD feature gives yourvehicle some limited off-road capabilities inwhich driving surfaces are relatively level,obstruction-free and otherwise similar tonormal on-road driving conditions. Operatingyour vehicle under other than those conditionscould subject the vehicle to excessive stresswhich might result in damage which is notcovered under your warranty.Note: When an AWD system fault is present,the warning Check AWD displays in theinformation display. The AWD system is notfunctioning correctly and defaults tofront-wheel drive. When this warning displays,have your vehicle serviced at an authorizeddealer.

Note: The AWD OFF message may alsoappear in the information display if the AWDsystem overheats and defaults to front-wheeldrive. This may occur if the vehicle is operatedin extreme conditions with excessive wheelslip, such as deep sand. To resume normalAWD function as soon as possible, stop thevehicle in a safe location and stop the enginefor at least 10 minutes. After the engine hasbeen restarted and the AWD system hasadequately cooled, the AWD OFF messagewill turn off and normal AWD function returns.If the engine is not stopped, the AWD OFFmessage turns off when the system cools andnormal AWD function returns.

143


All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

All-Wheel Drive Messages

Action / DescriptionAWD Messages

Displayed when the system has been automatically disabled to protectitself. This is caused by operating the vehicle with the compact sparetire installed or if the system is overheating. The system will resumenormal function and clear this message after cycling the ignition onand off and driving a short distance with the road tire re-installed orafter the system is allowed to cool.

AWD OFF

Displayed in conjunction with the powertrain malfunction/reducedpower light when the system is not operating properly. If the warningstays on or continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer assoon as possible.

Check AWD

Operating AWD Vehicles With SpareTiresA spare tire of a different size other than thetire provided should never be used. The AWDsystem may disable automatically and enterfront-wheel drive only mode to protectdriveline components if a non-full sized tireis installed. This condition may display anAWD OFF message in the informationdisplay. If there is an AWD OFF message inthe information display from using a non-fullsized spare tire, this indicator should turn offafter reinstalling the repaired or replacednormal road tire and cycling the ignition off

and on. It is recommended to reinstall therepaired or replaced road tire as soon aspossible. Major dissimilar tire sizes betweenthe front and rear axles (for example, 17 inchlow profile tires on the front axle and 22 inchhigh profile tires on the rear axle) could causethe AWD system to stop functioning anddefault to front-wheel drive or damage theAWD system.

144



Operating AWD Vehicles WithMismatched Tires

WARNINGOnly use replacement tires and wheelsthat are the same size, load index,speed rating and type (such as

P-metric versus LT-metric or all-seasonversus all-terrain) as those originally providedby Ford. The recommended tire and wheelsize may be found on either the SafetyCompliance Certification Label (affixed toeither the door hinge pillar, door-latch post,or the door edge that meets the door-latchpost, next to the driver’s seating position), orthe Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillaror edge of the driver’s door. If this informationis not found on these labels, then you shouldcontact your authorized dealer as soon aspossible. Use of any tire or wheel notrecommended by Ford can affect the safetyand performance of your vehicle, which couldresult in an increased risk of loss of vehiclecontrol, vehicle rollover, personal injury anddeath. Additionally the use ofnon-recommended tires and wheels couldcause steering, suspension, axle, transfercase or power transfer unit failure. If you havequestions regarding tire replacement, contactyour authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Major dissimilar tire sizes between the frontand rear axles (for example, 17 inch lowprofile tires on the front axle and 22 inch highprofile tires on the rear axle) could cause theAWD system to stop functioning and defaultto front-wheel drive or damage the AWDsystem. However, the AWD system is capableof tolerating any combination of new andworn tires of the same original tire size. Forexample, using 3 worn tread tires and 1 newtread tire all of the same original tire size, canbe tolerated by the AWD system.

Driving In Special Conditions WithAll-Wheel Drive (AWD)AWD vehicles are equipped for driving onsand, snow, mud and rough roads and haveoperating characteristics that are somewhatdifferent from conventional vehicles, both onand off the highway.When driving at slow speeds in deep sandunder high outside temperatures, use a lowgear when possible. Lower gear operationwill maximize the engine and transmissioncooling capability.Under severe operating conditions, the A/Cmay cycle on and off to protect overheatingof the engine.

Basic operating principles in specialconditions• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which

can affect the normal steeringcharacteristics of your vehicle.

• Be extremely careful when driving onpavement made slippery by loose sand,water, gravel, snow or ice.

145



If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of thePavement• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the

pavement, slow down, but avoid severebrake application, ease the vehicle backonto the pavement only after reducingyour speed. Do not turn the steeringwheel too sharply while returning to theroad surface.

• It may be safer to stay on the apron orshoulder of the road and slow downgradually before returning to thepavement. You may lose control if you donot slow down or if you turn the steeringwheel too sharply or abruptly.

• It often may be less risky to strike smallobjects, such as highway reflectors, withminor damage to your vehicle rather thanattempt a sudden return to the pavementwhich could cause the vehicle to slidesideways out of control or rollover.Remember, your safety and the safety ofothers should be your primary concern.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

WARNINGSAlways set the parking brake fully andmake sure the transmission is in P(Park). Turn the ignition to the lock

position or turn the vehicle off using thestart/stop button and remove the keywhenever you leave your vehicle.

If the parking brake is fully released, butthe brake warning lamp remainsilluminated, the brakes may not be

working properly. See your authorized dealer.Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph(56 km/h). The tires may fail and injurea passenger or bystander.

Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine isnot at normal operating temperature ordamage to the transmission may occur.Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than afew minutes or damage to the transmissionand tires may occur or the engine mayoverheat.If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow itmay be rocked out by shifting betweenforward and reverse gears, stopping betweenshifts, in a steady pattern. Press lightly on theaccelerator in each gear.

If your vehicle is equipped withAdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™,it may be beneficial to disengage theAdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™system while attempting to rock the vehicle.

Emergency Maneuvers• In an unavoidable emergency situation

where a sudden sharp turn must bemade, remember to avoid "over-driving"your vehicle (that is, turn the steeringwheel only as rapidly and as far asrequired to avoid the emergency).Excessive steering will result in lessvehicle control, not more. Additionally,smooth variations of the acceleratorand/or brake pedal pressure should beutilized if changes in vehicle speed arecalled for. Avoid abrupt steering,

146



acceleration or braking which could resultin an increased risk of loss of vehiclecontrol, vehicle rollover and/or personalinjury. Use all available road surface toreturn the vehicle to a safe direction oftravel.

• In the event of an emergency stop, avoidskidding the tires and do not attempt anysharp steering wheel movements.

• If the vehicle goes from one type ofsurface to another (that is, from concreteto gravel) there will be a change in theway the vehicle responds to a maneuver(steering, acceleration or braking). Again,avoid these abrupt inputs.

SandMost of the time traction control improvestire traction by managing wheel slip throughBrake, Engine, and AWD calibrations.However, during low speed driving, disablingtraction control in deep sand can help keepthe wheels moving to maintain vehiclemomentum.When driving over sand, try to keep all fourwheels on the most solid area of the trail.Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift toa lower gear and drive steadily through theterrain. Apply the accelerator slowly andavoid spinning the wheels.

Do not drive your vehicle in deep sand for anextended period of time. This could causethe AWD system to overheat and default tofront-wheel drive. If this occurs, an AWD OFFmessage displays in the information display.To resume normal AWD function as soon aspossible, stop the vehicle in a safe locationand stop the engine for at least 10 minutes.After the engine has been restarted and theAWD system has adequately cooled, theAWD OFF message turns off and normalAWD function returns. In the event the engineis not stopped, the AWD OFF message turnsoff when the system cools and normal AWDfunction returns.When driving at slow speeds in deep sandunder high outside temperatures, use L (Low)gear when possible. L (Low) gear operationwill maximize the engine and transmissioncooling capability.Under severe operating conditions, the A/Cmay cycle on and off to protect overheatingof the engine.Avoid excessive speed because vehiclemomentum can work against you and causethe vehicle to become stuck to the point thatassistance may be required from anothervehicle. Remember, you may be able to backout the way you came if you proceed withcaution.

Mud and WaterIf you must drive through high water, driveslowly. Traction or brake capability may belimited.When driving through water, determine thedepth; avoid water higher than the bottomof the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom ofthe hubs (for trucks) (if possible) andproceed slowly. If the ignition system getswet, the vehicle may stall.Once through water, always try the brakes.Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle aseffectively as dry brakes. Drying can beimproved by moving your vehicle slowly whileapplying light pressure on the brake pedal.Be cautious of sudden changes in vehiclespeed or direction when you are driving inmud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction inslick mud. As when you are driving over sand,apply the accelerator slowly and avoidspinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide,steer in the direction of the slide until youregain control of the vehicle.After driving through mud, clean off residuestuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. Excessmud stuck on tires and rotating driveshaftscauses an imbalance that could damagedrive components.

147



Note: Driving through deep water maydamage the transmission.If the front or rear axle is submerged in water,have the power transfer unit (PTU) or rearaxle serviced by an authorized dealer.

E143950

“Tread Lightly” is an educational programdesigned to increase public awareness ofland-use regulations and responsibilities inour nations wilderness areas. Ford MotorCompany joins the U.S. Forest Service andthe Bureau of Land Management inencouraging you to help preserve our nationalforest and other public and private lands by“treading lightly.”

Driving on Hilly or Sloping TerrainNote: Avoid driving crosswise or turning onsteep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losingtraction, slipping sideways and possibly rollingover. Whenever driving on a hill, determinebeforehand the route you will use. Do not driveover the crest of a hill without seeing whatconditions are on the other side. Do not drivein reverse over a hill without the aid of anobserver.Although natural obstacles may make itnecessary to travel diagonally up or down ahill or steep incline, you should always try todrive straight up or straight down.When climbing a steep slope or hill, start ina lower gear rather than downshifting to alower gear from a higher gear once the ascenthas started. This reduces strain on the engineand the possibility of stalling.If you do stall out, do not try to turnaroundbecause you might roll over. It is better toback down to a safe location.Apply just enough power to the wheels toclimb the hill. Too much power will cause thetires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting inloss of vehicle control.

E143949

Descend a hill in the same gear you woulduse to climb up the hill to avoid excessivebrake application and brake overheating. Donot descend in neutral; instead, disengageoverdrive or manually shift to a lower gear.When descending a steep hill, avoid suddenhard braking as you could lose control. Thefront wheels have to be turning in order tosteer the vehicle.Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, thereforeapply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump” thebrakes.

148



Driving on Snow and Ice

WARNINGIf you are driving in slippery conditionsthat require tire chains or cables, thenit is critical that you drive cautiously.

Keep speeds down, allow for longer stoppingdistances and avoid aggressive steering toreduce the chances of a loss of vehiclecontrol which can lead to serious injury ordeath. If the rear end of the vehicle slideswhile cornering, steer in the direction of theslide until you regain control of the vehicle.

Note: Excessive tire slippage can causedriveline damage.AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WDvehicles in snow and ice but can skid like anyother vehicle.Should you start to slide while driving onsnowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheelin the direction of the slide until you regaincontrol.Avoid sudden applications of power andquick changes of direction on snow and ice.Apply the accelerator slowly and steadilywhen starting from a full stop.

Avoid sudden braking as well. Although anAWD vehicle may accelerate better than atwo-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, itwon’t stop any faster, because as in othervehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels.Do not become overconfident as to roadconditions.Make sure you allow sufficient distancebetween you and other vehicles for stopping.Drive slower than usual and consider usingone of the lower gears. In emergencystopping situations, apply the brake steadily.Since your vehicle is equipped with a fourwheel (ABS), do not “pump” the brakes. SeeHints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes(page 150).

Maintenance and ModificationsThe suspension and steering systems on yourvehicle have been designed and tested toprovide predictable performance whetherloaded or empty and durable load carryingcapability. For this reason, Ford MotorCompany strongly recommends that you donot make modifications such as adding orremoving parts (such as lowering kits orstabilizer bars) or by using replacement partsnot equivalent to the original factoryequipment.

Any modifications to a vehicle that raise thecenter of gravity can make it more likely thevehicle will rollover as a result of a loss ofcontrol. Ford Motor Company recommendsthat caution be used with any vehicleequipped with a high load or device (such asladder or luggage racks).Failure to maintain your vehicle properly mayvoid the warranty, increase your repair cost,reduce vehicle performance and operationalcapabilities and adversely affect driver andpassenger safety. Frequent inspection ofvehicle chassis components is recommendedif the vehicle is subjected to off-highwayusage.

149



GENERAL INFORMATIONNote: Occasional brake noise is normal. If ametal-to-metal, continuous grinding orcontinuous squeal sound is present, the brakelinings may be worn-out. Have the systemchecked by an authorized dealer. If your vehiclehas continuous vibration or shudder in thesteering wheel while braking, have it checkedby an authorized dealer.Note: Brake dust may accumulate on thewheels, even under normal driving conditions.Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wearand does not contribute to brake noise. SeeCleaning the Alloy Wheels (page 268).Note: Depending on applicable laws andregulations in the country for which yourvehicle was originally built, your brake lampsmay flash during heavy braking. Following this,your hazard lights may also flash when yourvehicle comes to a stop.

E144522

See Warning Lamps andIndicators (page 85).

Wet brakes result in reduced brakingefficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a fewtimes when driving from a car wash orstanding water to dry the brakes.

Brake Over AcceleratorIn the event the accelerator pedal becomesstuck or entrapped, apply steady and firmpressure to the brake pedal to slow thevehicle and reduce engine power. If youexperience this condition, apply the brakesand bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Movethe transmission to park (P), switch theengine off and apply the parking brake.Inspect the accelerator pedal for anyinterference. If none are found and thecondition persists, have your vehicle towedto the nearest authorized dealer.

Brake AssistBrake assist detects when you brake rapidlyby measuring the rate at which you press thebrake pedal. It provides maximum brakingefficiency as long as you press the pedal, andcan reduce stopping distances in criticalsituations.

Anti-lock Brake SystemThis system helps you maintain steeringcontrol during emergency stops by keepingthe brakes from locking.

This lamp momentarily illuminateswhen you turn the ignition on. If thelight does not illuminate during

start up, remains on or flashes, the systemmay be disabled. Have the system checkedby an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brakesystem is disabled, normal braking is stilleffective.

E144522

If the brake warning lampilluminates when you release theparking brake, have the system

checked by an authorized dealer.

HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKESNote: When the system is operating, the brakepedal may pulse and may travel further.Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You mayalso hear a noise from the system. This isnormal.The anti-lock braking system will noteliminate the risks when:• You drive too closely to the vehicle in

front of you.• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.• You take corners too fast.• The road surface is poor.

150


Brakes

PARKING BRAKE

WARNINGSIf the parking brake is fully released, butthe brake warning lamp remainsilluminated, then driving your vehicle

could result in reduced braking ability,increased stopping distances and potentialloss of brakes. See your authorized dealer assoon as possible.

Always set the parking brake fully andmake sure the transmission is placedin park (P). Failure to set the parking

brake and engage park could result in vehicleroll-away, property damage or bodily injury.Turn the ignition to the lock position andremove the key whenever you leave yourvehicle.

To set the parking brake, press the parkingbrake pedal down to its fullest extent.To release the parking brake, press theparking brake pedal down again.

HILL START ASSIST

WARNINGSThe system does not replace theparking brake. When you leave yourvehicle, always apply the parking brake.

Failure to leave your vehicle securely parkedmay lead to a crash or injury. See ParkingBrake (page 151).

You must remain in your vehicle whenthe system turns on. At all times, youare responsible for controlling your

vehicle, supervising the system andintervening, if required. Failure to take caremay result in the loss of control of yourvehicle, serious personal injury or death.

The system will turn off if a malfunctionis apparent or if you rev the engineexcessively. Failure to take care may

result in the loss of control of your vehicle,serious personal injury or death.

The system makes it easier to pull awaywhen your vehicle is on a slope without theneed to use the parking brake.

When the system is active, your vehicleremains stationary on the slope for two tothree seconds after you release the brakepedal. This allows time to move your footfrom the brake to the accelerator pedal. Thesystem releases the brakes automaticallyonce the engine has developed sufficienttorque to prevent your vehicle from rollingdown the slope. This is an advantage whenpulling away on a slope, for example from acar park ramp, traffic lights or when reversinguphill into a parking space.Note: The system only functions when youbring your vehicle to a complete standstill inan uphill gear (for example, drive (D) whenfacing uphill or reverse (R) when facingdownhill).Note: There is no warning light to indicate thesystem is either on or off.

Using Hill Start Assist1. Press the brake pedal to bring your

vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep thebrake pedal pressed.

2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle ison a slope, the system activatesautomatically.

151


Brakes

3. When you remove your foot from thebrake pedal, your vehicle remains on theslope without rolling away for about twoto three seconds. This hold timeautomatically extends if you are in theprocess of driving off.

4. Drive off in the normal manner. Thesystem releases the brakesautomatically.

Note: When you remove your foot from thebrake pedal and press the pedal again whenthe system is active, you will experiencesignificantly reduced brake pedal travel. Thisis normal.

Switching the System On and OffVehicles with Manual TransmissionYou can switch this feature on or off in theinformation display. The system remembersthe last setting when you start your vehicle.

Vehicles with Automatic TransmissionYou cannot turn the system on or off. Whenyou switch the ignition on, the systemautomatically turns on.

152


Brakes

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONThe traction control system helps avoid drivewheel spin and loss of traction.If your vehicle begins to slide, the systemapplies the brakes to individual wheels and,when needed, reduces engine power at thesame time. If the wheels spin whenaccelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,the system reduces engine power in order toincrease traction.

USING TRACTION CONTROL

WARNINGThe stability and traction control lightilluminates steadily if the systemdetects a failure. Make sure you did not

manually disable the traction control systemusing the information display controls or theswitch. If the stability control and tractioncontrol light is still illuminating steadily, havethe system serviced by an authorized dealerimmediately. Operating your vehicle with thetraction control disabled could lead to anincreased risk of loss of vehicle control,vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

The system automatically turns on each timeyou switch the ignition on.If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,switching traction control off may bebeneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.Note: When you switch traction control off,stability control remains fully active.

Switching the System OffWhen you switch the system off or on, amessage appears in the information displayshowing system status.You can switch the system off by either usingthe information display controls or the switch.

Using the Information DisplayControlsYou can switch this feature off or on in theinformation display. See Using TractionControl (page 153).

Using a Switch (If Equipped)

Use the traction control switch on theinstrument panel to switch the system off oron.The switch illuminates when traction controlis off.

System Indicator Lights andMessages

E138639

The stability and traction controllight:

• Temporarily illuminates on enginestart-up.

• Flashes when a driving conditionactivates either of the systems.

• Illuminates if a problem occurs in eitherof the systems.

The stability and traction controloff light temporarily illuminates onengine start-up and stays on when

you switch the traction control system off.

153


Traction Control


WARNINGSVehicle modifications involving brakingsystem, aftermarket roof racks,suspension, steering system, tire

construction and wheel and tire size maychange the handling characteristics of yourvehicle and may adversely affect theperformance of the electronic stabilitycontrol system. In addition, installing anystereo loudspeakers may interfere with andadversely affect the electronic stabilitycontrol system. Install any aftermarket stereoloudspeaker as far as possible from the frontcenter console, the tunnel, and the frontseats in order to minimize the risk ofinterfering with the electronic stability controlsensors. Reducing the effectiveness of theelectronic stability control system could leadto an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

Remember that even advancedtechnology cannot defy the laws ofphysics. It’s always possible to lose

control of a vehicle due to inappropriatedriver input for the conditions. Aggressivedriving on any road condition can cause youto lose control of your vehicle increasing therisk of personal injury or property damage.

WARNINGSActivation of the electronic stability controlsystem is an indication that at least some ofthe tires have exceeded their ability to gripthe road; this could reduce the operator’sability to control the vehicle potentiallyresulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehiclerollover, personal injury and death. If yourelectronic stability control system activates,SLOW DOWN.

The system automatically turns on each timeyou switch the ignition on.If a driving condition activates either thestability control or the traction control systemyou may experience the following conditions:• The stability and traction control light

flashes.• Your vehicle slows down.• Reduced engine power.• A vibration in the brake pedal.

• The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.• If the driving condition is severe and your

foot is not on the brake, the brake pedalmay move as the system applies higherbrake forces.

The stability control system has severalfeatures built into it to help you maintaincontrol of your vehicle:

Electronic Stability ControlThe system enhances your vehicle’s abilityto prevent skids or lateral slides by applyingbrakes to one or more of the wheelsindividually and, if necessary, reducing enginepower.

154


Stability Control

Traction ControlThe system enhances your vehicle’s abilityto maintain traction of the wheels bydetecting and controlling wheel spin. SeeUsing Traction Control (page 153).

E72903

A A

AB

B

B

B

Vehicle without stability controlskidding off its intended route.

A

Vehicle with stability controlB

maintaining control on a slipperysurface.

USING STABILITY CONTROLThe system automatically turns on each timeyou switch the ignition on.You cannot switch the stability controlsystem off, but when you shift into reverse(R), the system deactivates.You can switch the traction control systemoff or on. See Using Traction Control (page153).

155


Stability Control


WARNINGSTo help avoid personal injury, pleaseread and understand the limitations ofthe system as contained in this section.

Sensing is only an aid for some (generallylarge and fixed) objects when moving on aflat surface at parking speeds. Certain objectswith surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves,surrounding vehicle's parking aid systems,traffic control systems, fluorescent lamps,inclement weather, air brakes, and externalmotors and fans may also affect the functionof the sensing system; this may includereduced performance or a false activation.

To help avoid personal injury, alwaysuse caution when in reverse (R) andwhen using the sensing system.This system is not designed to preventcontact with small or moving objects.The system is designed to provide a

warning to assist the driver in detecting largestationary objects to avoid damaging yourvehicle. The system may not detect smallerobjects, particularly those close to theground.

WARNINGSCertain add-on devices such as largetrailer hitches, bike or surfboard racksand any device that may block the

normal detection zone of the system, maycreate false beeps.

Note: Keep the sensors, located on thebumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and largeaccumulations of dirt. If the sensors arecovered, the system’s accuracy can beaffected. Do not clean the sensors with sharpobjects.Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to thebumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent,the sensing zone may be altered causinginaccurate measurement of obstacles or falsealarms.Note: The sensing system cannot be turnedoff when a MyKey is present. See Principleof Operation (page 50).Note: If you attach certain add-on devicessuch as a trailer or bike rack, the rear sensingsystem may detect that add-on device andtherefore provide warnings. It is suggested thatyou disable the rear sensing system when youattach an add-on device to your vehicle toprevent these warnings.

The sensing system warns the driver ofobstacles within a certain range of yourvehicle. The system turns on automaticallywhenever you switch the ignition on.The system can be switched off through theinformation display menu or from the pop-upmessage that appears once you shift thetransmission into reverse (R). See GeneralInformation (page 89).If a fault is present in the system, a warningmessage appears in the information display.See Information Messages (page 95).

REAR PARKING AIDThe rear sensors are only active when thetransmission is in reverse (R). As your vehiclemoves closer to the obstacle, the rate of theaudible warning increases. When theobstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away, thewarning sounds continuously. If the systemdetects a stationary or receding object fartherthan 12 in (30 cm) from the corners of thebumper, the tone sounds for only threeseconds. Once the system detects an objectapproaching, the warning sounds again.

156


Parking Aids

E130178

Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from therear bumper. There may be decreasedcoverage area at the outer corners of thebumper.

The system detects certain objects while thetransmission is in reverse (R) :• Your vehicle is moving toward a

stationary object at a speed of 3 mph(5 km/h) or less.

• Your vehicle is not moving, but a movingobject is approaching the rear of yourvehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) orless.

• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of lessthan 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving objectis approaching the rear of your vehicle ata speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h).

The system provides audio warnings onlywhen your vehicle is moving or when yourvehicle is stationary and the detectedobstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away fromthe bumper.

FRONT PARKING AID (If Equipped)

The front sensors are active when thetransmission is in any position other than park(P) or neutral (N), and your vehicle is movingbut at a speed below 6 mph (10 km/h).

E187330

Coverage area of up to 28 in (70 cm) fromthe front bumper. The coverage areadecreases at the outer corners.When your vehicle approaches an object, awarning tone sounds. When your vehiclemoves closer to an object, the warning tonerepeat rate increases. The warning tonesounds continuously when an object is 12 in(30 cm) or less from the front bumper.If the transmission is in reverse (R), the frontsensing system provides audio warningswhen your vehicle is moving and the detectedobstacle is stationary or moving towards yourvehicle.

157


Parking Aids

If the transmission is in drive (D) or any otherforward gear (for example, low (L), sport (S)or any forward gear in a manualtransmission), the front sensing systemprovides audio warnings when your vehicleis moving below a speed of 7 mph (12 km/h)and an obstacle is located inside thedetection area.

ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (If Equipped)

WARNINGSDesigned to be a supplementary parkaid, this system may not work in allconditions. This system cannot replace

the driver’s attention and judgment. Thedriver is responsible for avoiding hazards andmaintaining a safe distance and speed, evenwhen the system is in use.

Active Park Assist does not apply thebrakes under any circumstances.

Note: The driver is always responsible forcontrolling the vehicle, supervising the systemand intervening if required by grabbing thesteering wheel or pressing the active parkassist button (if equipped).

Note: The sensors may not detect objects inheavy rain, snow or other conditions that causedisruptive reflections.Note: Keep the sensors, located on thebumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and largeaccumulations of dirt. Covered sensors canaffect the system's accuracy. Do not clean thesensors with sharp objects.Note: The sensors may not detect objectswith surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves.Active Park Assist is an electric parking aidthat uses ultrasonic sensors. The systemdetects an available parallel parking spaceand automatically steers your vehicle intothe space (hands-free) while you control theaccelerator, gearshift and brakes. The systemvisually and audibly instructs you to park yourvehicle.The system may not function correctly ifsomething passes between the front bumperand the parking space (a pedestrian orcyclist) or if the edge of the neighboringparked vehicle is high off the ground (forexample, a bus, tow truck or flatbed truck).If you are uncomfortable with the proximityto any vehicle or object, you may choose tooverride the system.

The system may not operate correctly in anyof the following conditions:• You use a spare tire or a tire significantly

worn more than the other tires.• One or more tires are improperly inflated.• You try to park on a tight curve.Do not use the system if:• You have attached a bike rack, trailer or

similar object to the front or rear of yourvehicle, close to the sensors.

• You have attached an overhanging object(surfboard) to the roof.

• The front bumper or side sensors aredamaged or obstructed (front bumpercover).

• The correct tire size is not in use on yourvehicle (for example, a mini-spare tire).

Using Active Park Assist

E144525

Press the button to turn the systemon or off.

158


Parking Aids

When driving at a speed less than 22 mph(35 km/h), the system automatically scansboth sides of your vehicle for an availableparking space. A message and acorresponding graphic appears in the display

screen to indicate it is searching for a parkingspace. Use the direction indicator to indicatewhich side of your vehicle you want thesystem to search.

Note: If the direction indicator is not on, thesystem automatically searches on yourvehicle's passenger side.

E130107

When the system finds a suitable space, thetouchscreen displays a message and a chimesounds. Slow down, continue moving forwardand stop when another chime sounds and amessage displays on the touchscreen, thenfollow the instructions on the touchscreen.Note: You must observe that the selectedspace remains clear of obstructions at alltimes in the maneuver.

Note: Active park assist may not detectvehicles with overhanging loads (a bus or atruck), street furniture and other items. Youmust make sure the selected space is suitablefor parking.Note: You should drive your vehicle within 5 ft(1.5 m) and as parallel to the other vehicles aspossible while passing a parking space.Note: The system always offers the lastdetected parking space (for example, if yourvehicle detects multiple spaces while you aredriving, it offers the last one).

Note: If driven above approximately 22 mph(35 km/h), the display screen shows amessage to alert you to reduce your vehiclespeed.

Automatic Steering into ParkingSpaceNote: If vehicle speed exceeds 22 mph(35 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted(driver input is detected), the system switchesoff and you need to take full control of yourvehicle.

159


Parking Aids

Note: If a maneuver is interrupted beforecompletion, the system switches off. Thesteering wheel position will not indicate theactualy position of the steering and you haveto take full control of your vehicle.

When you shift the transmission into reverse(R), with your hands off the wheel (andnothing obstructing its movement), yourvehicle steers itself into the space. Thesystem displays instructions to move yourvehicle back and forth in the space.

E130108

When you think your vehicle has enoughspace in front and behind it, or you hear asolid tone from the parking aid (accompaniedby a touchscreen display message and achime), bring your vehicle to a complete stop.When automatic steering is finished, thedisplay screen displays a message and achime sounds, indicating that the active parkassist process is done. The driver isresponsible for checking the parking job andmaking any necessary corrections beforeputting the transmission in park (P).

Deactivating the Park Assist FeatureManually deactivate the system by:• Pressing the active park assist button

during an active maneuver.• Grabbing the steering wheel during an

active maneuver.• Driving above approximately 22 mph

(35 km/h) for 30 seconds during anactive park search.

• Driving above 22 mph (35 km/h) duringautomatic steering.

• Turning off the traction control system.Certain vehicle conditions can also deactivatethe system, such as:• Traction control has activated on a

slippery or loose surface.• There is an anti-lock brake system

activation or failure.• Something touches the steering wheel.

160


Parking Aids

If a problem occurs with the system, awarning message is displayed, followed bya chime. Occasional system messages may

occur in normal operation. For recurring orfrequent system faults, contact an authorizeddealer to have your vehicle serviced.

Troubleshooting the System

The system does not look for a space

The traction control system may be off.

The transmission is in reverse (R); your vehicle must be moving forward to detect a parking space.

The system does not offer a particular space

The sensors may be covered (for example, snow, ice or dirt buildup). Covered sensors can affect the system's functionality

There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park.

There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking space.

The parking space is farther than 5 ft (1.5 m) or closer than 16 in (40 cm) away.

Your vehicle is going faster than 22 mph (35 km/h).

The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to be able to detect a parking space.

161


Parking Aids

The system does not position your vehicle where I want in the space

Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (rolling forward when reverse [R] is selected).

An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning your vehicle properly.

Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly.

Your vehicle was pulled too far past the parking space. The system performs best when you drive the same distance past the parking space.

The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (not inflated correctly, improper size, or of different sizes).

A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities.

A parked vehicle has a high attachment (salt sprayer, snowplow, moving truck bed, etc).

The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed.

The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (driving from a heated garage into the cold, or after leaving a car wash).

You didn't wait for the steering to complete its rotation after a gear change. The system performs best when the steering wheel is allowedto finish rotating before accelerating.

REAR VIEW CAMERA

WARNINGSThe rear view camera system is areverse aid supplement device that stillrequires the driver to use it in

conjunction with the interior and exteriormirrors for maximum coverage.

WARNINGSObjects that are close to either cornerof the bumper or under the bumper,might not be seen on the screen due to

the limited coverage of the camera system.Back up as slow as possible sincehigher speeds might limit your reactiontime to stop the vehicle.

WARNINGSUse caution when using the rear videocamera and the trunk is ajar. If the trunkis ajar, the camera will be out of

position and the video image may beincorrect. All guidelines (if enabled) havebeen removed when the trunk is ajar.

162


Parking Aids

WARNINGSUse caution when turning camerafeatures on or off while in R (Reverse).Make sure the vehicle is not moving.

The rear view camera system provides avideo image of the area behind your vehicle.The image will display in either the rear viewmirror or the display in the center of theinstrument panel.During operation, lines will appear in thedisplay that represent your vehicle’s path andproximity to objects behind your vehicle.

E192471

The camera is located on the trunk.

Using the Rear View Camera SystemThe rear view camera system displays whatis behind your vehicle when you place thetransmission in Reverse (R).The system uses three types of guides to helpyou see what is behind your vehicle:• Active guidelines: Show the intended

path of your vehicle when reversing.• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path

your vehicle is moving in while reversingin a straight line. This can be helpful whenbacking into a parking space or aligningyour vehicle with another object behindyou.

• Centerline (if applicable): Helps align thecenter of your vehicle with an object(trailer).

Note: If the transmission is in Reverse (R) andthe luggage compartment is ajar, no rear viewcamera features will display.Note: If the image comes on while thetransmission is not in Reverse (R), have thesystem inspected by an authorized dealer.

Note: When towing, the camera only seeswhat you are towing behind your vehicle. Thismight not provide adequate coverage and youmight not see some objects. In some vehicles,the guidelines may disappear once youconnect the trailer tow connector.The camera may not operate correctly underthe following conditions:• Nighttime or dark areas if the reverse

lamps are not operating.• Mud, water or debris obstructs the

camera's view. Clean the lens with a soft,lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.

• The camera is misaligned due to damageto the rear of your vehicle.

The rear view camera system settings canbe accessed through the information display.See General Information (page 89). Afterchanging a system setting, the touch screenshows a preview of the selected features.

Guidelines and the CenterlineNote: Active guidelines and fixed guidelinesare only available when the transmission is inReverse (R).Note: The centerline is only available if Activeor Fixed guidelines are on.

163


Parking Aids

A B C D

F

E

E142436

Active guidelines (if equipped)ACenterlineBFixed guideline: Green zoneC

Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneDFixed guideline: Red zoneERear bumperF

If your vehicle is equipped with activeguidelines they are only available with fixedguidelines. To use active guidelines, turn thesteering wheel to point the guidelines towardan intended path. If you change the steeringwheel position while reversing, your vehiclemight deviate from the original intended path.The fixed and active guidelines fade in andout depending on your steering wheelposition. When your steering wheel positionis straight, the active guidelines are notvisible.Always use caution while reversing. Objectsin the red zone are closest to your vehicle andobjects in the green zone are farther away.Objects are getting closer to your vehicle asthey move from the green zone to the yellowor red zones. Use the side view mirrors andrear view mirror to get better coverage onboth sides and rear of your vehicle.

Enhanced Park AidsNote: Enhanced park aids are only availablewhen the transmission is in Reverse (R).

Note: The reverse sensing system is noteffective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) andmay not detect certain angular or movingobjects.The system uses red, yellow and greenhighlights that appear on top of the videoimage when the reverse sensing systemdetects an object. The alert highlights theclosest object detected. You can disable thereverse sensing alert if you have visual parkaid alert enabled, you will still see thedisplayed highlighted areas.Selectable settings for this feature are ONand OFF.

Manual Zoom

WARNINGWhen manual zoom is on, the full areabehind your vehicle is not shown. Beaware of your surroundings when using

the manual zoom feature.

Note: Manual zoom is only available whenthe transmission is in Reverse (R).Note: Only the centerline shows when youenable manual zoom.

164


Parking Aids

This allows you to get a closer view of anobject behind your vehicle. The zoomedimage keeps the bumper in the image toprovide a reference. The zoom is only activewhile the transmission is in Reverse (R).When you shift the transmission out ofReverse (R), the feature automatically turnsoff and you must enable it to use it usedagain.Selectable settings for this feature are ONand OFF.

Rear Camera DelayWhen shifting the transmission out ofReverse (R) and into any gear other than Park(P), the camera image remains in the displayuntil your vehicle speed reaches 6 mph (10km/h or until you select a radio button.Selectable settings for this feature are ONand OFF. The default setting for the rearcamera delay is OFF.

165


Parking Aids

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONCruise control lets you maintain a set speedwithout keeping your foot on the acceleratorpedal. You can use cruise control when yourvehicle speed is greater than 20 mph(30 km/h).

USING CRUISE CONTROL

WARNINGSDo not use cruise control on windingroads, in heavy traffic or when the roadsurface is slippery. This could result in

loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death.When you are going downhill, yourvehicle speed may increase above theset speed. The system will not apply

the brakes. Change down a gear to assist thesystem in maintaining the set speed. Failureto do so could result in loss of vehicle control,serious injury or death.

Note: Cruise control will disengage if thevehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph(16 km/h) below the set speed while drivinguphill.

E173592

The cruise controls are on the steering wheel.

Switching Cruise Control OnPress and release ON.

E71340

The indicator appears in theinstrument cluster.

Setting the Cruise Speed1. Drive to desired speed.2. Press and release SET+ or SET-.3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.The indicator changes color in the instrumentcluster.

Changing the Set Speed• Press and release Set+ or Set-. When

you select km/h as the displaymeasurement in the information displaythe set speed changes in approximately2 km/h increments. When you select mphas the display measurement in theinformation display the set speedchanges in approximately 1 mphincrements.

• Press and hold Set+ or Set- to increaseor decrease the set speed. Release thecontrol when you reach the desiredspeed.

• Press the accelerator or brake pedal untilyou reach the desired speed. Press andrelease Set+ or Set-.

Note: If you accelerate by pressing theaccelerator pedal, the set speed will notchange. When you release the acceleratorpedal, your vehicle returns to the speed thatyou previously set.

Canceling the Set SpeedPress and release CNCL or tap the brakepedal. The set speed does not erase.

Resuming the Set SpeedPress and release RES.

166


Cruise Control

Switching Cruise Control OffPress and release OFF when the system isin stand by mode or switch the ignition off.Note: You erase the set speed when youswitch the system off.

USING ADAPTIVE CRUISECONTROL (If Equipped)

WARNINGSAlways pay close attention to changingroad conditions when using adaptivecruise control. The system does not

replace attentive driving. Failing to payattention to the road may result in a crash,serious injury or death.

Adaptive cruise control is not a crashwarning or avoidance system.Adaptive cruise control will not detectstationary or slow moving vehiclesbelow 6 mph (10 km/h).Adaptive cruise control does not detectpedestrians or objects in the road.Adaptive cruise control does not detectoncoming vehicles in the same lane.

WARNINGSDo not use the adaptive cruise controlwhen entering or leaving a highway, inheavy traffic or on roads that are

winding, slippery or unpaved.Do not use the system in poor visibility,for example fog, heavy rain, spray orsnow.Do not use adaptive cruise controlwhen towing a trailer that has trailerbrakes. The auto-brake component of

the adaptive cruise control system does notoperate the trailer brakes. Using adaptivecruise control when towing a trailer that hastrailer brakes may result in the loss of vehiclecontrol, which could result in serious injury.

Do not use tire sizes other than thoserecommended because this can affectthe normal operation of the system.

Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehiclecontrol, which could result in serious injury.

Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert, drivesafely and be in control of the vehicle at alltimes.The system adjusts your speed to maintaina proper distance between you and thevehicle in front of you in the same lane. Youcan select from one of four gap settings.

E173593

The adaptive cruise controls are on thesteering wheel.

Setting Adaptive Cruise ControlPress and release ON.

E144529

The indicator appears in theinstrument cluster.

E173594

167


Cruise Control

The current gap setting and SET alsoappears in the instrument cluster.

Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed1. Drive to desired speed.2. Press and release Set+ or Set-.3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.4. The information display will show a green

indicator light, current gap setting anddesired set speed.

E173595

5. A vehicle graphic illuminates if there is avehicle detected in front of you.

Note: When adaptive cruise control is active,the speedometer may vary slightly from theset speed displayed in the information display.

Following a VehicleWARNINGS

When following a vehicle in front of you,your vehicle will not decelerateautomatically to a stop, nor will your

vehicle always decelerate quickly enough toavoid a crash without driver intervention.Always apply the brakes when necessary.Failing to do so may result in a crash, seriousinjury or death.

Adaptive cruise control only warns ofvehicles detected by the radar sensor.In some cases there may be no warning

or a delayed warning. You should alwaysapply the brakes when necessary. Failing todo so may result in a crash, serious injury ordeath.

Note: The brakes may emit a sound whenmodulated by the adaptive cruise controlsystem.When a vehicle ahead of you enters the samelane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the samelane, the vehicle speed adjusts to maintaina preset gap distance. The distance settingis adjustable.The lead vehicle graphic will illuminate.

To help you pass a vehicle in front of you, theadaptive cruise control system may providea small temporary acceleration when youswitch on your left turn signal while followinga lead car.Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap fromthe vehicle ahead until:• the vehicle in front of you accelerates to

a speed above the set speed• the vehicle in front of you moves out of

your lane or out of view• the vehicle speed falls below 16 mph (26

km/h)• a new gap distance is set.The vehicle will apply the brakes to slow thevehicle to maintain a safe distance from thevehicle in front. The maximum braking whichthe system can apply is limited. You canoverride the system by applying the brakes.If the system predicts that its maximumbraking level will not be sufficient, an audiblewarning will sound while the systemcontinues to brake. This is accompanied bya heads-up display; a red warning barilluminating on the windshield. You shouldtake immediate action.

168


Cruise Control

Setting the Gap DistanceNote: It is your responsibility to select a gapappropriate to the driving conditions.

E173593

You can decrease or increase the distancebetween your vehicle and the vehicle in frontby pressing the gap control.

E173595

The selected gap appears in the informationdisplay as shown by the bars in the graphic.Four gap distance settings are available.

Adaptive cruise control, distance between vehicle settings

Dynamic behaviorDistance gapTime gap, secondsGraphic display, bars indic-ated between vehicles

Set speed

yd (m)mph ( km/h)

Sport31 (28)1162 (100)

Normal43 (39)1.4262 (100)

Normal55 (50)1.8362 (100)

Comfort67 (61)2.2462 (100)

169


Cruise Control

Each time you start the vehicle, the systemwill select the last chosen gap for the currentdriver.

Disengaging Adaptive Cruise ControlPress the brake pedal or press CNCL. Thelast set speed will appear in grey.

Overriding Adaptive Cruise ControlWARNING

Whenever the driver is overriding thesystem by pressing the acceleratorpedal, the system will not

automatically apply the brakes to maintainseparation from any vehicle ahead.

You can override the set speed and gapdistance by pressing the accelerator pedal.

E144529

When you override the system, thegreen indicator light illuminatesand the lead vehicle graphic does

not show in the information display.The system will resume operation when yourelease the accelerator pedal. The vehiclespeed will decrease to the set speed, or alower speed if following a slower vehicle.

Changing the Set Speed• Press and release Set+ or Set-. When

you select km/h as the displaymeasurement in the information displaythe set speed changes in approximately2 km/h increments. When you select mphas the display measurement in theinformation display the set speedchanges in approximately 1 mphincrements.

• Press and hold Set+ or Set- to increaseor decrease the set speed. Release thecontrol when you reach the desiredspeed.

• Press the accelerator or brake pedal untilyou reach the desired speed. Press andrelease Set+ or Set-.

The system may apply the brakes to slow thevehicle to the new set speed. The set speeddisplays continuously in the informationdisplay when the system is active.Note: If you accelerate by pressing theaccelerator pedal, the set speed will notchange. When you release the acceleratorpedal, your vehicle returns to the speed thatyou previously set.

Resuming the Set SpeedNote: Only use resume if you are aware of theset speed and intend to return to it.Press and release RES. The vehicle will returnto the previously set speed. The set speedwill display continuously in the informationdisplay while the system is active.

Low Speed Automatic CancellationThe system is not functional at vehiclespeeds below 16 mph (26 km/h). An audiblealarm will sound and the automatic brakingreleases if the vehicle drops below this speed.

Hilly Condition UsageNote: An audible alarm will sound and thesystem will shut down if it is applying brakesfor an extended period of time. This allows thebrakes to cool down. The system will functionnormally again when the brakes have cooleddown.You should select a lower gear position whenthe system is active in situations such asprolonged downhill driving on steep grades,for example in mountainous areas. Thesystem needs additional engine braking inthese situations to reduce the load on thevehicle’s regular brake system to preventthem from overheating.

170


Cruise Control

Switching the System OffNote: The set speed memory erases whenyou switch off the system.Press and release OFF or turn off the ignition.

Detection IssuesWARNING

On rare occasions, detection issues canoccur due to the road infrastructures,for example bridges, tunnels and safety

barriers. In these cases, the system may brakelate or unexpectedly. At all times, you areresponsible for controlling your vehicle,supervising the system and intervening, ifrequired.

The radar sensor has a limited field of vision.It may not detect vehicles at all or detect avehicle later than expected in somesituations. The lead vehicle graphic will notilluminate if the system does not detect avehicle in front of you.

E71621

Detection issues can occur:

When driving on a different linethan the vehicle in front.

A

With vehicles that edge into yourlane. The system can only detectthese vehicles once they move fullyinto your lane.

B

There may be issues with thedetection of vehicles in front whendriving into and coming out of abend or curve in the road.

C

In these cases the system may brake late orunexpectedly. The driver should stay alertand intervene when necessary.If something hits the front end of your vehicleor damage occurs, the radar-sensing zonemay change. This could cause missed or falsevehicle detections. See an authorized dealerto have the radar checked for propercoverage and operation.

171


Cruise Control

Blocked Sensor

E145632

A message displays if something obstructsthe radar signals from the sensor. The sensoris located behind a fascia cover near thedriver side of the lower grille. The systemcannot detect a vehicle ahead and will notfunction when something obstructs the radarsignals. The following table lists possiblecauses and actions for this messagedisplaying.

ActionCause

Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the objectcausing the obstruction.

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way.

Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detectthat it is free from obstruction.

The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remainsin the display.

Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detectany vehicles ahead.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.

Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detectany vehicles ahead.

Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface of the road may interferewith the radar signals.

Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise control.You are in a desert or remote area with no other vehicles and noroadside objects.

172


Cruise Control

Due to the nature of radar technology, it ispossible to get a blockage warning and notbe blocked. This can happen, for example,when driving in sparse rural or desertenvironments. A false blocked condition willeither self clear or clear after a key cycle.

Switching to Normal Cruise ControlWARNING

Normal cruise control will not brake dueto slower vehicles. Always be aware ofwhich mode you have selected and

apply the brakes when necessary.

You can manually change from adaptivecruise control to normal cruise controlthrough the information display.

E71340

The cruise control indicator lightreplaces the adaptive cruisecontrol indicator light if you select

normal cruise control.

The gap setting will not display, the systemwill not automatically respond to leadvehicles and automatic braking will notactivate. The system defaults to adaptivecruise control when you start the vehicle.

173


Cruise Control

DRIVER ALERT (If Equipped)

WARNINGThe driver alert system is designed toaid you. It is not intended to replaceyour attention and judgment. You are

still responsible to drive with due care andattention.

Note: The system will store the on or offsetting in the information display menuthrough ignition cycles.Note: If enabled in the menu, the system willbe active at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h).When below the activation speed, theinformation display will inform you that thesystem is unavailable.Note: The system works as long as one lanemarking can be detected by the camera.Note: If the camera is blocked or if thewindshield is damaged, the system may notfunction.Note: The system may not be available inpoor weather or other low visibility conditions.The system automatically monitors yourdriving behavior using various inputs includingthe front camera sensor.

If the system detects that your drivingalertness is reduced below a certainthreshold, the system will alert you using achime and a message in the informationdisplay.

Using Driver AlertSwitching the system on and offYou may switch the system on or off throughthe information display by selecting Settingsthen Driver Assist then Driver Alert in themenu. When activated, the system willmonitor your alertness level based upon yourdriving behavior in relation to the lanemarkings, and other factors.

System WarningsNote: The system will not issue warningsbelow approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).The warning system is in two stages. At firstthe system issues a temporary warning thatyou need to take a rest. This message willonly appear for a short time. If the systemdetects further reduction in driving alertness,another warning may be issued which willremain in the information display for a longertime. Press OK on the steering wheel controlto clear the warning.

System DisplayWhen active the system will runautomatically in the background and onlyissue a warning if required. You can view thestatus at any time using the informationdisplay. See General Information (page89).The alertness level is shown by six steps in acolored bar.

E131358

The current assessment of your alertness iswithin a typical range.

E131359

174


Driving Aids

The current assessment of your alertnessindicates that you should rest as soon assafely possible.The status bar will travel from left to right asthe calculated alertness level decreases. Asthe rest icon is approached the color turnsfrom green to yellow to red. The yellowposition indicates the first warning is activeand the red position indicates the secondwarning is active.Note: If you have recently received a warning;you should consider resting, even if the currentassessment is within the typical range.Note: If the camera sensor cannot track theroad lane markings or if your vehicle speeddrops below approximately 40 mph(64 km/h), the alertness level will change togrey for a short time and the informationdisplay will inform you that the system isunavailable.

Resetting the SystemYou can reset the system by either:• Switching the ignition off and on.• Stopping the vehicle and then opening

and closing the driver’s door.

LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If Equipped)

WARNINGThe system is designed to aid the driver.It is not intended to replace yourattention and judgment. You are still

responsible to drive with due care andattention.

Note: The system works above 40 mph(64 km/h).Note: The system works as long as thecamera can detect one lane marking.Note: The system may not function if thecamera is blocked or there is damage to thewindshield.Note: When Aid mode is on and the systemdetects no steering activity for a short period,the system will alert you to put your hands onthe steering wheel. The system may detect alight grip or touch on the steering wheel ashands off driving.

The system notifies you to stay in your lanethrough the steering system and theinstrument cluster display when the frontcamera detects an unintentional drift out ofyour lane is likely to occur. The systemautomatically detects and tracks the roadlane markings using a camera mountedbehind the interior rear view mirror.

Switching the System On and OffNote: The system on or off setting is storeduntil it is manually changed, unless a MyKey®is detected. If the system detects a MyKey®,it defaults to on and the mode is set to alert.Note: If a MyKey® is detected, pressing thebutton will not affect the on or off status ofthe system. You can only change the modeand intensity settings.

E173233

Press the button located on thecenter console to switch thesystem on or off.

175


Driving Aids

System SettingsThe system has one standard feature settingand one optional setting menu available. Toview or adjust the settings, See GeneralInformation (page 89). The system storesthe last known selection for each of thesesettings. You do not need to readjust yoursettings each time you turn on the system.Mode: This setting allows you to select whichof the system features you can enable.

E165515

Alert only – Provides a steering wheelvibration when an unintended lane departureis detected.

E165516

Aid only – Provides a steering wheel vibrationwhen the system detects an unintended lanedeparture.

E165517

AlertAAidB

Alert + Aid – Provides an assistance steeringtorque input toward the lane center. If yourvehicle continues drifting out of the lane, thesystem provides a steering wheel vibration.Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrategeneral zone coverage. They do not provideexact zone parameters.Intensity: This setting affects the intensityof the steering wheel vibration used for thealert and alert + aid modes. This setting doesnot affect the aid mode.

176


Driving Aids

• Low• Medium• High

System Display

E144813

When you switch on the system,an overhead graphic of a vehiclewith lane markings will display in

the information display.

E173234

If you select aid mode when youswitch on the system, arrows willbe displayed with lane markings.

When you switch off the system, the lanemarking graphics will not display.Note: The overhead vehicle graphic may stillbe displayed if adaptive cruise control isenabled.

While the system is on, the color of the lanemarkings will change to indicate the systemstatus.Gray: Indicates that the system is temporarilyunable to provide a warning or interventionon the indicated side(s). This may bebecause:• Your vehicle is under the activation speed.• Your turn indicator is active.• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.• The road has no or poor lane markings in

the camera field-of-view.• The camera is obscured or unable to

detect the lane markings due toenvironmental conditions (significant sunangles, shadows, snow, heavy rain, fog),traffic conditions (following a largevehicle that is blocking or shadowing thelane), or vehicle conditions (poorheadlamp illumination).

See Troubleshooting for additionalinformation.Green: Indicates that the system is availableor ready to provide a warning or intervention,on the indicated side(s).Yellow: Indicates that the system is providingor has just provided a lane keeping aidintervention.Red: Indicates that the system is providingor has just provided a lane keeping alertwarning.You can temporarily disable the system atany time by doing the following• Quick braking.• Fast acceleration.• Using your direction indicator.• Evasive steering maneuver.

Troubleshooting

Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?

Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature

Sun is shining directly into the camera lens

Quick intentional lane change

177


Driving Aids

Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?

Staying too close to the lane marking

Driving at high speeds in curves

Previous feature activation happened within the last one second

Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones)

Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa

Sudden offset in lane markings

ABS or AdvanceTrac activation

Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield

Driving too close to the vehicle in front of you

Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa

Standing water on the road

Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads)

Lane width too narrow or too wide

Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement

Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads

Vehicle accessories such as snow plows

178


Driving Aids

Why does the vehicle not come back into the middle of the lane always, as expected, in the Aid or Aid + Alert mode?

High cross winds

Large road crown

Rough roads, grooves, shoulder drop-offs

Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure

If the tires have been exchanged (including snow tires), or the suspension has been modified

Vehicle accessories such as snow plows or trailers

BLIND SPOT INFORMATIONSYSTEM

WARNINGTo help avoid injuries, NEVER use theBlind Spot Information System as areplacement for using the interior and

exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulderbefore changing lanes. The Blind SpotInformation System is not a replacement forcareful driving.

A

A

E124788

The Blind Spot Information System isdesigned to aid you in detecting vehicles thatmay have entered the blind spot zone (A).The detection area is on both sides of yourvehicle, extending rearward from the exteriormirrors to approximately 13 ft (4 m) beyondthe bumper. The system is designed to alertyou if certain vehicles enter the blind spotzone while driving.Note: The Blind Spot Information Systemdoes not prevent contact with other vehiclesor objects; nor detect parked vehicles, people,animals or infrastructure (fences, guardrails,trees). It’s only designed to alert you tovehicles in the blind spot zones.

179


Driving Aids

Note: When a vehicle passes quickly throughthe blind spot zone, typically fewer than twoseconds, the system does not trigger.

Using the SystemThe Blind Spot Information System turns onwhen you start the engine and you drive yourvehicle forward above 5 mph (8 km/h).For automatic transmissions, the Blind SpotInformation System remains on while thetransmission is in drive (D). If shifted intoreverse (R) or park (P) the Blind SpotInformation System turns off. Once shiftedback into drive (D), the Blind SpotInformation System turns back on when youdrive your vehicle above 5 mph (8 km/h).For manual transmissions, the Blind SpotInformation System is on for all gears exceptthe reverse (R).Note: The Blind Spot Information Systemdoes not function in reverse (R) or park (P).

System Lights and Messages

E142442

The Blind Spot Information Systemilluminates an amber alert indicator in theoutside mirror on the side of your vehicle theapproaching vehicle is coming from.The alert indicator dims when the systemdetects nighttime darkness.

System Sensor Blockage

WARNINGTo help avoid injuries, NEVER use theBlind Spot Information System as areplacement for using the interior and

exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulderbefore changing lanes. The Blind SpotInformation System is not a replacement forcareful driving.

180


Driving Aids

E205199

The system uses radar sensors that arelocated behind the bumper fascia on eachside of your vehicle. Any dirt, mud and snowin front of the sensors and/or driving in heavyrain can cause system degradation. Also,other types of obstructions in front of thesensor can cause system degradation. Thisis referred to as a ‘blocked’ condition.Note: Do not apply bumper stickers and/orrepair compound to these areas, this can causedegraded system performance.If the system detects a degradedperformance condition, a message warningof a blocked sensor will appear in theinformation display. Also the system alertindicators will remain ON and the system willno longer provide any vehicle warnings. Youcan clear the information display warning butthe alert indicators will remain illuminated.A "blocked" condition can be cleared in twoways:• After the blockage in front of the sensors

is removed or the rainfall/snowfall ratedecreases or stops, drive for a fewminutes in traffic to allow the sensors todetect passing vehicles.

• By cycling the ignition from ON to OFFand then back ON.

Note: When towing a trailer, the sensors maydetect the trailer thus causing a false alert. Itmay be desirable to turn the Blind SpotInformation System off if the false alertsbecome annoying.

System ErrorsIf the system senses a problem with the leftor right sensor, the telltale will illuminate anda message will appear in the informationdisplay. See Information Messages (page95).

Switching the System Off and OnYou can temporarily switch the Blind SpotInformation System off in the informationdisplay. See General Information (page89). When the Blind Spot InformationSystem switches off, you will not receivealerts and the information display shows asystem off message. The telltale in thecluster also illuminates. When you switch theBlind Spot Information System on or off, thealert indicators flash twice.Note: The system switches back on every timeyou start your vehicle.

181


Driving Aids

You can also have the Blind Spot InformationSystem switched off permanently at anauthorized dealer. Once switched offpermanently, the system can only beswitched back on at an authorized dealer.

CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT

WARNINGTo help avoid personal injury, NEVERuse the Cross Traffic Alert system as areplacement for using the interior and

exterior mirrors and looking over yourshoulder before backing out of a parkingspace. Cross Traffic Alert is not areplacement for careful driving.

Cross Traffic Alert is designed to warn you ofvehicles approaching from the sides whenthe transmission is in reverse (R).

Using the SystemCross Traffic Alert turns on when you startthe engine and you shift into reverse (R).Once shifted out of reverse (R), Cross TrafficAlert turns off.Note: Cross Traffic Alert only functions whileyour transmission is in reverse (R).Cross Traffic Alert is designed to alert thedriver of certain collision risks. Coveragedecreases when the sensors are partially,mostly or fully obstructed. Reversing slowlyhelps increase the coverage area andeffectiveness.

182


Driving Aids

E142440

In this first example, the left sensor is onlypartially obstructed; zone coverage to theright is nearly maximized.

183


Driving Aids

E142441

Zone coverage also decreases when parkingat shallow angles. Here, the left sensor ismostly obstructed; zone coverage on thatside is severely limited.

184


Driving Aids

System Lights, Messages andAudible Alerts

E142442

The Cross Traffic Alert illuminates an amberalert indicator in the outside mirror on theside of your vehicle the approaching vehicleis coming from. Cross Traffic Alert alsosounds an audible alert and a messageappears in the information display indicatinga vehicle is coming from the right or left.Cross Traffic Alert works with the reversesensing system that sounds its own series oftones. See Rear Parking Aid (page 156). E205199

The system uses radar sensors that arelocated behind the bumper fascia on eachside of your vehicle. Do not allow mud, snowor bumper stickers to obstruct these areas,this can cause degraded systemperformance. See Blind Spot InformationSystem (page 179). If the Blind SpotInformation System is blocked, Cross TrafficAlert is also blocked. A correspondingmessage appears in the information displayas soon as you shift the transmission intoreverse (R).

System LimitationsCross Traffic Alert has its limitations;situations such as severe weather conditionsor debris build-up on the sensor area maylimit vehicle detection.The following are other situations that maylimit the Cross Traffic Alert performance:• Stationary or slow moving vehicles.• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.• Oncoming vehicles in the same lame.• Severe weather conditions.• Debris build-up near or around the

sensor(s).• Small distance to the vehicle ahead.

185


Driving Aids

Certain conditions may reduce the visibilityof the warning lamp; therefore, it isrecommended to keep the audible warningon.If the front end of the vehicle is hit ordamaged, the radar sensing zone may bealtered causing missed or false collisionwarnings. See your authorized dealer to haveyour collision warning radar checked forproper coverage and operation.

False AlertsNote: When towing a trailer, the sensors maydetect the trailer thus causing a false alert. Itmay be desirable to turn the Blind SpotInformation System off if the false alertsbecome annoying.There may be certain instances when thereis a false alert by the Cross Traffic Alertsystem that illuminates the alert indicatorwith no vehicle in the coverage zone. Someamount of false alerts are normal; they aretemporary and self-correct.

System ErrorsIf Cross Traffic Alert senses a problem withthe left or right sensor a message will appearin the information display. See GeneralInformation (page 89).

Switching the System Off and OnYou can temporarily switch Cross TrafficAlert off in the information display. SeeGeneral Information (page 89). When youswitch Cross Traffic Alert off, you will notreceive alerts and the information display willdisplay a system off message.Note: The Cross Traffic Alert switches onwhenever the ignition is switched on and readyto provide appropriate alerts when thetransmission is in reverse (R). Cross TrafficAlert will not remember the last selected onor off setting.You can also have Cross Traffic Alertswitched off permanently at an authorizeddealer. Once switched off permanently, thesystem can only be switched back on at anauthorized dealer.

STEERINGElectric Power Steering

WARNINGSThe electric power steering system hasdiagnostic checks that continuouslymonitor the system. If a fault is

detected, a message displays in theinformation display. Stop your vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so. Switch the ignitionoff. After at least 10 seconds, switch theignition on and watch the information displayfor a steering system warning message. If asteering system warning message returns,have the system checked by an authorizeddealer.

If the system detects an error, you maynot feel a difference in the steering,however a serious condition may exist.

Obtain immediate service from an authorizeddealer, failure to do so may result in loss ofsteering control.

Your vehicle has an electric power steeringsystem. There is no fluid reservoir. Nomaintenance is required.

186


Driving Aids

If your vehicle loses electrical power whileyou are driving, electric power steeringassistance is lost. The steering system stilloperates and you can steer your vehiclemanually. Manually steering your vehiclerequires more effort.Extreme continuous steering may increasethe effort required for you to steer yourvehicle. This increased effort preventsoverheating and permanent damage to thesteering system. You do not lose the abilityto steer your vehicle manually. Typicalsteering and driving maneuvers allow thesystem to cool and return to normaloperation.

Steering TipsIf the steering wanders or pulls, check for:• Correct tire pressures.• Uneven tire wear.• Loose or worn suspension components.• Loose or worn steering components.• Improper vehicle alignment.Note: A high crown in the road or highcrosswinds may also make the steering seemto wander or pull.

Adaptive LearningThe electronic power steering systemadaptive learning helps correct roadirregularities and improves overall handlingand steering feel. It communicates with thebrake system to help operate advancedstability control and accident avoidancesystems. Additionally, whenever the batteryis disconnected or a new battery installed,you must drive your vehicle a short distancebefore the system relearns the strategy andreactivates all systems.

COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM(If Equipped)

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONWARNINGS

This system is designed to be asupplementary driving aid. It is notintended to replace the driver’s

attention, and judgment, or the need to applythe brakes. This system does NOT activatethe brakes automatically. Failure to press thebrake pedal to activate the brakes may resultin a collision.

WARNINGSThe collision warning system withbrake support cannot help prevent allcollisions. Do not rely on this system to

replace driver judgment and the need tomaintain distance and speed.

Note: The system does not detect, warn orrespond to potential collisions with vehiclesto the rear or sides of the vehicle.Note: The collision warning system is activeat speeds above approximately 5 mph(8 km/h).

E156130

This system is designed to alert the driver ofcertain collision risks. A radar detects if yourvehicle is rapidly approaching another vehicletraveling in the same direction as yours.

187


Driving Aids

E156131

If it is, a red warning light illuminates and anaudible warning chime sounds.The brake support system assists the driverin reducing the collision speed by chargingthe brakes. If the risk of collision furtherincreases after the warning light illuminates,the brake support prepares the brake systemfor rapid braking. This may be apparent tothe driver. The system does not automaticallyactivate the brakes but, if the brake pedal ispressed, full force braking is applied even ifthe brake pedal is lightly pressed.

Using the Collision Warning System

WARNINGThe collision warning system’s brakesupport can only help reduce the speedat which a collision occurs if the driver

applies the vehicle’s brakes. The brake pedalmust be pressed just like any typical brakingsituation.

The warning system sensitivity can beadjusted to one of three possible settings byusing the information display control. SeeGeneral Information (page 89).Note: If collision warnings are perceived asbeing too frequent or disturbing then thewarning sensitivity can be reduced, though themanufacturer recommends using the highestsensitivity setting where possible. Settinglower sensitivity would lead to fewer and latersystem warnings. See General Information(page 89).

Blocked Sensors

E145632

If a message regarding a blocked sensorappears in the information display, the radarsignals from the sensor have beenobstructed. The sensors are located behinda fascia cover near the driver side of the lowergrille. When the sensors are obstructed, avehicle ahead cannot be detected and thecollision warning system does not function.The following table lists possible causes andactions for this message being displayed.

188


Driving Aids

ActionCause

Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the objectcausing the obstruction

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way

Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detectthat it is no longer obstructed

The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remainsin the display

The collision warning system is temporarily disabled. Collision warningshould automatically reactivate a short time after the weather condi-

tions improve

Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is interfering with the radar signals

The collision warning system is temporarily disabled. Collision warningshould automatically reactivate a short time after the weather condi-

tions improve

Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface of the road may interferewith the radar signals

System Limitations

WARNINGThe collision warning system’s brakesupport can only help reduce the speedat which a collision occurs if the driver

applies the vehicle’s brakes. The brake pedalmust be pressed just like any typical brakingsituation.

Due to the nature of radar technology, theremay be certain instances where vehicles donot provide a collision warning. These include:

• Stationary vehicles or vehicles movingbelow 6 mph (10 km/h).

• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.• Severe weather conditions (see blocked

sensor section).• Debris build-up on the grille near the

headlamps (see blocked sensor section).• Small distance to vehicle ahead.• Steering wheel and pedal movements

are large (very active driving style).

If the front end of the vehicle is hit ordamaged, the radar sensing zone may bealtered causing missed or false collisionwarnings. See your authorized dealer to haveyour collision warning radar checked forproper coverage and operation.

189


Driving Aids

DRIVE CONTROLLINCOLN DRIVE CONTROLLincoln Drive Control delivers the Lincolndriving experience through a suite ofsophisticated electronic vehicle systems.These systems continuously monitor yourdriving inputs and the road conditions tooptimize ride comfort, steering, handling,powertrain response and sound. You canpreset your preferences for these systemswithin the information display. Lincoln DriveControl will respond to your preferencesbased on what gear position you select. Thisprovides a single location to control multiplesystems performance settings.Lincoln Drive Control consists of the followingsystems:• Continuously controlled damping

dynamically adjusts the shock absorbersstiffness in real time to match the roadsurface and driver inputs. This systemcontinuously monitors your vehicle’smotion (roll, pitch, bounce), suspensionposition, load, speed, road conditions, andsteering to adjust the suspensiondamping for optimal vehicle control.

• Electronically power-assisted steeringadjusts steering effort and feel based onyour vehicle speed and your inputs.

• Active noise control utilizes your vehicleelectronics to enhance the acousticexperience.

• Electronic stability control and tractioncontrol maintain your vehicle control inadverse conditions or high performancedriving.

• Electronic throttle control enhances thepowertrain response to your inputs.

Using Lincoln Drive ControlYou can configure which of the Drive Controlmodes are active when your vehicle is in drive(D) or in sport (S). The configuration remainsactive until modified from the main menu onthe information display.

These systems have a range of modes whichyou can choose from in order to customizeyour ideal driving experience:• Comfort – Provides a more relaxed

driving experience, maximizing comfort.Your steering effort decreases and thesuspension movement is more fluid.Comfort mode is ideal when you desireenhanced traveling comfort.

• Normal – Delivers a balancedcombination of comfortable, controlledride and confident handling. This modeprovides an engaging drive experienceand a direct connection to the roadwithout sacrificing any of the composuredemanded from a luxury vehicle.

• Sport – Provides a sportier drivingexperience. The suspension stiffens, withan emphasis on handling and control. Theengine responds more directly to yourinputs and takes on a more powerfultone. Sport mode is ideal for use duringmore spirited driving.

You can change your vehicle's Drive Controlsettings from the menu on the display screen.See Information Messages (page 95).Note: Not all settings may be available.

190


Driving Aids

Note: Lincoln Drive Control has diagnosticchecks that continuously monitor the systemto ensure proper operation. Certain types ofsystem errors will gray out the mode selectionswithin the information display, preventing youfrom changing states when the gear positionis changed. Other types of errors produce atemporary message in the information display.See Information Messages (page 95). Ifeither condition persists for multiple key cycles,have your vehicle checked by an authorizeddealer.

191


Driving Aids

LOAD LIMIT

Vehicle Loading - with andwithout a TrailerThis section will guide you in theproper loading of your vehicle, traileror both, to keep your loaded vehicleweight within its design ratingcapability, with or without a trailer.

Properly loading your vehicle willprovide maximum return of vehicledesign performance. Before loadingyour vehicle, familiarize yourself withthe following terms for determiningyour vehicle’s weight ratings, withor without a trailer, from thevehicle’s Tire Label or SafetyCompliance Certification Label:

Base Curb Weight - is the weightof the vehicle including full fluidsand all standard equipment. It doesnot include passengers, cargo, oroptional equipment.Vehicle Curb Weight - is theweight of your new vehicle when youpicked it up from your authorizeddealer plus any aftermarketequipment.

E143816

PAYLOAD

Payload - is the combined weightof cargo and passengers that thevehicle is carrying. The maximumpayload for your vehicle can befound on the Tire Label on theB-Pillar or the edge of the driver

door (vehicles exported outside theUS and Canada may not have a TireLabel). Look for “THE COMBINEDWEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS ANDCARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEEDXXX kg OR XXX lb.” for maximum

192


Load Carrying

payload. The payload listed on theTire Label is the maximum payloadfor the vehicle as built by theassembly plant. If you install anyaftermarket or authorized-dealerinstalled equipment on the vehicle,you must subtract the weight of theequipment from the payload listedon the Tire Label in order todetermine the new payload.

WARNINGThe appropriate loadingcapacity of your vehicle can be

limited either by volume capacity(how much space is available) or bypayload capacity (how much weightthe vehicle should carry). Once youhave reached the maximum payloadof your vehicle, do not add morecargo, even if there is spaceavailable. Overloading or improperlyloading your vehicle can contributeto loss of vehicle control and vehiclerollover.

Example only:

E210944

E210945

193


Load Carrying

E143817

CARGO

Cargo Weight - includes all weightadded to the Base Curb Weight,including cargo and optionalequipment. When towing, trailertongue load or king pin weight isalso part of cargo weight.GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - is thetotal weight placed on each axle(front and rear) including vehiclecurb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross Axle WeightRating) - is the maximumallowable weight that can be carriedby a single axle (front or rear). Thesenumbers are shown on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label. Thelabel shall be affixed to either the

door hinge pillar, door-latch post, orthe door edge that meets thedoor-latch post, next to the driver'sseating position. The total load oneach axle must never exceed itsGross Axle Weight Rating.Note: For trailer towing informationrefer to the RV and Trailer TowingGuide available at an authorizeddealer.

194


Load Carrying

E143818

GVW

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - isthe Vehicle Curb Weight, plus cargo,plus passengers.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) - is the maximumallowable weight of the fully loadedvehicle (including all options,equipment, passengers and cargo).It is shown on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label. The

label shall be affixed to either thedoor hinge pillar, door-latch post, orthe door edge that meets thedoor-latch post, next to the driver'sseating position. The Gross VehicleWeight must never exceed theGross Vehicle Weight Rating.

195


Load Carrying

Example only:

E198828

196


Load Carrying

WARNINGExceeding the SafetyCompliance Certification Label

vehicle weight rating limits couldresult in substandard vehiclehandling or performance, engine,transmission and/or structuraldamage, serious damage to thevehicle, loss of control and personalinjury.

E143819

GCW GVW

GCW (Gross Combined Weight)- is the Gross Vehicle Weight plusthe weight of the fully loaded trailer.

GCWR (Gross Combined WeightRating) - is the maximumallowable weight of the vehicle andthe loaded trailer, including all cargoand passengers, that the vehicle canhandle without risking damage.(Important: The towing vehicle’sbraking system is rated for operation

at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, notat Gross Combined Weight Rating.)Separate functional brakes shouldbe used for safe control of towedvehicles and for trailers where theGross Combined Weight of the

197


Load Carrying

towing vehicle plus the trailerexceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating of the towing vehicle. TheGross Combined Weight mustnever exceed the GrossCombined Weight Rating.Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight- is the highest possible weight of afully loaded trailer the vehicle cantow. It assumes a vehicle withmandatory options, driver and frontpassenger weight (150 pounds [68kilograms] each), no cargo weight(internal or external) and a tongueload of 10–15% (conventionaltrailer) or king pin weight of 15–25%(fifth wheel trailer). Consult anauthorized dealer (or the RV andTrailer Towing Guide available at anauthorized dealer) for more detailedinformation.Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel KingPin Weight - refers to the amountof the weight that a trailer pushesdown on a trailer hitch.

Examples: For a 5000 pound(2268 kilogram) conventionaltrailer, multiply 5000 by 0.10 and0.15 to obtain a proper tongue loadrange of 500 to 750 pounds (227 to340 kilograms). For an 11500 pound(5216 kilogram) fifth wheel trailer,multiply by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtaina proper king pin load range of 1725to 2875 pounds (782 to 1304kilograms).

WARNINGSDo not exceed the GVWR or theGAWR specified on the Safety

Compliance Certification Label.Do not use replacement tireswith lower load carrying

capacities than the original tiresbecause they may lower thevehicle’s GVWR and GAWRlimitations. Replacement tires witha higher limit than the original tiresdo not increase the GVWR andGAWR limitations.

WARNINGSExceeding any vehicle weightrating limitation could result in

serious damage to the vehicleand/or personal injury.

Steps for determining the correctload limit:1. Locate the statement "The

combined weight of occupantsand cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX lb." on yourvehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lb.

198


Load Carrying

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the “XXX” amountequals 1,400 lb. and there will befive 150 lb. passengers in yourvehicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacityis 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lb.)

5. Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo beingloaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacityof your vehicle.

The following gives you a fewexamples on how to calculate theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity:*Suppose your vehicle has a1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargoand luggage capacity. You decideto go golfing. Is there enough loadcapacity to carry you, four of yourfriends and all the golf bags? Youand four friends average 220pounds (99 kilograms) each andthe golf bags weigh approximately30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.The calculation would be: 1400 - (5x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150= 150 pounds. Yes, you have enoughload capacity in your vehicle totransport four friends and your golfbags. In metric units, the calculationwould be: 635 kilograms - (5 x 99kilograms) - (5 x 13.5 kilograms) =635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.

*Suppose your vehicle has a1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargoand luggage capacity. You and oneof your friends decide to pick upcement from the local homeimprovement store to finish thatpatio you have been planning for thepast two years. Measuring the insideof the vehicle with the rear seatfolded down, you have room fortwelve 100-pound (45-kilogram)bags of cement. Do you haveenough load capacity to transportthe cement to your home? If youand your friend each weigh 220pounds (99 kilograms), thecalculation would be: 1400 - (2 x220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do nothave enough cargo capacity to carrythat much weight. In metric units,the calculation would be: 635kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (12x 45 kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 540 =-103 kilograms. You will need toreduce the load weight by at least240 pounds (104 kilograms). If youremove three 100-pound

199


Load Carrying

(45-kilogram) cement bags, thenthe load calculation would be: 1400- (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440- 900 = 60 pounds. Now you havethe load capacity to transport thecement and your friend home. Inmetric units, the calculation wouldbe: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.The above calculations also assumethat the loads are positioned in yourvehicle in a manner that does notoverload the Front or the Rear GrossAxle Weight Rating specified foryour vehicle on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label. Thelabel shall be affixed to either thedoor hinge pillar, door-latch post, orthe door edge that meets thedoor-latch post, next to the driver'sseating position.

200


Load Carrying

TOWING A TRAILER

WARNINGSDo not exceed the GVWR or theGAWR specified on the

certification label.Towing trailers beyond themaximum recommended gross

trailer weight exceeds the limit ofyour vehicle and could result inengine damage, transmissiondamage, structural damage, loss ofvehicle control, vehicle rollover andpersonal injury.

Note: There may be electrical itemssuch as fuses or relays that can affecttrailer towing operation. See Fuses(page 223).The load capacity of your vehicle isdesignated by weight not volume.You may not necessarily be able touse all available space when loadingyour vehicle or trailer.

Towing a trailer places extra loadon the engine, transmission, axle,brakes, tires, and suspension.Inspect these components before,during and after towing.Load PlacementTo help minimize how trailermovement affects the vehicle whendriving:• Load the heaviest items closest

to the trailer floor.• Load the heaviest items in the

center of the left and right sidetrailer tires.

• Load the heaviest items abovethe trailer axles or just slightlyforward toward the trailertongue. Do not allow the finaltrailer tongue weight to go aboveor below 10-15% of the loadedtrailer weight.

• Select a ball mount with thecorrect rise or drop. When boththe loaded vehicle and trailer areconnected, the trailer frameshould be level, or slightly angleddown toward the vehicle, whenviewed from the side.

When driving with a trailer orpayload, a slight takeoff vibration orshudder may be present due to theincreased payload weight.Additional information regardingproper trailer loading and settingyour vehicle up for towing is locatedin the Load Carrying chapter. SeeLoad Limit (page 192).

201


Towing

You can also find information in theRV & Trailer Towing Guide

available at your authorized dealer,or online.

RV & Trailer Towing Guide Onlinehttp://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website

RECOMMENDED TOWINGWEIGHTS

Note: Do not exceed the trailerweight for your vehicle configurationlisted in the chart below.Note: Be sure to take intoconsideration trailer frontal area. Donot exceed 12 feet2 (1.11 meters2)trailer frontal area.

Note: For high altitude operation,reduce the gross combined weightby 2% per 1000 feet (300 meters)starting at the 1000 foot (300 meter)elevation point.Note: Certain states require electrictrailer brakes for trailers over aspecified weight. Be sure to checkstate regulations for this specifiedweight. The maximum trailer weightslisted may be limited to this specifiedweight, as the vehicle’s electricalsystem may not include the wiringconnector needed to use electrictrailer brakes.

Your vehicle may tow a Class I trailerprovided the maximum trailerweight is less than or equal to themaximum trailer weight listed foryour vehicle configuration on thefollowing chart. If your vehicle isequipped with 3.7L engine, it cannottow a trailer.

202


Towing

Maximum trailer weightPowertrainNo trailer towing permitted3.7L TiVCT front-wheel driveNo trailer towing permitted3.7L TiVCT all-wheel drive

1000 lb (454 kg)3.5L GTDI all-wheel drive

203


Towing

ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKSFollow these guidelines for safe towing:• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your

vehicle at least 1000 miles (1600kilometers).

• Consult your local motor vehicle laws fortowing a trailer.

• See the instructions included with towingaccessories for the proper installationand adjustment specifications.

• Service your vehicle more frequently ifyou tow a trailer. See your scheduledmaintenance information.

• If you use a rental trailer, follow theinstructions the rental agency gives you.

You can find information on loadspecification terms found on the tire labeland Safety Compliance label as well asinstructions on calculating your vehicle's loadin the Load Carrying chapter. See Load Limit(page 192).Remember to account for the trailer tongueweight as part of your vehicle load whencalculating the total vehicle weight.

HitchesDo not use a hitch that either clamps ontothe bumper or attaches to the axle.Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of thetotal trailer weight is on the tongue.

Safety ChainsNote: Never attach safety chains to thebumper.Always connect the safety chains to the hookretainers of your vehicle hitch.To connect the safety chains, cross themunder the trailer tongue and allow enoughslack for turning tight corners. Do not allowthe chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesWARNING

Do not connect a trailer's hydraulicbrake system directly to your vehicle'sbrake system. Your vehicle may not

have enough braking power and your chancesof having a collision greatly increase.

Electric brakes and manual, automatic orsurge-type trailer brakes are safe if you installthem properly and adjust them to themanufacturer's specifications. The trailerbrakes must meet local and federalregulations.The rating for the tow vehicle's brakingsystem operation is at the gross vehicleweight rating, not the gross combinedweight rating.

Trailer LampsWARNING

Never connect any trailer lamp wiringto the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; thismay damage the electrical system

resulting in fire. Contact your authorizeddealer as soon as possible for assistance inproper trailer tow wiring installation.Additional electrical equipment may berequired.

Trailer lamps are required on most towedvehicles. Make sure all running lights, brakelights, turn signals and hazard lights areworking.

204


Towing

Before Towing a TrailerPractice turning, stopping and backing up toget the feel of your vehicle-trailercombination before starting on a trip. Whenturning, make wider turns so the trailerwheels clear curbs and other obstacles.

When Towing a Trailer• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113

km/h) during the first 500 miles (800kilometers).

• Do not make full-throttle starts.• Check your hitch, electrical connections

and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly afteryou have traveled 50 miles (80kilometers).

• When stopped in congested or heavytraffic during hot weather, place thegearshift in position P to aid engine andtransmission cooling and to help A/Cperformance.

• Turn off the speed control with heavyloads or in hilly terrain. The speed controlmay turn off automatically when you aretowing on long, steep grades.

• Shift to a lower gear when driving downa long or steep hill. Do not apply thebrakes continuously, as they mayoverheat and become less effective.

• If your transmission is equipped with aGrade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, usethis feature when towing. This providesengine braking and helps eliminateexcessive transmission shifting foroptimum fuel economy and transmissioncooling.

• Allow more distance for stopping with atrailer attached. Anticipate stops andbrake gradually.

• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if youmust park on a grade:

1. Turn the steering wheel to point yourvehicle tires away from traffic flow.

2. Set your vehicle parking brake.3. Place the automatic transmission in

position P.4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of

the trailer wheels. (Chocks not includedwith vehicle.)

Launching or Retrieving a Boat orPersonal Watercraft (PWC)Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailerbefore backing the trailer into the water.Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer afterremoving the trailer from the water.

When backing down a ramp during boatlaunching or retrieval:• Do not allow the static water level to rise

above the bottom edge of the rearbumper.

• Do not allow waves to break higher than6 inches (15 centimeters) above thebottom edge of the rear bumper.

Exceeding these limits may allow water toenter vehicle components:• Causing internal damage to the

components.• Affecting driveability, emissions, and

reliability.Any time the rear axle submerges in water,replace the rear axle lubricant. Water maycontaminate the rear axle lubricant, which isnot a normal maintenance inspection itemunless there is a possibility of a leak or otheraxle repair is required.

205


Towing

TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE

E143886

If you need to have your vehicle towed,contact a professional towing service or, ifyou are a member of a roadside assistanceprogram, your roadside assistance serviceprovider.We recommend the use of a wheel lift anddollies or flatbed equipment to tow yourvehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. FordMotor Company has not approved a slingbelttowing procedure. Vehicle damage may occurif towed incorrectly, or by any other means.Ford Motor Company produces a towingmanual for all authorized tow truck operators.Have your tow truck operator refer to thismanual for proper hook-up and towingprocedures for your vehicle.It is acceptable to have your front-wheel drivevehicle towed from the front if using properwheel lift equipment to raise the front wheelsoff the ground. When towing in this manner,the rear wheels can remain on the ground.Front-wheel drive vehicles must have thefront wheels placed on a tow dolly whentowing your vehicle from the rear using wheellift equipment. This prevents damage to thetransmission.

Towing an all-wheel drive vehicle requiresthat all wheels be off the ground, such asusing a wheel lift and dollies or flatbedequipment. This prevents damage to thetransmission, all-wheel drive system andvehicle.

TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOURWHEELSEmergency TowingYou can flat-tow (all wheels on the ground,regardless of the powertrain/transmissionconfiguration) your disabled vehicle (withoutaccess to wheel dollies, car-hauling trailer,or flatbed transport vehicle) under thefollowing conditions:• Your vehicle is facing forward so you tow

it in a forward direction.• You place the transmission in neutral (N).

If you cannot place the transmission inneutral (N), you may need to override it.See Transmission (page 140).

• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80

kilometers).

206


Towing

Recreational TowingNote: Put your climate control system inrecirculated air mode to prevent exhaustfumes from entering the vehicle. See ClimateControl (page 105).Follow these guidelines if you have a needfor recreational (RV) towing. An example ofrecreational towing would be towing yourvehicle behind a motorhome or truck. Theseguidelines are to make sure you do notdamage your vehicle after it is hooked-up tothe recreational vehicle or tow dolly.You can tow your front-wheel drive vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground or with thefront wheels off the ground by using a towdolly. If you are using a tow dolly, follow theinstructions specified by the equipmentprovider. If you are towing with all four wheelson the ground, see the following instructions.You can tow your all-wheel drive vehicle withall four wheels on the ground or with all fourwheels off the ground using a vehicletransport trailer. Do not tow your all-wheeldrive vehicle with the front wheels off theground (by using a tow dolly) and the rear

wheels on the ground. This causes damageto your all-wheel drive system. If you areusing a vehicle transport trailer, follow theinstruction specified by the equipmentprovider. If you are towing with all four wheelson the ground, see the following instructions.If you tow your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground:• Tow only in the forward direction.• Release the parking brake.• Place the transmission in neutral (N).• Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h).• Start the engine and allow it to run for

five minutes at the beginning of each dayand every six hours thereafter. With theengine running and your foot on the brake,shift into drive (D) and then into reverse(R) before shifting back into neutral (N).

207


Towing

BREAKING-INYou need to break in new tires forapproximately 300 miles (480 kilometers).During this time, your vehicle may exhibitsome unusual driving characteristics.Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speedfrequently and change up through the gearsearly. Do not labor the engine.Do not tow during the first 1000 miles (1600kilometers).

ECONOMICAL DRIVINGFuel economy is affected by several thingssuch as how you drive, the conditions youdrive under and how you maintain yourvehicle.There are some things to keep in mind thatmay improve your fuel economy:• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,

moderate fashion.• Drive at steady speeds.• Anticipate stops; slowing down may

eliminate the need to stop.

• Combine errands and minimizestop-and-go driving (When runningerrands, go to the furthest destinationfirst and then work your way back home).

• Close the windows for high-speed driving.• Drive at reasonable speeds.• Keep the tires properly inflated and use

only the recommended size.• Use the recommended engine oil.• Perform all regularly scheduled

maintenance.There are also some things you may want toavoid doing because they reduce your fueleconomy:• Avoid sudden or hard accelerations.• Avoid revving the engine before turning

off the car.• Avoid long idle periods.• Do not warm up your vehicle on cold

mornings.• Reduce the use of air conditioning and

heat.• Avoid using speed control in hilly terrain.• Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal

while driving.• Avoid carrying unnecessary weight.

• Avoid adding particular accessories toyour vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,rollbars/light bars, running boards, skiracks).

• Avoid driving with the wheels out ofalignment.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

WARNINGDo not drive through flowing or deepwater as you may lose control of yourvehicle.

Note: Driving through standing water cancause vehicle damage.Note: Engine damage can occur if waterenters the air filter.Before driving through standing water, checkthe depth. Never drive through water that ishigher than the bottom of the front rockerarea of your vehicle.

208


Driving Hints

E176360

When driving through standing water, drivevery slowly and do not stop your vehicle. Yourbrake performance and traction may belimited. After driving through water and assoon as it is safe to do so:• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the

brakes and to check that they work.• Check that the horn works.• Check that the exterior lights work.• Turn the steering wheel to check that the

steering power assist works.

FLOOR MATS

WARNINGSAlways use floor mats that aredesigned to fit the foot well of yourvehicle. Only use floor mats that leave

the pedal area unobstructed. Only use floormats that are firmly secured to retentionposts so that they cannot slip out of positionand interfere with the pedals or impair safeoperation of your vehicle in other ways.

Pedals that cannot move freely cancause loss of vehicle control andincrease the risk of serious personal

injury.Always make sure that the floor matsare properly attached to the retentionposts in the carpet that are supplied

with your vehicle. Floor mats must beproperly secured to both retention posts tomake sure mats do not shift out of position.

Never place floor mats or any othercovering in the vehicle foot well thatcannot be properly secured to prevent

them from moving and interfering with thepedals or the ability to control the vehicle.

WARNINGSNever place floor mats or any othercovering on top of already installedfloor mats. Floor mats should always

rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface andnot another floor mat or other covering.Additional floor mats or any other coveringwill reduce the pedal clearance andpotentially interfere with pedal operation.

Check attachment of floor mats on aregular basis. Always properly reinstalland secure floor mats that have been

removed for cleaning or replacement.Always make sure that objects cannotfall into the driver foot well while thevehicle is moving. Objects that are

loose can become trapped under the pedalscausing a loss of vehicle control.

Failure to properly follow floor matinstallation or attachment instructionscan potentially cause interference with

pedal operation causing a loss of vehiclecontrol.

209


Driving Hints

E142666

To install floor mats, position the floor matso that the eyelet is over the retention postand press down to lock in.To remove the floor mat, reverse theinstallation procedure.

210


Driving Hints

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCEVehicles Sold in the United States:Getting Roadside AssistanceIf you ever need help on the road, the LincolnMotor Company is there for you withnationwide, 24-hours-a-day,seven-days-a-week assistance.The service is available:• Throughout the life of the vehicle for

original owners.• For six years or 70,000 mi

(112,654.08 km) (whichever comes first)within the extended powertrain warrantycoverage period for subsequent owners.

• For the coverage period listed on theRoadside Assistance Card included inyour Owner's Manual portfolio.

This complimentary Roadside Assistanceprogram is separate from the New VehicleLimited Warranty, and includes:• A flat tire change with a good spare

(except vehicles supplied with a tireinflation kit).

• Battery jump start.• Lock-out assistance (key replacement

cost is the client's responsibility).

• Fuel delivery — independent servicecontractors, if not prohibited by state,local or municipal law shall deliver up to2.0 gal (7.5 L) of gasoline or 5.0 gal(18.9 L) of diesel fuel to a disabledvehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fueldelivery service to two no-chargeoccurrences within a 12-month period.

• Winch out — available within 100 ft(30.48 m) of a paved or countymaintained road, no recoveries.

• Towing — independent servicecontractors, if not prohibited by state,local or municipal law shall tow Lincolneligible vehicles to the client's selling orpreferred dealer within 100 mi (161 km)of the disablement location or to thenearest Lincoln dealer. If a client requestsa tow to a selling or preferred dealer thatis more than 100 mi (161 km) from thedisablement location, the client shall beresponsible for any mileage costs inexcess of 100 mi (161 km).

Roadside Assistance includes up to $200coverage for a towed trailer if the disabledeligible vehicle requires service at the nearestauthorized dealer. If the towing vehicle isoperational but the trailer is not, then thetrailer does not qualify for any roadsideservices.

Vehicles Sold in the United States:Using Roadside AssistanceUnited States Lincoln vehicle clients whorequire Roadside Assistance, call1-800-521-4140.If you need to arrange roadside assistancefor yourself, Lincoln Motor Company willreimburse a reasonable amount for towingto the nearest Lincoln dealership within100 mi (161 km). To obtain reimbursementinformation, United States Lincoln vehicleclients, call 1-800-521-4140. Lincoln MotorCompany will ask you to submit your originalreceipts.

Vehicles Sold in Canada: GettingRoadside AssistanceTo fully assist you should you have a vehicleconcern, Lincoln Motor Company offers acomplimentary roadside assistance program.This program is eligible within Canada or thecontinental United States.This program is separate from the NewVehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverageis concurrent with the powertrain coverageperiod of your vehicle.Canadian customers who require roadsideassistance, call 1-800-387-5333.

211


Roadside Emergencies

Vehicles Sold in Canada: UsingRoadside AssistanceComplete the roadside assistanceidentification card and place it in your walletfor quick reference.In Canada, this card is found in the WarrantyGuide in the glove compartment of yourvehicle.

Vehicles Sold in Canada: RoadsideAssistance Program CoverageThe service is available 24 hours a day, sevendays a week.Canadian roadside coverage and benefitsmay differ from the U.S. coverage.For complete program coverage detailsreview your warranty guide, contact yourdealer, call us in Canada at 1-800-387-9333,or visit our website atwww.lincolncanada.com.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSNote: If used when the vehicle is not running,the battery will lose charge. There may beinsufficient power to restart your vehicle.

The hazard warning button islocated on the instrument panel.Use it when your vehicle is creating

a safety hazard for other motorists.

• Press the button to turn on the hazardwarning function, and the front and reardirection indicators will flash.

• Press the button again to turn them off.

FUEL SHUTOFF

WARNINGFailure to inspect and, if necessary,repair fuel leaks after a collision mayincrease the risk of fire and serious

injury. Ford Motor Company recommendsthat the fuel system be inspected by anauthorized dealer after any collision.

In the event of a moderate to severe collision,this vehicle includes a fuel pump shutofffeature that stops the flow of fuel to theengine. Not every impact will cause a shutoff.

Should your vehicle shut off after a collision,you may restart your vehicle. For vehiclesequipped with a key system:1. Switch off the ignition.2. Switch on the ignition.3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the fuel

pump.For vehicles equipped with a push buttonstart system:1. Press the START/STOP button to

switch off the ignition.2. Press the brake pedal and press the

START/STOP button to switch on theignition.

3. Remove your foot from the brake pedaland press the START/STOP button toswitch off the ignition.

4. You can either attempt to start the engineby pressing the brake pedal and theSTART/STOP button, or switch on theignition only by pressing theSTART/STOP button without pressingthe brake pedal. Both ways re-enable thefuel system.

212



Note: When you try to restart your vehicleafter a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes surethat various systems are safe to restart. Onceyour vehicle determines that the systems aresafe, then the vehicle will allow you to restart.Note: In the event that your vehicle does notrestart after your third attempt, contact anauthorized dealer.

JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE

WARNINGSBatteries normally produce explosivegases which can cause personal injury.Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks

or lighted substances to come near thebattery. When working near the battery,always shield your face and protect youreyes. Always provide correct ventilation.

Keep batteries out of reach of children.Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoidcontact with skin, eyes or clothing.

Shield your eyes when working near thebattery to protect against possible splashingof acid solution. In case of acid contact withskin or eyes, flush immediately with water fora minimum of 15 minutes and get promptmedical attention. If acid is swallowed, calla physician immediately.

WARNINGSUse only adequately sized cables withinsulated clamps.

Preparing Your VehicleDo not attempt to push-start your automatictransmission vehicle.Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle withan automatic transmission may causetransmission damage.Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start yourvehicle.Note: Do not disconnect the battery of thedisabled vehicle as this could damage thevehicle electrical system.Park the booster vehicle close to the hood ofthe disabled vehicle, making sure the twovehicles do not touch.

Connecting the Jumper CablesWARNINGS

Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,engine rocker covers, the intakemanifold or electrical components as

grounding points. Stay clear of moving parts.To avoid reverse polarity connections, makesure that you correctly identify the positive(+) and negative (-) terminals on both thedisabled and booster vehicles beforeconnecting the cables.

Do not attach the end of the positivecable to the studs or L-shaped eyeletlocated above the positive (+) terminal

of your vehicle’s battery. High current mayflow through and cause damage to the fuses.

Do not connect the end of the secondcable to the negative (-) terminal ofthe battery to be jumped. A spark may

cause an explosion of the gases thatsurround the battery.

Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehiclerepresents the booster vehicle.

213



4

2

1

3

E142664

1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable tothe positive (+) terminal of thedischarged battery.

2. Connect the other end of the positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminal of thebooster vehicle battery.

3. Connect the negative (-) cable to thenegative (-) terminal of the boostervehicle battery.

4. Make the final connection of the negative(-) cable to an exposed metal part of thestalled vehicle's engine, away from thebattery and the fuel injection system, orconnect the negative (-) cable to aground connection point if available.

Jump Starting1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle

and rev the engine moderately, or pressthe accelerator gently to keep your enginespeed between 2000 and 3000 RPM, asshown in your tachometer.

2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.3. Once the disabled vehicle has been

started, run both vehicle engines for anadditional three minutes beforedisconnecting the jumper cables.

Removing the Jumper CablesRemove the jumper cables in the reverseorder that they were connected.

4

1

3

2

E142665

1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cablefrom the disabled vehicle.

2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative(-) terminal of the booster vehiclebattery.

214



3. Remove the jumper cable from thepositive (+) terminal of the boostervehicle battery.

4. Remove the jumper cable from thepositive (+) terminal of the disabledvehicle battery.

5. Allow the engine to idle for at least oneminute.

POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEMThe system flashes the direction indicatorsand sounds the horn (intermittently) in theevent of a serious impact that deploys anairbag (front, side, side curtain or SafetyCanopy) or the safety belt pretensioners.The horn and indicators will turn off when:• You press the hazard control button.• You press the panic button on the remote

entry transmitter (if equipped).• Your vehicle runs out of power.

215



GETTING THE SERVICES YOUNEEDWarranty repairs to your vehicle must beperformed by an authorized dealer. While anyauthorized dealer handling your vehicle lineprovides warranty service, we recommendyou return to your selling authorized dealerwho wants to ensure your continuedsatisfaction.Please note that certain warranty repairsrequire special training and equipment, sonot all authorized dealers are authorized toperform all warranty repairs. This means that,depending on the warranty repair needed,you may have to take your vehicle to anotherauthorized dealer.A reasonable time must be allowed toperform a repair after taking your vehicle tothe authorized dealer. Repairs are made usingLincoln or Motorcraft parts, orremanufactured or other parts that areauthorized by Lincoln.

Away From HomeIf you are away from home when your vehicleneeds service, contact the Lincoln ClientRelationship Center or use the onlineresources listed below to find the nearestauthorized dealer.

In the United States:Mailing addressLincoln Motor CompanyClient Relationship CenterP.O. Box 6248Dearborn, MI 48126Telephone1-800-521-4140TDD for the hearing impaired:1-800-232-5952

Web Address

www.LincolnOwner.com

These are some of the items that can befound online:• United States dealer locator by Dealer

Name, City, State or ZIP Code.• Owner Manuals.• Maintenance Schedules.• Recalls.• Lincoln Extended Service Plans.• Lincoln Original Accessories.• Service specials and promotions.In Canada:

Mailing addressLincoln Client Relationship CentreLincoln Motor Company of Canada, LimitedP.O. Box 2000Oakville, Ontario L6K 1C8Telephone1-800-387-9333

Web Address

www.LincolnCanada.com

Online ResourcesTwitter English@LincolnMotorCATwitter French@LincolnQCInstagram@LincolnMotorCAFacebook/LincolnMotorCA

Additional AssistanceIf you have questions or concerns, or areunsatisfied with the service you are receiving,follow these steps:

216


Customer Assistance

1. Contact your Sales Representative orService Advisor at your selling or servicingauthorized dealer.

2. If your inquiry or concern remainsunresolved, contact the Sales Manager,Service Manager or Customer RelationsManager.

3. If you require assistance or clarificationon Lincoln Motor Company policies,please contact the Lincoln ClientRelationship Center.

In order to help us serve you better, pleasehave the following information availablewhen contacting a Client Relationship Center:• Vehicle Identification Number.• Your telephone number (home and

business).• The name of the authorized dealer and

city where located.• The vehicle’s current odometer reading.In some states, you must directly notifyLincoln in writing before pursuing remediesunder your state’s warranty laws. Lincoln isalso allowed a final repair attempt in somestates.

In the United States, a warranty dispute mustbe submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE beforetaking action under the Magnuson-MossWarranty Act, or to the extent allowed bystate law, before pursuing replacement orrepurchase remedies provided by certainstate laws. This dispute handling procedureis not required prior to enforcing state createdrights or other rights which are independentof the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or statereplacement or repurchase laws.

IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)requires that, if a manufacturer or itsrepresentative is unable to repair a motorvehicle to conform to the vehicle’s applicableexpress warranty after a reasonable numberof attempts, the manufacturer shall berequired to either replace the vehicle withone substantially identical or repurchase thevehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amountequal to the actual price paid or payable bythe consumer (less a reasonable allowancefor consumer use). The consumer has theright to choose whether to receive a refundor replacement vehicle.

California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)presumes that the manufacturer has had areasonable number of attempts to conformthe vehicle to its applicable expresswarranties if, within the first 18 months ofownership of a new vehicle or the first 18000miles (29 000 km), whichever occurs first:1. Two or more repair attempts are made

on the same non-conformity likely tocause death or serious bodily injury OR

2. Four or more repair attempts are madeon the same nonconformity (a defect orcondition that substantially impairs theuse, value or safety of the vehicle) OR

3. The vehicle is out of service for repair ofnonconformities for a total of more than30 calendar days (not necessarily all atone time).

In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumermust also notify the manufacturer of theneed for the repair of the nonconformity atthe following address:Ford Motor Company16800 Executive Plaza DriveMail Drop 3NE-BDearborn, MI 48126

217


Customer Assistance

You are required to submit your warrantydispute to BBB AUTO LINE before assertingin court any rights or remedies conferred byCalifornia Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). Youare also required to use BBB AUTO LINEbefore exercising rights or seeking remediescreated by the Federal Magnuson-MossWarranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. Ifyou choose to seek redress by pursuing rightsand remedies not created by California CivilCode Section 1793.22(b) or theMagnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBBAUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.

THE BETTER BUSINESSBUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINEPROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)Your satisfaction is important to Ford MotorCompany and to your dealer. If a warrantyconcern has not been resolved using thethree-step procedure outlined earlier in thischapter in the Getting the Services you needsection, you may be eligible to participate inthe BBB AUTO LINE program.

The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of twoparts – mediation and arbitration. Duringmediation, a representative of the BBB willcontact both you and Ford Motor Companyto explore options for settlement of theclaim. If an agreement is not reached duringmediation or you do not want to participatein mediation, and if your claim is eligible, youmay participate in the arbitration process. Anarbitration hearing will be scheduled so thatyou can present your case in an informalsetting before an impartial person. Thearbitrator will consider the testimonyprovided and make a decision after thehearing.Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINEprogram are usually decided within forty daysafter you file your claim with the BBB. Youare not bound by the decision, and may rejectthe decision and proceed to court where allfindings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, anddecision, are admissible in the court action.Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTOLINE decision, Ford is then bound by thedecision, and must comply with the decisionwithin 30 days of receipt of your acceptanceletter.

BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using theinformation provided below, please call orwrite to request a program application. Youwill be asked for your name and address,general information about your new vehicle,information about your warranty concerns,and any steps you have already taken to tryto resolve them. A Customer Claim Form willbe mailed that will need to be completed,signed and returned to the BBB along withproof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBBwill review the claim for eligibility under theProgram Summary Guidelines.You can get more information by callingBBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100, orwriting to:BBB AUTO LINE3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600Arlington, Virginia 22201BBB AUTO LINE applications can also berequested by calling the Ford Motor CompanyCustomer Relationship Center at1-800-392-3673.Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the rightto change eligibility limitations, modifyprocedures, or to discontinue this process atany time without notice and withoutobligation.

218


Customer Assistance

UTILIZING THEMEDIATION/ARBITRATIONPROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadiandealers. In those cases where you continueto feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada andthe authorized dealer to resolve afactory-related vehicle service concern havebeen unsatisfactory, Ford of Canadaparticipates in an impartial third partymediation/arbitration program administeredby the Canadian Motor Vehicle ArbitrationPlan (CAMVAP).The CAMVAP program is a straight forwardand relatively speedy alternative to resolvea disagreement when all other efforts toproduce a settlement have failed. Thisprocedure is without cost to you and isdesigned to eliminate the need for lengthyand expensive legal proceedings.

In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-partyarbitrators conduct hearings at mutuallyconvenient times and places in an informalenvironment. These impartial arbitratorsreview the positions of the parties, makedecisions and, when appropriate, renderawards to resolve disputes. CAMVAPdecisions are fast, fair, and final as thearbitrator’s award is binding on both you andFord of Canada.CAMVAP services are available in allCanadian territories and provinces. For moreinformation, without charge or obligation,call your CAMVAP Provincial Administratordirectly at 1-800-207-0685 or visitwww.camvap.ca.

GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDETHE U.S. AND CANADABefore exporting your vehicle to a foreigncountry, contact the appropriate foreignembassy or consulate. These officials caninform you of local vehicle registrationregulations and where to find unleaded fuel.If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can onlyget fuel with an anti-knock index lower thanis recommended for your vehicle, contact ourCustomer Relationship Center.

The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle withoutproper conversion may damage theeffectiveness of your emission control systemand may cause engine knocking or seriousengine damage. Ford Motor Company or Fordof Canada is not responsible for any damagecaused by use of improper fuel. Using leadedfuel may also result in difficulty importingyour vehicle back into the United States.If your vehicle must be serviced while you aretraveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,contact the nearest authorized dealer. If theauthorized dealer cannot help you, contact:FORD MOTOR COMPANYCustomer Relationship Center1555 Fairlane DriveFairlane Business Park #3Allen Park, Michigan 48101U.S.A.Telephone: (313) 594-4857Fax: (313) 390-0804Email: [email protected] customers in Guam, the Commonwealthof the Northern Mariana Islands (CNMI),America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin Islands,please feel free to call our Toll-Free Number:(800) 841-FORD (3673).

219


Customer Assistance

If your vehicle must be serviced while you aretraveling or living in Puerto Rico, contact thenearest authorized dealer. If the authorizeddealer cannot help you, contact:FORD MOTOR COMPANYCustomer Relationship Center1555 Fairlane DriveFairlane Business Park #3Allen Park, Michigan 48101U.S.A.Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)FAX: (313) 390-0804Email: [email protected] your vehicle must be serviced while you aretraveling or living in the Middle East, contactthe nearest authorized dealer. If theauthorized dealer cannot help you, contact:FORD MOTOR COMPANYCustomer Relationship Center1555 Fairlane DriveFairlane Business Park #3Allen Park, Michigan 48101U.S.A.Ford: 80004443673Lincoln: 80004441067If calling from the UAE: 80004441066If calling from the Kingdom of SaudiArabia: 8008443673If calling from Kuwait: 22280384

FAX: +971 4 3327266Email: [email protected] you buy your vehicle in North America andthen relocate to any of the above locations,register your vehicle identification number(VIN) and new address with Ford MotorCompany Export Operations & Global GrowthInitiatives by emailing [email protected] you are in another foreign country, contactthe nearest authorized dealer. In the eventyour inquiry is unresolved, communicate yourconcern with the dealership’s Sales Manager,Service Manager or Customer RelationsManager. If you require additional assistanceor clarification, please contact the respectiveCustomer Relationship Center as previouslylisted.Customers in the U.S. should call1-800-392-3673.

ORDERING ADDITIONALOWNER'S LITERATURETo order the publications in this portfolio,contact Helm, Incorporated at:

HELM, INCORPORATED47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, Michigan 48170Attention: Customer ServiceOr to order a free publication catalog, call tollfree: 1-800-782-4356Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. ESTHelm, Incorporated can also be reached bytheir website:www.helminc.com(Items in this catalog may be purchased bycredit card, check or money order.)

Obtaining a French Owner’s ManualFrench Owner’s Manual can be obtained fromyour authorized dealer or by contacting Helm,Incorporated using the contact informationlisted previously in this section.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS(U.S. ONLY)

E142557

220


Customer Assistance

If you believe that your vehicle hasa defect which could cause a crashor could cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying Ford Motor Company.If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved inindividual problems between you,your dealer, or Ford Motor Company.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or writeto:Administrator1200 New Jersey Avenue, SoutheastWashington, D.C. 20590You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS(CANADA ONLY)If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform Transport Canada and Ford ofCanada.

Transport Canada Contact Information

www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safevehicles-defectinvestigations-index-76.htm (English)Website

www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/VehiculesSecuritaires-Enquetes-index-76.htm (French)Website

1–800–333–0510Phone

221


Customer Assistance

Ford of Canada Contact Information

www.ford.caWebsite

1–800–565-3673Phone

222


Customer Assistance

FUSE SPECIFICATION CHARTPower Distribution Box

WARNINGSAlways disconnect the battery beforeservicing high-current fuses.

WARNINGSTo reduce risk of electrical shock,always replace the cover to the powerdistribution box before reconnecting

the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.

The power distribution box is in the enginecompartment. It has high-current fuses thatprotect the vehicle's main electrical systemsfrom overloads.If you disconnect and reconnect the battery,you will need to reset some features. SeeChanging the 12V Battery (page 255).

E173618

9798

77

9695 94 93 92 91 90 89

88

66

44

78

56

39

26

18 1617

3 12456789

192021222324

2728293031

40414243

55575859606162636465

798081828384858687

67

45

32

10111213

333435

464748495051

686970717274

7376

75

53

37 36

54

38

25

15

14

52

223


Fuses

Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number

Not used.-1

Not used.-2

Not used.-3

Wiper motor relay.30A24

Anti-lock brake system pump.50A25

Not used.-6

Not used.-7

Moonroof.20A 28Power sunshade.

Second row power point.20A29

Not used.-10

Heated rear window relay.-11

Not used.-12

Starter motor relay.-13

Left-hand cooling fan number 2 relay.-14

Fuel pump relay.-15

224


Fuses


Not used.-16

Not used.-17

Front blower motor relay.40A218

Starter relay.30A219

Storage bin power point.20A220

Rear heated seat module.20A 221

Not used.-22

Driver power seat.30A223

Memory module.

Not used.-24

Not used.-25

Heated rear window relay.40A226

Cigar lighter.20A227

Climate controlled seats.30A228

Electric fan relay 1.40A229

225


Fuses




Massage control seat relay.Relay32

Right-hand cooling fan relay.-33

Blower motor relay.-34

Left-hand cooling fan Number 1 relay.-35

Not used.-36

Not used.-37

Not used.-38

Not used.-39

Left front smart window motor.30A240

Left rear smart window motor.30A241

Passenger power seat.30A242

Anti-lock brake system valves.20A243

Not used.-44

Rain sensor.5A145

226


Fuses


Not used.-46

Not used.-47

Not used.-48

Not used.-49

Heated Mirrors.15A150

Not used.-51

Not used.-52

Not used.-53

Not used.-54

Wiper relay.-55

Not used.-56

Left-hand high intensity discharge headlamp.20A157

Alternator A-line.10A158

Brake on/off switch.10A159

Not used.-60

Not used.-61

227


Fuses


A/C clutch.10A362

Not used.-63

Massage control seats.15A164

Fuel pump relay.30A165Fuel injectors.

Powertrain control module relay.-66

Oxygen sensor heater.20A167

Mass airflow sensor.

Variable camshaft timing solenoid valve.

Canister vent solenoid.

Canister purge solenoid.

Ignition coils.20A168

Vehicle power 1 (powertrain control module).20A169

A/C clutch.15A170

Fan control relay coils 1-3.

Variable air conditioning compressor.

Auxiliary transmission warmup.

228


Fuses


Turbo charge waste-gate control.

Electronic compressor bypass valve.

All-wheel drive module.

Positive crankcase ventilation heater.

Not used.-71

Not used.-72

Not used.-73

Not used.-74

Not used.-75

Not used.-76

Not used.-77

Right high-intensity discharge headlamp.20A178

Not used.-79

Not used.-80

Not used.-81

Not used.-82

Not used.-83

229


Fuses


Not used.-84

Not used.-85

Powertrain control module.7.5A186

Keep alive power and relay.

Canister vent solenoid.

Run/start relay.5A187

Run/start relay.-88

Front blower relay coil.5A189

Electrical power assist steering module.

Powertrain control module run/start.10A190

Adaptive cruise control module.10A191

Anti-lock brake system module.10A192

Adaptive headlamp module.

Rear window defroster relay.5A193

Passenger compartment fuse panel run/start.30A294

Not used.-95

230


Fuses


Not used.-96

Not used.-97

A/C Clutch relay.-981Mini Fuses2 Cartridge Fuses3 Micro Fuses

Passenger Compartment Fuse PanelThe fuse panel is under the instrument panelto the left of the steering wheel. You mayneed to remove a trim panel to access it.

231


Fuses

E163102

232


Fuses


Left front and right rear smart window motors.30A1

Driver seat switch.15A2

Right front smart window motor.30A3

Demand lamps battery saver relay.10A4

Audio amplifier20A5Active noise control module.

Not used (spare).5A6

Driver seat module logic.7.5A7Left front door zone module.Keypad.


SYNC module.10A9Electronic finish panel.Radio frequency transceiver module.

Run accessory relay.10A10Wiper relay.Rain-sense subfuse.

Intelligent access module logic.10A11Heads-up display.

Puddle lamp.15A12

233


Fuses


Backlighting LED.Interior lighting.

Right-hand direction indicators.15A13

Left-hand direction indicators.15A14

Stop lamp.15A15Backup lamp.

Right front low beam.10A16

Left front low beam.10A17

Start button.10A18Keypad illumination.Brake-shift interlock.Powertrain control module wake-up.Immobilizer transceiver module.

Audio amplifiers.20A19

All lock motor relay and coil.20A20Driver lock motor relay and coil.


Horn relay.20A22

Steering wheel control module logic15A23Instrument cluster.

Steering wheel control module.15A24

234


Fuses


Decklid release.15A25

Push button ignition switch.5A26

Intelligent access module power.20A27


Radio.20A29Global positioning system module

Front park lamps.15A30


Smart window motors.15A32Master window and mirror switch.Rear window power sunshade module.Lock switch illumination.

Suspension module.10A33

Reverse park aid module.10A34Automatic high beam and lane departure module.Rear heated seat module.Blind spot monitor module.Rear video camera.

Motorized humidity sensor.5A35Heads-up display.

Heated steering wheel.10A36

235


Fuses



Moonroof module and switch.10A38

High beams.15A39

Rear park lamps.10A40

Occupant classification sensor.7.5A41Restraint control module.





Climate control module.10A46

Fog lamp relay.15A47

Front passenger power window.30A Circuit breaker48Rear power windows.

236


Fuses

CHANGING A FUSEFuses

WARNINGAlways replace a fuse with one that hasthe specified amperage rating. Using afuse with a higher amperage rating can

cause severe wire damage and could start afire.

E217331

If electrical components in the vehicle arenot working, a fuse may have blown. Blownfuses are identified by a broken wire withinthe fuse. Check the appropriate fuses beforereplacing any electrical components.

237


Fuses

Fuse Types

E207206

Fuse TypeCallout

Micro 2A

Micro 3B

MaxiC

MiniD

238


Fuses

Fuse TypeCallout

M CaseE

J CaseF

J Case Low ProfileG

239


Fuses

GENERAL INFORMATIONHave your vehicle serviced regularly to helpmaintain its roadworthiness and resale value.There is a large network of authorized dealersthat are there to help you with theirprofessional servicing expertise. We believethat their specially trained technicians arebest qualified to service your vehicle properlyand expertly. They are supported by a widerange of highly specialized tools developedspecifically for servicing your vehicle.If your vehicle requires professional service,an authorized dealer can provide thenecessary parts and service. Check yourwarranty information to find out which partsand services are covered.Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,fluids and service parts conforming tospecifications. Motorcraft® parts aredesigned and built to provide the bestperformance in your vehicle.

Precautions• Do not work on a hot engine.• Make sure that nothing gets caught in

moving parts.

• Do not work on a vehicle with the enginerunning in an enclosed space, unless youare sure you have enough ventilation.

• Keep all open flames and other burningmaterial (such as cigarettes) away fromthe battery and all fuel related parts.

Working with the Engine Off1. Set the parking brake and shift to park

(P).2. Switch off the engine.3. Block the wheels.

Working with the Engine OnWARNING

To reduce the risk of vehicle damageand/or personal burn injuries, do notstart your engine with the air cleaner

removed and do not remove it while theengine is running.

1. Set the parking brake and shift to park(P).

2. Block the wheels.

OPENING AND CLOSING THEHOODOpening the Hood

E203008

1

240


Maintenance

1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood releasehandle located under the left-hand sideof the instrument panel.

2. Slightly lift the hood.

2

E203009

3

3. Release the hood latch by pushing thesecondary release lever to your left-handside.

E202009

4

4. Open the hood. The hood strutsautomatically support the hood.

Closing the Hood1. Lower the hood and allow it to drop under

its own weight for the last 8–12 in(20–30 cm).

Note: Make sure that the hood is correctlyclosed.

241


Maintenance

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L ECOBOOST™

E173375

Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 247).A.Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 245).B.

242


Maintenance

Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 245).C.Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 254).D.Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 255).E.Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 223).F.Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 262).G.Automatic transmission dipstick (under air filter assembly). See Automatic Transmission Fluid Check (page 250).H.Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 254).I.

243


Maintenance

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.7L

A B C D

GHI

E F

E173333

Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 247).A.Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 245).B.Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 245).C.Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 254).D.

244


Maintenance

Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 255).E.Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 223).F.Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 262).G.Automatic transmission dipstick (under air filter assembly). See Automatic Transmission Fluid Check (page 250).H.Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 254).I.

Engine Shield

E173374

Some vehicles may be equipped with anaero-shield under the engine. This shieldneeds to be removed for service, including oiland filter changes. The shield has fourquick-release fasteners to secure it in place.

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK

E146429

MINAMAXB

ENGINE OIL CHECKNote: Check the level before starting theengine.Note: Make sure that the oil level is betweenthe minimum and the maximum marks.1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level

ground.2. Turn the engine off and wait 10 minutes

for the oil to drain into the oil pan.3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a

clean, lint-free cloth. Replace the dipstickand remove it again to check the oil level.

If the oil level is at the minimum mark, addoil immediately.

Adding Engine OilNote: Do not remove the filler cap when theengine is running.

245


Maintenance

Note: Do not add oil further than the MAXmark. Oil levels above the MAX mark maycause engine damage.

E142732

Only use oils certified for gasoline engines bythe American Petroleum Institute (API). Anoil with this trademark symbol conforms tothe current engine and emission systemprotection standards and fuel economyrequirements of the International LubricantsSpecification Advisory Committee (ILSAC).1. Remove the filler cap.2. If the engine oil level is not within the

normal range, add engine oil that meetsFord specifications. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 296).

3. Remove the engine oil filler cap and usea funnel to pour the engine oil into theopening.

4. Wipe off any spilled oil.5. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you feel

a strong resistance.

OIL CHANGE INDICATOR RESETUse the information display controls on thesteering wheel to reset the oil changeindicator.

From the main menu scroll to:

Action and descriptionMessage

Press the right arrow button,then from this menu scroll tothe following message.

Settings


Vehicle


Oil Life

Action and descriptionMessage

Press and hold the OK buttonuntil the instrument clusterdisplays the followingmessage.

Hold OK toReset

Reset Successful

When the oil change indicatorresets the instrument clusterdisplays 100%.

Remaining Life

{00}%

If the instrument clusterdisplays one of the followingmessages, repeat the process.

Not Reset

Reset Cancelled

246


Maintenance

ENGINE COOLANT CHECK

WARNINGSDo not add engine coolant when theengine is hot. Steam and scaldingliquids released from a hot cooling

system can burn you badly. Also, spillingcoolant on hot engine parts can burn you.

Do not put engine coolant in thewindshield washer fluid container. Ifsprayed on the windshield, engine

coolant could make it difficult to see throughthe windshield.

To reduce the risk of personal injury,make sure the engine is cool beforeunscrewing the coolant pressure relief

cap. The cooling system is under pressure.Steam and hot liquid can come out forcefullywhen you loosen the cap slightly.

Do not add coolant further than theMAX mark.

Checking the Engine CoolantWhen the engine is cold, check theconcentration and level of the engine coolantat the intervals listed in the scheduledmaintenance information. See ScheduledMaintenance (page 321).

Note: Make sure that the coolant level isbetween the MIN and MAX marks on thecoolant reservoir.Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. Thelevel may extend beyond the MAX mark.Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, belowthe MIN mark, or empty, add coolantimmediately.Maintain coolant concentration within 48%to 50%, which equates to a freeze pointbetween -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C).Note: For best results, coolant concentrationshould be tested with a refractometer such asRobinair® Coolant and Battery Refractometer75240. We do not recommend the use ofhydrometers or coolant test strips formeasuring coolant concentrations.Note: Automotive fluids are notinterchangeable. Do not use engine coolant,antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outsideof its specified function and vehicle location.

Adding Engine CoolantNote: Do not use stop leak pellets, coolingsystem sealants or additives as they can causedamage to the engine cooling or heatingsystems. Your warranty may not cover thesedamages.

Note: During normal vehicle operation, thecoolant may change color from orange to pinkor light red. As long as the coolant is clear anduncontaminated, this color change does notindicate the coolant has degraded nor does itrequire the coolant to be drained, the systemto be flushed, or the coolant to be replaced.Do not mix different colors or types of coolantin your vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants mayharm your engine’s cooling system. Useprediluted engine coolant meeting the correctspecification. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 296). The use of anincorrect coolant may harm the engine orcooling system components and may not becovered by the vehicle Warranty.In case of emergency, you can add a largeamount of water without engine coolant inorder to reach a vehicle service location. Inthis instance, qualified personnel:1. Must drain the cooling system.2. Chemically clean the cooling system with

Motorcraft Premium Cooling SystemFlush.

3. Refill with engine coolant as soon aspossible.

Water alone, without engine coolant, cancause engine damage from corrosion,overheating or freezing.

247


Maintenance

Do not use the following as a coolantsubstitute:• Alcohol.• Methanol.• Brine.• Any engine coolant mixed with alcohol

or methanol antifreeze or coolant.Alcohol and other liquids can cause enginedamage from overheating or freezing.Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to thecoolant. These can be harmful andcompromise the corrosion protection of theengine coolant.When adding coolant:1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will

escape as you unscrew the cap.2. Add prediluted engine coolant meeting

the correct specification. See Capacitiesand Specifications (page 296).

3. Check the coolant level in the coolantreservoir the next few times you drive yourvehicle.

4. If necessary, add enough predilutedengine coolant to bring the coolant levelto the proper level.

Recycled Engine CoolantWe do not recommend the use of recycledengine coolant as an approved recyclingprocess is not yet available.Used engine coolant should be disposed ofin an appropriate manner. Follow yourcommunity’s regulations and standards forrecycling and disposing of automotive fluids.

Severe ClimatesIf you drive in extremely cold climates:• It may be necessary to have an authorized

dealer increase the coolant concentrationabove 50%.

• A coolant concentration of 60% providesimproved freeze point protection. Enginecoolant concentrations above 60%decrease the overheat protectioncharacteristics of the engine coolant andmay cause engine damage.

If you drive in extremely hot climates:• It may be necessary to have an authorized

dealer decrease the coolantconcentration to 40%.

• A coolant concentration of 40% providesimproved overheat protection. Enginecoolant concentrations below 40%decrease the freeze and corrosionprotection characteristics of the enginecoolant and may cause engine damage.

Vehicles driven year-round in non-extremeclimates should use prediluted enginecoolant for optimum cooling system andengine protection.

What You Should Know About Fail-Safe CoolingIf you deplete the engine coolant supply,fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarilydrive your vehicle before you incurincremental component damage. Thefail-safe distance depends on ambienttemperatures, vehicle load and terrain.

How Fail-Safe Cooling WorksIf the engine begins to overheat, the enginecoolant temperature gauge will move to thered (hot) area and:

248


Maintenance

the coolant temperature warninglight will illuminate

the service engine soon indicatorwill illuminate.If the engine reaches a preset

over-temperature condition, the engineautomatically switches to alternating cylinderoperation. Each disabled cylinder acts as anair pump and cools the engine.

When this occurs, your vehicle will stilloperate. However:• The engine power will be limited.• This will disable the air conditioning

system.Continued operation increases the enginetemperature, causing the engine tocompletely shut down. Your steering andbraking effort increases in this situation.When the engine temperature cools, you canre-start your engine. Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon as possible tominimize engine damage.

When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated

WARNINGSFail-safe mode is for use duringemergencies only. Operate your vehiclein fail-safe mode only as long as

necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in asafe location and seek immediate repairs.When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will havelimited power, will not be able to maintainhigh-speed operation, and may completelyshut down without warning, potentially losingengine power, power steering assist, andpower brake assist, which may increase thepossibility of a crash resulting in serious injury.

Never remove the coolant reservoir capwhile the engine is running or hot.

You have limited engine power when in thefail-safe mode, so drive your vehicle withcaution. Your vehicle will not maintainhigh-speed operation and the engine willoperate poorly.Remember that the engine is capable ofautomatically shutting down to preventengine damage. In this situation:1. Pull off the road as soon as safely

possible and switch off the engine.2. Tow your vehicle to an authorized dealer.

3. If this is not possible, wait a short periodfor the engine to cool.

4. Check the coolant level and add if low.5. Re-start the engine and drive your vehicle

to an authorized dealer.Note: Driving your vehicle without repairincreases the chance of engine damage.Contact an authorized dealer as soon aspossible.

Engine Fluid Temperature Management(If Equipped)

WARNINGSTo reduce the risk of crash and injury,be prepared that the vehicle speed mayreduce and the vehicle may not be able

to accelerate with full power until the fluidtemperatures reduce.

Never remove the coolant reservoir capwhile the engine is running or hot.

Your vehicle can pull a trailer, but becauseof the added load, your vehicle’s engine maytemporarily reach higher temperatures duringsevere operating conditions such asascending a long or steep grade while pullinga trailer in high temperatures.

249


Maintenance

At this time, you may notice your enginecoolant temperature gauge needle movetoward the H and the POWER REDUCEDTO LOWER TEMP message may appear inthe information display.You may notice a reduction in vehicle speedcaused by reduced engine power. In order tomanage the engine fluid temperatures, yourvehicle may enter this mode if certainhigh-temperature and high-load conditionstake place. The amount of speed reductiondepends on many factors such as vehicleloading, towing, grade and ambienttemperature. If this occurs, there is no needto pull off the road. You can continue to driveyour vehicle while this message is active.The air conditioning may also cycle on andoff during severe operating conditions toprotect overheating of the engine. When theengine coolant temperature decreases to anormal operating temperature, the airconditioning will turn on once again.If the engine coolant temperature gaugemoves fully into the red (hot) area, or if thecoolant temperature warning or serviceengine soon messages appear in yourinformation display:1. Pull off the road as soon as safely

possible and shift the transmission intoP.

2. Leave the engine running until the coolanttemperature gauge needle moves awayfrom the red (hot) area. After severalminutes, if the temperature does notdrop, follow the remaining steps.

3. Switch the engine off and wait for it tocool before checking the coolant level.

4. If the coolant level is normal, restart yourengine and continue.

5. If the coolant is low, add coolant, andrestart the engine. See Adding EngineCoolant or How Fail-Safe CoolingWorks in this chapter for moreinformation.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONFLUID CHECK6F50/6F55 Transmission (If Equipped)

WARNINGSThe dipstick cap and surroundingcomponents may be hot, use gloves.Use gloves when moving the air filterassembly. Components will be hot.

Note: Automatic transmission fluid expandswhen warmed. To obtain an accurate fluidcheck, drive your vehicle until you warm it up,approximately 20 mi (30 km). If you operateyour vehicle for an extended period at highspeeds, in city traffic during hot weather orpulling a trailer, switch your vehicle off until itreaches normal operating temperatures toallow the fluid to cool before checking.Depending on vehicle use, cooling times couldtake up to 30 minutes or longer.Refer to your scheduled maintenanceinformation for scheduled intervals for fluidchecks and changes. Your transmission doesnot consume fluid. However, you shouldcheck the fluid level if the transmission is notworking properly. For example, if thetransmission slips or shifts slowly or if younotice some sign of a fluid leak.1. Drive your vehicle 20 mi (30 km) or until

it reaches normal operating temperature.2. Park your vehicle on a level surface and

engage the parking brake.3. With the parking brake engaged and your

foot on the brake pedal, start the engineand move the gearshift lever through allof the gear ranges. Allow a minimum of10 seconds for each gear to engage.

4. Put the gearshift lever in park (P) andleave the engine running.

250


Maintenance

Note: For vehicles with the EcoBoost engine,move the air filter assembly aside to accessthe transmission dipstick. See Moving the AirFilter Assembly for more information.5. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean

with a dry, lint free clean rag. If necessary,refer to the Under hood overview in thischapter for the location of the dipstick.

6. Install the dipstick making sure you fullyseat it in the filler tube by turning it to thelocked position.

7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluidlevel. The fluid should be in thedesignated areas for normal operatingtemperature.

Moving the Air Filter Assembly(Accessing the Dipstick)

WARNINGDo not run engine with the air filterdisconnected.

1. Switch the engine off.

E173335

2

3

2. Clean the area around the clamp thatconnects the air filter assembly to therubber hose and then loosen it.

3. Remove the bolt cover.

E173334

6 5 4

4. Remove two bolts that attach the air filterassembly to the front of the vehicle.

5. Remove the harness retaining clip bypulling up.

251


Maintenance

6. Do not disconnect the sensor.

E173400

7. Pull the air filter assembly up todisconnect it from the seated grommetslocated under the air filter assembly.

8. Rotate the air filter assembly 90 degreescounterclockwise. Make sure the rubberhose is still connected to the air filterassembly.

9. Tighten the clamp.You can now access the transmission fluidlevel indicator.

Checking the fluid level

Low fluid level

E158842

If the fluid level is below the MIN range of thedipstick, add fluid to reach the hash marklevel.Note: If the fluid level is below the MIN level,do not drive the vehicle. An underfill conditionmay cause shift or engagement concerns orpossible damage.

Correct fluid level

E158843

Check the transmission fluid at the normaloperating temperatures between 180°F(82°C) and 200°F (93°C) on a level surface.Drive your vehicle until you warm it up to thenormal operating temperature afterapproximately 20 mi (30 km).Target the transmission fluid level within thecross-hatch area if at the normal operatingtemperature between 180°F (82°C) and200°F (93°C).

252


Maintenance

High fluid level

E158844

If the fluid level is above the MAX range ofthe dipstick, remove fluid to reach thehashmark level.Note: Fluid level above the MAX level maycause shift or engagement concerns orpossible damage. An overheating conditioncan cause high fluid levels. If you operate yourvehicle for an extended period at high speeds,in city traffic during hot weather or pulling atrailer, you should switch your vehicle off untilyour vehicle reaches normal operatingtemperatures. Depending on vehicle use,cooling times could take up to 30 minutes orlonger.

Adjusting Automatic Transmission FluidLevels

E158845

E158846

Before adding any fluid, make sure the correcttype is used. The type of fluid used isnormally indicated on the dipstick and in theTechnical Specifications section in thischapter.Note: An overfill condition of transmissionfluid may cause shift or engagement concernsor possible damage.

Do not use supplemental transmission fluidadditives, treatments or cleaning agents. Theuse of these materials may affecttransmission operation and result in damageto internal transmission components.Reinstall the air filter assembly. After youcheck the fluid level and adjust as necessary,do the following:1. Switch the engine off.2. Loosen the clamp holding the air filter

assembly to the rubber hose.3. Seat the air filter assembly back into the

grommets by pushing down on the airfilter assembly.

4. Tighten the clamp.5. Install and tighten the two bolts that

attach the air filter assembly to the frontof the vehicle.

6. Install the bolt cover.7. Reinstall the harness retaining clip into

the front of the air filter assembly.

253


Maintenance

BRAKE FLUID CHECK

WARNINGSDo not use any fluid other than therecommended brake fluid as this willreduce brake efficiency. Use of

incorrect fluid could result in the loss ofvehicle control, serious personal injury ordeath.

Only use brake fluid from a sealedcontainer. Contamination with dirt,water, petroleum products or other

materials may result in brake system damageor failure. Failure to adhere to this warningcould result in the loss of vehicle control,serious personal injury or death.

Do not allow the fluid to touch your skinor eyes. If this happens, rinse theaffected areas immediately with plenty

of water and contact your physician.A fluid level between the MAX andMIN lines is within the normaloperating range and there is no need

to add fluid. A fluid level not in the normaloperating range could compromise theperformance of the system. Have your vehiclechecked immediately.

E170684

To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoircap must remain in place and fully tight,unless you are adding fluid.Only use fluid that meets Ford specifications.See Capacities and Specifications (page296).

POWER STEERING FLUID CHECKYour vehicle is equipped with an electricpower steering (EPS) system. There is nofluid reservoir to check or fill.

WASHER FLUID CHECK

WARNINGIf you operate your vehicle intemperatures below 40°F (5°C), usewasher fluid with antifreeze protection.

Failure to use washer fluid with antifreezeprotection in cold weather could result inimpaired windshield vision and increase therisk of injury or accident.

Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low.Only use a washer fluid that meets Fordspecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 296).State or local regulations on volatile organiccompounds may restrict the use of methanol,a common windshield washer antifreezeadditive. Washer fluids containingnon-methanol antifreeze agents should beused only if they provide cold weatherprotection without damaging the vehicle’spaint finish, wiper blades or washer system.

254


Maintenance

FUEL FILTERYour vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuelfilter that is integrated with the fuel tank.Regular maintenance or replacement is notneeded.

CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY

WARNINGSBatteries normally produce explosivegases which can cause personal injury.Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks

or lighted substances to come near thebattery. When working near the battery,always shield your face and protect youreyes. Always provide correct ventilation.

When lifting a plastic-cased battery,excessive pressure on the end wallscould cause acid to flow through the

vent caps, resulting in personal injury anddamage to the vehicle or battery. Lift thebattery with a battery carrier or with yourhands on opposite corners.

WARNINGSKeep batteries out of reach of children.Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoidcontact with skin, eyes or clothing.

Shield your eyes when working near thebattery to protect against possible splashingof acid solution. In case of acid contact withskin or eyes, flush immediately with water fora minimum of 15 minutes and get promptmedical attention. If acid is swallowed, calla physician immediately.

Battery posts, terminals and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds. Wash hands after

handling.This vehicle may be fitted with morethan one battery. Removing the batterycables from only one battery does not

disconnect your vehicle electrical system.Make sure you disconnect the battery cablesfrom all batteries when disconnecting power.Failure to do so may cause serious personalinjury or property damage.

Your vehicle is fitted with a Motorcraftmaintenance-free battery which normallydoes not require additional water.

When a battery replacement is required, youmust use a recommended replacementbattery that matches the electricalrequirements of the vehicle.Note: After cleaning or replacing the battery,make sure you reinstall the battery cover orshield.Note: If you add electrical accessories orcomponents to the vehicle, it may adverselyaffect the low voltage battery performanceand durability. This may also affect theperformance of other electrical systems in thevehicle.For longer, trouble-free operation, keep thetop of the battery clean and dry.If you see any corrosion on the battery orterminals, remove the cables from theterminals and clean with a wire brush. Youcan neutralize the acid with a solution ofbaking soda and water.

255


Maintenance

Because your vehicle’s engine is electronicallycontrolled by a computer, some controlconditions are maintained by power from thebattery. When the battery is disconnected ora new battery is installed, the engine mustrelearn its idle and fuel trim strategy foroptimum driveability and performance.Flexible fuel vehicles (FFV) must also relearnthe ethanol content of the fuel for optimumdriveability and performance.To restore the settings, do the following:1. Apply the parking brake.2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).3. Switch off all accessories.4. Press the brake pedal and start your

vehicle.5. Run the engine until it reaches normal

operating temperature. While the engineis warming up, complete the following:Reset the clock. See Audio System(page 313). Reset the power windowsbounce-back feature. See Windows andMirrors (page 78). Reset the radiostation presets. See Audio System(page 313).

6. Allow the engine to idle for at least oneminute.

7. Drive the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km) tocompletely relearn the idle trim and fueltrim strategy.

Note: If you do not allow the engine to relearnthe idle and fuel trim strategy, the idle qualityof your vehicle may be adversely affected untilthe engine computer eventually relearns theidle trim and fuel trim strategy.Note: For flexible fuel vehicles, if you areoperating on E85, you may experience poorstarts or an inability to start the engine anddriveability problems until the fuel trim andethanol content have been relearned.Make sure that you dispose of old batteriesin an environmentally friendly way. Seekadvice from your local authority aboutrecycling old batteries.If storing your vehicle for more than 30 dayswithout recharging the battery, werecommend that you disconnect the batterycables to maintain battery charge for quickstarting.

Battery Management System (If

Equipped)

The battery management system monitorsbattery conditions and takes actions toextend battery life. If excessive battery drainis detected, the system temporarily disablessome electrical systems to protect thebattery.Systems included are:• Heated rear window.• Heated seats.• Climate control.• Heated steering wheel.• Audio unit.• Navigation system.A message may appear in the informationdisplays to alert you that battery protectionactions are active. These messages are onlyfor notification that an action is taking place,and not intended to indicate an electricalproblem or that the battery requiresreplacement.

256


Maintenance

After battery replacement, or in some casesafter charging the battery with an externalcharger, the battery management systemrequires eight hours of vehicle sleep time torelearn the battery state of charge. Duringthis time your vehicle must remain fullylocked with the ignition switched off.Note: Prior to relearning the battery state ofcharge, the battery management system maytemporarily disable some electrical systems.

Electrical Accessory InstallationTo make sure the battery managementsystem works correctly, do not connect anelectrical device ground connection directlyto the battery negative post. This can causeinaccurate measurements of the batterycondition and potential incorrect systemoperation.Note: If you add electrical accessories orcomponents to the vehicle, it may adverselyaffect battery performance and durability. Thismay also affect the performance of otherelectrical systems in the vehicle.

CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES

E142463

Run the tip of your fingers over the edge ofthe blade to check for roughness.Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid orwater applied with a soft sponge or cloth.

CHANGING THE WIPER BLADESReplace the wiper blades at least annuallyfor optimum performance.You can improve poor wiper quality bycleaning the wiper blades and the windshield.See Cleaning the Windows and WiperBlades (page 265).

Changing the Windshield WiperBladesNote: Do not hold the wiper blade when liftingthe wiper arm.Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does notspring back against the glass when the wiperblade is not attached.

E129990

1

1

21. Lift the wiper arm and then press the

wiper blade locking buttons together.2. Slightly rotate the wiper blade.3. Remove the wiper blade.4. Install in the reverse order.Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locksinto place.

257


Maintenance

ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPSVertical Aim AdjustmentThe headlamps on your vehicle are properlyaimed at the assembly plant. If your vehiclehas been in an accident, have the alignmentof your headlamps checked by yourauthorized dealer.

Headlamp Aiming Target

E142592

8 feet (2.4 meters)ACenter height of lamp to groundB25 feet (7.6 meters)CHorizontal reference lineD

Vertical Aim Adjustment1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall

or screen on a level surface,approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.

2. Measure the height from the center ofyour headlamp (indicated by a 3.0millimeter circle on the lens) to theground and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter)horizontal reference line on the verticalwall or screen at this height (a piece ofmasking tape works well).

Note: To see a clearer light pattern foradjusting, you may want to block the light fromone headlamp while adjusting the other.3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to

illuminate the wall or screen and openthe hood. Cover one of the headlamps sono light hits the wall.

E142465

4. There is a distinct cut-off (change fromlight to dark) in the left portion of thebeam pattern. Position the top edge ofthis cut-off 2 inches (5 centimeters)below the horizontal reference line.

E167359

258


Maintenance

5. Locate the vertical adjuster on eachheadlamp. Use a Phillips #2 screwdriverto turn the adjuster either clockwise orcounterclockwise to adjust the verticalaim of the headlamp. The horizontal edgeof the brighter light should touch thehorizontal reference line.

6. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to adjust theother headlamp.

7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.

Horizontal Aim AdjustmentHorizontal aim is not required for this vehicleand is not adjustable.

CHANGING A BULB

WARNINGSBulbs can become hot. Let the bulbcool down before removing it. Failureto do so could result in personal injury.Switch the lamps and the ignition off.Failure to follow this warning couldresult in serious personal injury.

Use the correct specification bulb. See BulbSpecification Chart (page 260).

Install in the reverse order unless otherwisestated.

High-Intensity Discharge HeadlampsThese lamps operate at a high voltage. Seean authorized dealer if they fail.

Front Fog Lamp (If Equipped)

E163826

1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignitionoff.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise

and remove it.Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.Note: You cannot separate the bulb from thebulb holder.

LED LampsLED lamps are not serviceable items. See anauthorized dealer if they fail.The following lamps are LED:• Front parking lamps.• Front side marker lamps.• Front direction indicators.• Front side marker lamps.• Side direction indicators.• Brake and rear lamps.• Central high mounted brake lamp.• Rear direction indicators.• Reversing lamps.

License Plate Lamp1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition

off.

259


Maintenance

E178598

2. Remove the screws that secure the lampassembly.

E178599

3. Remove the bulb.

BULB SPECIFICATION CHARTThe specified replacement bulbs are in thechart below. Headlamp bulbs must bemarked with an authorized D.O.T.(Department of Transportation) for NorthAmerica to affirm lamp performance, lightbrightness and pattern and safe visibility. Thecorrect bulbs will not damage the lampassembly or void the lamp assemblywarranty and will provide quality bulb burntime.

Trade numberFunction

D3S* Headlamp (high intensity discharge) Low and High

LED* Sidemarker - front

LED* Park lamp - front

7444NA* Turn lamp - front

H11Fog lamp

LEDSignal indicator mirror lamp

LEDApproach lamp

LED* Tail and brake lamp

260


Maintenance

Trade numberFunction

LED* Turn lamp - rear

LED* Backup lamp

W5WLicense plate lamp

LED* High-mount brake lamp

W5WInterior lamps

* To replace these lamps, see an authorized dealer.To replace instrument panel lights, see an authorized dealer.

261


Maintenance

CHANGING THE ENGINE AIRFILTER

WARNINGDo not start the engine with the aircleaner removed. This can causedamage not covered by the vehicle

Warranty and can result in serious injury.

When changing the air filter element, use onlythe air filter element listed. See Capacitiesand Specifications (page 296).For vehicles with EcoBoost engines, whenservicing the air cleaner, it is important thatno foreign material enters the air inductionsystem. The engine and turbocharger aresusceptible to damage from even smallparticles.Change the air filter element at the correctinterval. See Scheduled Maintenance(page 321).Note: Failure to use the correct air filterelement may result in severe engine damage.Resulting component damage may not becovered by the vehicle Warranty.To replace the air filter element do thefollowing:1. Switch the ignition off.

E173520

2. Remove the clips that secure the air filterhousing cover.

3. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.4. Remove the air filter element from the air

filter housing.5. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter

housing and cover to make sure no dirtgets in the engine and that you have agood seal.

6. Install a new air filter element.7. Install the air filter housing cover. Be

careful not to crimp the filter elementedges between the air filter housing andcover. This could cause filter damageand allow unfiltered air to enter theengine if it is not properly seated.

8. Engage the clips to secure the air filterhousing cover to the air filter housing.

262


Maintenance

GENERAL INFORMATIONYour Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer hasmany quality products available to clean your

vehicle and protect its finishes. CLEANING PRODUCTSFor best results, use the following productsor products of equivalent quality:

MaterialsSpecificationName

-Motorcraft Bug and Tar RemoverZC-42

-Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal CleanerZC-15

ESR-M14P4-AMotorcraft® Detail WashZC-3-A

-Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S.)ZC-20 (U.S.)

-Engine Shampoo-Motorcraft Leather and Vinyl Cleaner

ZC-56-Multi-Purpose Cleaner

WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant (U.S.)ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)

-Professional Strength Carpet and Upholstery CleanerZC-54

-Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S.)ZC-14 (U.S.)

ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (U.S.)ZC-23 (U.S.)

-Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire CleanerZC-37-A

263


Vehicle Care

CLEANING THE EXTERIORWash your vehicle regularly with cool orlukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo,we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash.• Never use strong household detergents

or soap, for example dish washing orlaundry liquid. These products candiscolor and spot painted surfaces.

• Never wash your vehicle when it is hot tothe touch, or during strong or directsunlight.

• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or softterry cloth towel to eliminate waterspotting.

• Immediately remove fuel spillages, birddroppings, insect deposits and road tar.These may cause damage to yourvehicle’s paintwork or trim over time. Werecommend Motorcraft Bug and TarRemover.

• Remove any exterior accessories, forexample antennas, before entering a carwash.

Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellentscan damage painted surfaces. If thesesubstances come in contact with your vehicle,wash the affected area as soon as possible.

Exterior Chrome Parts• Apply a high quality-cleaning product to

bumpers and other chrome parts. Followthe manufacturer’s instructions. Werecommend Motorcraft Custom BrightMetal Cleaner.

• Do not apply the cleaning product to hotsurfaces. Do not leave the cleaningproduct on chrome surfaces longer thanthe time recommended.

• Using other non-recommended cleanerscan result in severe and permanentcosmetic damage.

Note: Never use abrasive materials, forexample steel wool or plastic pads as they canscratch the chrome surface.Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metalcleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.

Exterior Plastic PartsFor routine cleaning we recommendMotorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease spotsare present, we recommend Motorcraft Bugand Tar Remover.

Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)

Hand washing your vehicle is preferredhowever, pressure washing may be usedunder the following conditions:• Do not use water pressure higher than

2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).• Do not use water hotter than 179°F

(82°C).• Use a spray with a 40° wide spray angle

pattern.• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)

distance and 90° angle to your vehicle'ssurface.

Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle atan angle to the vehicle's surface may damagegraphics and cause the edges to peel awayfrom the vehicle's surface.

UnderbodyFlush the complete underside of your vehiclefrequently. Keep body and door drain holesfree of debris or foreign material.

264


Vehicle Care

WAXINGRegular waxing is necessary to protect yourcar's paint from the elements. Werecommend that you wash and wax thepainted surface once or twice a year.When washing and waxing, park your vehiclein a shaded area out of direct sunlight. Alwayswash your vehicle before applying wax.• Use a quality wax that does not contain

abrasives.• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions

to apply and remove the wax.• Apply a small amount of wax in a

back-and-forth motion, not in circles.• Do not allow wax to come in contact with

any non-body (low-gloss black) coloredtrim. The wax will discolor or stain theparts over time.• Roof racks.• Bumpers.• Grained door handles.• Side moldings.• Mirror housings.• Windshield cowl area.

• Do not apply wax to glass areas.• After waxing, your car's paint should feel

smooth, and be free of streaks andsmudges.

CLEANING THE ENGINEEngines are more efficient when they areclean because grease and dirt buildup keepthe engine warmer than normal.When washing:• Take care when using a power washer to

clean the engine. The high-pressure fluidcould penetrate the sealed parts andcause damage.

• Do not spray a hot engine with cold waterto avoid cracking the engine block orother engine components.

• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo andDegreaser on all parts that requirecleaning and pressure rinse clean. InCanada, use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo.

• Never wash or rinse the engine while it ishot or running; water in the running enginemay cause internal damage.

• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, sparkplug wire or spark plug well, or the areain and around these locations.

• Cover the battery, power distribution box,and air filter assembly to prevent waterdamage when cleaning the engine.

CLEANING THE WINDOWS ANDWIPER BLADESCar wash chemicals and environmentalfallout can result in windshield and wiperblade contamination. Dirty windshield andwipers will result in poor windshield wiperoperation. Keep the windshield and wiperblades clean to maintain windshield wiperperformance.

265


Vehicle Care

To clean the windshield and wiper blades:• Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive

glass cleaner. When cleaning the interiorof the windshield, avoid getting any glasscleaner on the instrument panel or doorpanels. Wipe any glass cleaner off thesesurfaces immediately.

• For windshields contaminated with treesap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean theentire windshield using steel wool (nogreater than 0000 grade) in a circularmotion and rinse with water.

• Clean the wiper blades with isopropylrubbing alcohol or windshield washerconcentrate.

Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharpobjects to clean or remove decals from theinside of the heated rear window. The vehiclewarranty does not cover damage caused tothe heated rear window grid lines.

CLEANING THE INTERIOR

WARNINGSDo not use cleaning solvents, bleach ordye on the vehicle’s safety belts, asthese actions may weaken the belt

webbing.

WARNINGSOn vehicles equipped withseat-mounted airbags, do not usechemical solvents or strong detergents.

Such products could contaminate the sideairbag system and affect performance of theside airbag in a collision.

For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety beltsand seats equipped with side airbags:• Remove dust and loose dirt with a

vacuum cleaner.• Remove light stains and soil with

Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet& Upholstery Cleaner.

• If grease or tar is present on the material,spot-clean the area first with MotorcraftSpot and Stain Remover. In Canada, useMotorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner.

• If a ring forms on the fabric after spotcleaning, clean the entire areaimmediately (but do not oversaturate)or the ring will set.

• Do not use household cleaning productsor glass cleaners, which can stain anddiscolor the fabric and affect the flameretardant abilities of the seat materials.

CLEANING THE INSTRUMENTPANEL AND INSTRUMENTCLUSTER LENS

WARNINGDo not use chemical solvents or strongdetergents when cleaning the steeringwheel or instrument panel to avoid

contamination of the airbag system.

Note: Follow the same procedure as cleaningleather seats for cleaning leather instrumentpanels and leather interior trim surfaces. SeeCleaning Leather Seats (page 267).Clean the instrument panel and cluster lenswith a clean, damp and soft cloth, then usea clean, dry and soft cloth to dry these areas.• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase

the gloss of the upper portion of theinstrument panel. The dull finish in thisarea helps protect you from undesirablewindshield reflection.

• Do not use any household cleaningproducts or glass cleaners as these maydamage the finish of the instrumentpanel, interior trim and cluster lens.

266


Vehicle Care

• Wash or wipe your hands clean if youhave been in contact with certainproducts such as insect repellent andsuntan lotion to avoid possible damageto the interior painted surfaces.

• Do not allow air fresheners and handsanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces. Ifa spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Yourwarranty may not cover these damages.

If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has beenspilled on the instrument panel or on interiortrim surfaces:1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, soft

cloth as quickly as possible.2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and

Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially availableleather cleaning product for automotiveinteriors. Test any cleaner or stainremover on an inconspicuous area.

3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with aclean, soft cloth and a mild soap andwater solution. Dry the area with a clean,soft cloth.

4. If necessary, apply more soap and watersolution or cleaning product to a clean,soft cloth and press it onto the soiledarea. Allow this to set at roomtemperature for 30 minutes.

5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with aclean, damp cloth, use a rubbing motionfor 60 seconds on the soiled area.

6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.

CLEANING LEATHER SEATSNote: Follow the same procedure as cleaningleather seats for cleaning leather instrumentpanels and leather interior trim surfaces.For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with asoft, damp cloth and a mild soap and watersolution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.For cleaning and removing stains such as dyetransfer, use Motorcraft Premium Leatherand Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially availableleather cleaning product for automotiveinteriors.Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on aninconspicuous area.You should:• Remove dust and loose dirt with a

vacuum cleaner.• Clean and treat spills and stains as soon

as possible.

Do not use the following products as thesemay damage the leather:• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based

leather conditioners.• Household cleaners.• Alcohol solutions.• Solvents or cleaners intended specifically

for rubber, vinyl and plastics.

REPAIRING MINOR PAINTDAMAGEAuthorized dealers have touch-up paint tomatch your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle colorcode is printed on a sticker on the front,left-hand side door jamb. Take your colorcode to your authorized dealer to make sureyou get the correct color.Before repairing minor paint damage, use acleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and TarRemover to remove particles such as birddroppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots,road salt and industrial fallout.Always read the instructions before usingcleaning products.

267


Vehicle Care

CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELSNote: Do not apply a cleaning chemical towarm or hot wheel rims and covers.Note: Some automatic car washes may causedamage to the finish on your wheel rims andcovers.Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-dutycleaners in combination with brush agitationto remove brake dust and dirt, could wearaway the clear coat finish over a period time.Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based orhigh caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool,fuels or strong household detergents.Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for anextended period after cleaning the wheels witha wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a fewminutes before doing so. This will reduce therisk of increased corrosion of the brake discs.Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coatedwith a clear coat paint finish. To maintaintheir condition we recommend that you:• Clean the wheels weekly using Motorcraft

Wheel and Tire Cleaner. Apply usingmanufacturer's instructions.

• Use a sponge to remove heavy depositsof dirt and brake dust accumulation.

• Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream ofwater when you have completed thecleaning process.

• To remove tar and grease, use MotorcraftBug and Tar Remover.

VEHICLE STORAGEIf you plan on storing your vehicle for 30 daysor more, read the following maintenancerecommendations to make sure your vehiclestays in good operating condition.We engineer and test all motor vehicles andtheir components for reliable, regular driving.Under various conditions, long-term storagemay lead to degraded engine performanceor failure unless you use specific precautionsto preserve engine components.

General• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated

place.• Protect from sunlight, if possible.• If vehicles are stored outside, they require

regular maintenance to protect againstrust and damage.

Body• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove

dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exteriorsurfaces, rear-wheel housing and theunderside of front fenders.

• Periodically wash your vehicle if it isstored in exposed locations.

• Touch-up exposed or primed metal toprevent rust.

• Cover chrome and stainless steel partswith a thick coat of auto wax to preventdiscoloration. Re-wax as necessary whenyou wash your vehicle.

• Lubricate all hood, door and luggagecompartment hinges and latches with alight grade oil.

• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and

solvents.

268


Vehicle Care

Engine• Change the engine oil and filter prior to

storage because used engine oil containscontaminates which may cause enginedamage.

• Start the engine every 15 days for aminimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idlewith the climate controls set to defrostuntil the engine reaches normal operatingtemperature.

• With your foot on the brake, shift throughall the gears while the engine is running.

• We recommend that you change theengine oil before you use your vehicleagain.

Fuel system• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel

until the first automatic shutoff of the fuelpump nozzle.

Cooling system• Protect against freezing temperatures.• When removing your vehicle from

storage, check coolant fluid level. Confirmthat there are no cooling system leaksand that fluid is at the recommendedlevel.

Battery• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep

connections clean.• If storing your vehicle for more than 30

days without recharging the battery, werecommend that you disconnect thebattery cables to maintain battery chargefor quick starting.

Note: It is necessary to reset memory featuresif battery cables are disconnected.

Brakes• Make sure the brakes and parking brake

release fully.

Tires• Maintain recommended air pressure.

Miscellaneous• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and

pins under your vehicle are covered withgrease to prevent rust.

• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) every15 days to lubricate working parts andprevent corrosion.

Removing Vehicle From StorageWhen your vehicle is ready to come out ofstorage, do the following:• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or

grease film build-up on window surfaces.• Check windshield wipers for any

deterioration.• Check under the hood for any foreign

material that may have collected duringstorage such as mice or squirrel nests.

• Check the exhaust for any foreignmaterial that may have collected duringstorage.

• Check tire pressures and set tire inflationper the Tire Label.

• Check brake pedal operation. Drive yourvehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and forth toremove rust build-up.

• Check fluid levels (including coolant, oiland gas) to make sure there are no leaks,and fluids are at recommended levels.

• If you remove the battery, clean thebattery cable ends and check for damage.

Contact an authorized dealer if you have anyconcerns or issues.

269


Vehicle Care

TIRE CARE

Information About Uniform TireQuality Grading

E142542

Tire Quality Grades apply to newpneumatic passenger car tires. TheQuality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder andmaximum section width. Forexample: Treadwear 200 TractionAA Temperature A.

These Tire Quality Grades aredetermined by standards that theUnited States Department ofTransportation has set.Tire Quality Grades apply to newpneumatic passenger car tires. Theydo not apply to deep tread,winter-type snow tires, space-saveror temporary use spare tires, lighttruck or LT type tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of 10 to 12inches or limited production tires asdefined in Title 49 Code of FederalRegulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).U.S. Department ofTransportation Tire qualitygrades: The U.S. Department ofTransportation requires Ford MotorCompany to give you the followinginformation about tire gradesexactly as the government haswritten it.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government test course.For example, a tire graded 150would wear 1 ½ times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actualconditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices, anddifferences in road characteristicsand climate.

270


Wheels and Tires

Traction AA A B C

WARNINGThe traction grade assigned tothis tire is based on

straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning or peak tractioncharacteristics.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest are AA, A, B, and C. Thegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Temperature A B C

WARNINGThe temperature grade for thistire is established for a tire that

is properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tirefailure. The grade C corresponds toa level of performance which allpassenger car tires must meet under

the Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 139. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory testwheel than the minimum requiredby law.Glossary of Tire Terminology• Tire label: A label showing the

original equipment tire sizes,recommended inflation pressureand the maximum weight thevehicle can carry.

• Tire Identification Number: Anumber on the sidewall of eachtire providing information aboutthe tire brand and manufacturingplant, tire size and date ofmanufacture. Also referred to asDOT code.

• Inflation pressure: A measureof the amount of air in a tire.

271


Wheels and Tires

• Standard load: A class ofP-metric or Metric tires designedto carry a maximum load at setpressure. For example: ForP-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) or36 (2.5 bar) depending on tiresize and for Metric tires 36 psi(2.5 bar). Increasing the inflationpressure beyond this pressurewill not increase the tire’s loadcarrying capability.

• Extra load: A class of P-metricor Metric tires designed to carrya heavier maximum load at 42psi (2.9 bar). Increasing theinflation pressure beyond thispressure will not increase thetire’s load carrying capability.

• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit ofair pressure.

• PSI: Pounds per square inch, astandard unit of air pressure.

• Cold tire pressure: The tirepressure when the vehicle hasbeen stationary and out of directsunlight for an hour or more andprior to the vehicle being drivenfor 1 mile (1.6 km).

• Recommended inflationpressure: The cold inflationpressure found on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label(affixed to either the door hingepillar, door-latch post, or the dooredge that meets the door-latchpost, next to the driver's seatingposition), or Tire Label locatedon the B-Pillar or the edge of thedriver’s door.

• B-pillar: The structural memberat the side of the vehicle behindthe front door

• Bead area of the tire: Area ofthe tire next to the rim.

• Sidewall of the tire: Areabetween the bead area and thetread.

• Tread area of the tire: Area ofthe perimeter of the tire thatcontacts the road when mountedon the vehicle.

• Rim: The metal support (wheel)for a tire or a tire and tubeassembly upon which the tirebeads are seated.

Information Contained on theTire SidewallBoth United States and CanadaFederal regulations require tiremanufacturers to placestandardized information on thesidewall of all tires. This informationidentifies and describes thefundamental characteristics of thetire and also provides a U.S. DOTTire Identification Number for safetystandard certification and in case ofa recall.

272


Wheels and Tires

Information on P Type Tires

H

I

J

KL

M

A

BC D E

FG

E142543

P215/65R15 95H is an example of atire size, load index and speed rating.The definitions of these items arelisted below. (Note that the tire size,load index and speed rating for yourvehicle may be different from thisexample.)

A. P: Indicates a tire, designated bythe Tire and Rim Association, thatmay be used for service on cars,sport utility vehicles, minivans andlight trucks. Note: If your tire sizedoes not begin with a letter this maymean it is designated by either theEuropean Tire and Rim TechnicalOrganization or the Japan TireManufacturing Association.B. 215: Indicates the nominal widthof the tire in millimeters fromsidewall edge to sidewall edge. Ingeneral, the larger the number, thewider the tire.C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratiowhich gives the tire's ratio of heightto width.D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rimdiameter in inches. If you changeyour wheel size, you will have topurchase new tires to match thenew wheel diameter.

F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index.It is an index that relates to howmuch weight a tire can carry. Youmay find this information in yourowner’s manual. If not, contact alocal tire dealer.Note: You may not find thisinformation on all tires because it isnot required by federal law.G. H: Indicates the tire's speedrating. The speed rating denotes thespeed at which a tire is designed tobe driven for extended periods oftime under a standard condition ofload and inflation pressure. The tireson your vehicle may operate atdifferent conditions for load andinflation pressure. These speedratings may need to be adjusted forthe difference in conditions. Theratings range from 81 mph (130km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h).These ratings are listed in thefollowing chart.

273


Wheels and Tires

Note: You may not find thisinformation on all tires because it isnot required by federal law.

mph ( km/h)Letterrating

81 mph (130 km/h)M87 mph (140 km/h)N99 mph (159 km/h)Q106 mph (171 km/h)R112 mph (180 km/h)S118 mph (190 km/h)T124 mph (200 km/h)U130 mph (210 km/h)H149 mph (240 km/h)V

mph ( km/h)Letterrating

168 mph (270 km/h)W186 mph (299 km/h)Y

Note: For tires with a maximumspeed capability over 149 mph (240km/h), tire manufacturers sometimesuse the letters ZR. For those with amaximum speed capability over 186mph (299 km/h), tire manufacturersalways use the letters ZR.

H. U.S. DOT Tire IdentificationNumber: This begins with theletters DOT and indicates that thetire meets all federal standards. Thenext two numbers or letters are theplant code designating where it wasmanufactured, the next two are thetire size code and the last fournumbers represent the week andyear the tire was built. For example,the numbers 317 mean the 31st weekof 1997. After 2000 the numbers goto four digits. For example, 2501

means the 25th week of 2001. Thenumbers in between areidentification codes used fortraceability. This information is usedto contact customers if a tire defectrequires a recall.I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, orAT: All Terrain, orAS: All Season.J. Tire Ply Composition andMaterial Used: Indicates thenumber of plies or the number oflayers of rubber-coated fabric in thetire tread and sidewall. Tiremanufacturers also must indicatethe ply materials in the tire and thesidewall, which include steel, nylon,polyester, and others.

274


Wheels and Tires

K. Maximum Load: Indicates themaximum load in kilograms andpounds that can be carried by thetire. See the Safety ComplianceCertification Label (affixed to eitherthe door hinge pillar, door-latchpost, or the door edge that meetsthe door-latch post, next to thedriver's seating position), for thecorrect tire pressure for your vehicle.L. Treadwear, Traction andTemperature Grades:

275


Wheels and Tires

• Treadwear The treadwear gradeis a comparative rating based onthe wear rate of the tire whentested under controlledconditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. Forexample, a tire graded 150 wouldwear one and one-half times aswell on the government courseas a tire graded 100.

• Traction: The traction grades,from highest to lowest are AA, A,B, and C. The grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.

• Temperature: The temperaturegrades are A (the highest), B andC, representing the tire'sresistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested undercontrolled conditions on a

specified indoor laboratory testwheel.

M. Maximum Inflation Pressure:Indicates the tire manufacturers'maximum permissible pressure orthe pressure at which the maximumload can be carried by the tire. Thispressure is normally higher than thevehicle manufacturer'srecommended cold inflationpressure which can be found on theSafety Compliance CertificationLabel (affixed to either the doorhinge pillar, door-latch post, or thedoor edge that meets the door-latchpost, next to the driver's seatingposition), or Tire Label which islocated on the B-Pillar or the edgeof the driver’s door. The coldinflation pressure should never beset lower than the recommendedpressure on the vehicle label.The tire suppliers may haveadditional markings, notes orwarnings such as standard load orradial tubeless.

Additional InformationContained on the Tire Sidewallfor LT Type TiresNote: Tire Quality Grades do notapply to this type of tire.

A

BC

BDE142544

276


Wheels and Tires

LT type tires have some additionalinformation beyond those of P typetires; these differences aredescribed below.A. LT: Indicates a tire, designatedby the Tire and Rim Association,that is intended for service on lighttrucks.B. Load Range and Load InflationLimits: Indicates the tire'sload-carrying capabilities and itsinflation limits.C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) atpsi (kPa) cold: Indicates themaximum load and tire pressurewhen the tire is used as a dual;defined as four tires on the rear axle(a total of six or more tires on thevehicle).D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg)at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates themaximum load and tire pressurewhen the tire is used as a single;defined as two tires (total) on therear axle.

Information on T Type TiresT145/80D16 is an example of a tiresize.Note: The temporary tire size for yourvehicle may be different from thisexample. Tire Quality Grades do notapply to this type of tire.

AB C D

E

E142545

T type tires have some additionalinformation beyond those of P typetires; these differences aredescribed below:

277


Wheels and Tires

A. T: Indicates a type of tire,designated by the Tire and RimAssociation, that is intended fortemporary service on cars, sportutility vehicles, minivans and lighttrucks.B. 145: Indicates the nominal widthof the tire in millimeters fromsidewall edge to sidewall edge. Ingeneral, the larger the number, thewider the tire.C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratiowhich gives the tire's ratio of heightto width. Numbers of 70 or lowerindicate a short sidewall.D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.R: Indicates a radial type tire.E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rimdiameter in inches. If you changeyour wheel size, you will have topurchase new tires to match thenew wheel diameter.

Location of the Tire LabelYou will find a Tire Label containingtire inflation pressure by tire size andother important information locatedon the B-Pillar or the edge of thedriver’s door.Inflating Your TiresSafe operation of your vehiclerequires that your tires are properlyinflated. Remember that a tire canlose up to half of its air pressurewithout appearing flat.Every day before you drive, checkyour tires. If one looks lower thanthe others, use a tire gauge to checkpressure of all tires and adjust ifrequired.At least once a month and beforelong trips, inspect each tire andcheck the tire pressure with a tiregauge (including spare, if equipped).Inflate all tires to the inflationpressure recommended by FordMotor Company.

You are strongly urged to buy areliable tire pressure gauge, asautomatic service station gaugesmay be inaccurate. Fordrecommends the use of a digital ordial-type tire pressure gauge ratherthan a stick-type tire pressuregauge.Use the recommended cold inflationpressure for optimum tireperformance and wear.Under-inflation or over-inflationmay cause uneven treadwearpatterns

278


Wheels and Tires

WARNINGUnder-inflation is the mostcommon cause of tire failures

and may result in severe tirecracking, tread separation orblowout, with unexpected loss ofvehicle control and increased risk ofinjury. Under-inflation increasessidewall flexing and rollingresistance, resulting in heat buildupand internal damage to the tire. Italso may result in unnecessary tirestress, irregular wear, loss of vehiclecontrol and accidents. A tire canlose up to half of its air pressure andnot appear to be flat!

Always inflate your tires to the Fordrecommended inflation pressureeven if it is less than the maximuminflation pressure information foundon the tire. The Ford recommendedtire inflation pressure is found on theSafety Compliance CertificationLabel (affixed to either the doorhinge pillar, door-latch post, or thedoor edge that meets the door-latch

post, next to the driver's seatingposition), or Tire Label which islocated on the B-Pillar or the edgeof the driver’s door. Failure to followthe tire pressure recommendationscan cause uneven treadwearpatterns and adversely affect theway your vehicle handlesMaximum Inflation Pressure isthe tire manufacturer's maximumpermissible pressure and thepressure at which the maximumload can be carried by the tire. Thispressure is normally higher than themanufacturer’s recommended coldinflation pressure which can befound on the Safety ComplianceCertification Label (affixed to eitherthe door hinge pillar, door-latchpost, or the door edge that meetsthe door-latch post, next to thedriver's seating position), or TireLabel which is located on the

B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’sdoor. The cold inflation pressureshould never be set lower than therecommended pressure on theSafety Compliance CertificationLabel or Tire Label.When weather temperaturechanges occur, tire inflationpressures also change. A 10°F (6°C)temperature drop can cause acorresponding drop of 1 psi (7 kPa)in inflation pressure. Check your tirepressures frequently and adjustthem to the proper pressure whichcan be found on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label orTire Label.To check the pressure in your tire(s):1. Make sure the tires are cool,

meaning they are not hot fromdriving even a mile.

279


Wheels and Tires

Note: If you are checking tirepressure when the tire is hot, (forexample driven more than 1 mile [1.6kilometers]), never bleed or reduceair pressure. The tires are hot fromdriving and it is normal for pressuresto increase above recommendedcold pressures. A hot tire at or belowrecommended cold inflation pressurecould be significantly under-inflated.Note: If you have to drive a distanceto get air for your tire(s), check andrecord the tire pressure first and addthe appropriate air pressure when youget to the pump. It is normal for tiresto heat up and the air pressure insideto go up as you drive.2. Remove the cap from the valve

on one tire, then firmly press thetire gauge onto the valve andmeasure the pressure.

3. Add enough air to reach therecommended air pressure.

Note: If you overfill the tire, releaseair by pressing on the metal stem inthe center of the valve. Then recheckthe pressure with your tire gauge.4. Replace the valve cap.5. Repeat this procedure for each

tire, including the spare.Note: Some spare tires operate at ahigher inflation pressure than theother tires. For T type mini-sparetires, see the Dissimilar spare wheeland tire assembly information for adescription. Store and maintain at 60psi (4.15 bar). For full-size anddissimilar spare tires, see theDissimilar spare wheel and tireassembly information for adescription. Store and maintain atthe higher of the front and rearinflation pressure as shown on theTire Label.6. Visually inspect the tires to make

sure there are no nails or otherobjects embedded that couldpoke a hole in the tire and causean air leak.

7. Check the sidewalls to make surethere are no gouges, cuts orbulges.

Inspecting Your Tires and WheelValve StemsPeriodically inspect the tire treadsfor uneven or excessive wear andremove objects such as stones, nailsor glass that may be wedged in thetread grooves. Check the tire andvalve stems for holes, cracks, or cutsthat may permit air leakage andrepair or replace the tire and replacethe valve stem. Inspect the tiresidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruisesand other signs of damage orexcessive wear. If internal damageto the tire is suspected, have the tiredemounted and inspected in caseit needs to be repaired or replaced.For your safety, tires that aredamaged or show signs of excessivewear should not be used becausethey are more likely to blow out orfail.

280


Wheels and Tires

Improper or inadequate vehiclemaintenance can cause tires towear abnormally. Inspect all yourtires, including the spare, frequently,and replace them if one or more ofthe following conditions exist:Tire Wear

E142546

When the tread is worn down to onesixteenth of an inch (2 millimeters),tires must be replaced to helpprevent your vehicle from skiddingand hydroplaning. Built-in treadwearindicators, or wear bars, which looklike narrow strips of smooth rubberacross the tread will appear on thetire when the tread is worn down toone sixteenth of an inch (2millimeters).When the tire tread wears down tothe same height as these wear bars,the tire is worn out and must bereplaced.

DamagePeriodically inspect the tire treadsand sidewalls for damage (such asbulges in the tread or sidewalls,cracks in the tread groove andseparation in the tread or sidewall).If damage is observed or suspectedhave the tire inspected by a tireprofessional. Tires can be damagedduring off-road use, so inspectionafter off-road use is alsorecommended.

281


Wheels and Tires

Age

WARNINGTires degrade over timedepending on many factors

such as weather, storage conditions,and conditions of use (load, speed,inflation pressure) the tiresexperience throughout their lives.

In general, tires should be replacedafter six years regardless of treadwear. However, heat caused by hotclimates or frequent high loadingconditions can accelerate the agingprocess and may require tires to bereplaced more frequently.

You should replace your spare tirewhen you replace the road tires orafter six years due to aging even if ithas not been used.

U.S. DOT Tire IdentificationNumberBoth U.S. and Canada Federalregulations require tiremanufacturers to placestandardized information on thesidewall of all tires. This informationidentifies and describes thefundamental characteristics of thetire and also provides a U.S. DOTTire Identification Number for safetystandard certification and in case ofa recall.This begins with the letters DOT andindicates that the tire meets allfederal standards. The next twonumbers or letters are the plantcode designating where it wasmanufactured, the next two are thetire size code and the last fournumbers represent the week andyear the tire was built. For example,the numbers 317 mean the 31st weekof 1997. After 2000 the numbers goto four digits. For example, 2501

means the 25th week of 2001. Thenumbers in between areidentification codes used fortraceability. This information is usedto contact customers if a tire defectrequires a recall.Tire Replacement RequirementsYour vehicle is equipped with tiresdesigned to provide a safe ride andhandling capability.

WARNINGSOnly use replacement tires andwheels that are the same size,

load index, speed rating and type(such as P-metric versus LT-metricor all-season versus all-terrain) asthose originally provided by Ford.The recommended tire and wheelsize may be found on either theSafety Compliance CertificationLabel (affixed to either the doorhinge pillar, door-latch post, or thedoor edge that meets the door-latchpost, next to the driver's seatingposition), or the Tire Label which is

282


Wheels and Tires

WARNINGSlocated on the B-Pillar or edge ofthe driver’s door. If this informationis not found on these labels thenyou should contact your authorizeddealer as soon as possible. Use ofany tire or wheel not recommendedby Ford can affect the safety andperformance of your vehicle, whichcould result in an increased risk ofloss of vehicle control, vehiclerollover, personal injury and death.Additionally the use ofnon-recommended tires and wheelscould cause steering, suspension,axle, transfer case or power transferunit failure. If you have questionsregarding tire replacement, contactyour authorized dealer as soon aspossible.

WARNINGSTo reduce the risk of seriousinjury, when mounting

replacement tires and wheels, youshould not exceed the maximumpressure indicated on the sidewallof the tire to set the beads withoutadditional precautions listed below.If the beads do not seat at themaximum pressure indicated,re-lubricate and try again

When inflating the tire for mountingpressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)greater than the maximum pressureon the tire sidewall, the followingprecautions must be taken toprotect the person mounting thetire:

1. Make sure that you have thecorrect tire and wheel size.

2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheelbead seat area again.

WARNINGS3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet(3.66 meters) away from the wheeland tire assembly.

4. Use both eye and ear protection.

For a mounting pressure more than20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than themaximum pressure, a Ford dealeror other tire service professionalshould do the mounting.

Always inflate steel carcass tireswith a remote air fill with the personinflating standing at a minimum of12 feet (3.66 meters) away from thewheel and tire assembly

Important: Remember to replacethe wheel valve stems when theroad tires are replaced on yourvehicleIt is recommended that the twofront tires or two rear tires generallybe replaced as a pair.

283


Wheels and Tires

The tire pressure sensors mountedin the wheels (originally installed onyour vehicle) are not designed to beused in aftermarket wheels.The use of wheels or tires notrecommended by Ford MotorCompany may affect the operationof your tire pressure monitoringsystem.If the tire pressure monitoringsystem indicator is flashing, yoursystem is malfunctioning. Yourreplacement tire might beincompatible with your tire pressuremonitoring system, or somecomponent of the system may bedamaged.Safety Practices

WARNINGSIf your vehicle is stuck in snow,mud or sand, do not rapidly

spin the tires; spinning the tires cantear the tire and cause an explosion.A tire can explode in as little as threeto five seconds.

WARNINGSDo not spin the wheels at over35 mph (56 km/h). The tires

may fail and injure a passenger orbystander.

Driving habits have a great deal todo with your tire mileage and safety.• Observe posted speed limits• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns• Avoid potholes and objects on

the road• Do not run over curbs or hit the

tire against a curb when parkingHighway HazardsNo matter how carefully you drivethere is always the possibility thatyou may eventually have a flat tireon the highway. Drive slowly to theclosest safe area out of traffic. Thismay further damage the flat tire, butyour safety is more important.

If you feel a sudden vibration or ridedisturbance while driving, or yoususpect your tire or vehicle has beendamaged, immediately reduce yourspeed. Drive with caution until youcan safely pull off the road. Stopand inspect the tires for damage. Ifa tire is under-inflated or damaged,deflate it, remove the wheel andreplace it with your spare tire andwheel (if provided). If you cannotdetect a cause, have the vehicletowed to the nearest repair facilityor tire dealer to have the vehicleinspected.Tire and Wheel AlignmentA bad jolt from hitting a curb orpothole can cause the front end ofyour vehicle to become misalignedor cause damage to your tires. Ifyour vehicle seems to pull to oneside when you’re driving, the wheelsmay be out of alignment. Have anauthorized dealer check the wheelalignment periodically.

284


Wheels and Tires

Wheel misalignment in the front orthe rear can cause uneven and rapidtreadwear of your tires and shouldbe corrected by an authorizeddealer. Front-wheel drive vehiclesand those with an independent rearsuspension (if equipped) mayrequire alignment of all four wheels.The tires should also be balancedperiodically. An unbalanced tire andwheel assembly may result inirregular tire wear.Tire RotationNote: If your tires show uneven wearask an authorized dealer to check forand correct any wheel misalignment,tire imbalance or mechanicalproblem involved before tire rotation.

Note: Your vehicle may be equippedwith a dissimilar spare wheel and tireassembly. A dissimilar spare wheeland tire assembly is defined as aspare wheel and tire assembly thatis different in brand, size orappearance from the road tires andwheels. If you have a dissimilar sparewheel and tire assembly it is intendedfor temporary use only and shouldnot be used in a tire rotation.Note: After having your tires rotated,inflation pressure must be checkedand adjusted to the vehiclerequirements.Rotating your tires at therecommended interval (as indicatedin the Scheduled Maintenancechapter) will help your tires wearmore evenly, providing better tireperformance and longer tire life.Front-wheel drive and all-wheeldrive vehicles (front tires on the leftside of the diagram)

E142547

Sometimes irregular tire wear canbe corrected by rotating the tires.

USING SNOW CHAINS

WARNINGSIf you choose to install snow tires onyour vehicle, they must be the samesize, construction, and load range as

the original tires listed on the tire placard, andthey must be installed on all four wheels.Mixing tires of different size or constructionon your vehicle can adversely affect yourvehicle's handling and braking, and may leadto loss of vehicle control.

285


Wheels and Tires

WARNINGSDo not use snow chains or cables onthis vehicle as they may cause damageto your vehicle which may lead to loss

of vehicle control.

Snow chains have not been approved for useon your vehicle.The original equipment tires on your vehiclemay have an all-weather tread design toprovide traction, handling, and brakingperformance in year-round driving. You mayinstall snow tires for improved traction whendriving in areas with sustained periods ofsnow or icy driving conditions.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM

WARNINGThe tire pressure monitoring system isnot a substitute for manually checkingtire pressure. The tire pressure should

be checked periodically (at least monthly)using a tire gauge, see Inflating your tires inthis chapter. Failure to properly maintain yourtire pressure could increase the risk of tirefailure, loss of control, vehicle rollover andpersonal injury.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated to

the inflation pressure recommended by thevehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placardor tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehiclehas tires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you should determinethe proper tire inflation pressure for thosetires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantly under-inflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pressuretelltale illuminates, you should stop andcheck your tires as soon as possible, andinflate them to the proper pressure. Drivingon a significantly under-inflated tire causesthe tire to overheat and can lead to tirefailure. Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and may affectthe vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is thedriver’s responsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination ofthe TPMS low tire pressure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the telltalewill flash for approximately one minute andthen remain continuously illuminated. Thissequence will continue upon subsequentvehicle start-ups as long as the malfunctionexists.When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able todetect or signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installation ofreplacement or alternate tires or wheels onthe vehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one ormore tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensurethat the replacement or alternate tires andwheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

286


Wheels and Tires

The tire pressure monitoring system complieswith part 15 of the FCC rules and withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions: (1)This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) This device must acceptany interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changing Tires With a Tire PressureMonitoring System

E142549

Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tirepressure sensor located inside the wheel andtire assembly cavity. The pressure sensor isattached to the valve stem. The pressuresensor is covered by the tire and is not visibleunless the tire is removed. Take care whenchanging the tire to avoid damaging the sensorYou should always have your tires servicedby an authorized dealer.Check the tire pressure periodically (at leastmonthly) using an accurate tire gauge. SeeInflating Your Tires in this chapter.

Understanding Your Tire PressureMonitoring SystemThe tire pressure monitoring systemmeasures pressure in your four road tires andsends the tire pressure readings to yourvehicle. The low tire pressure warning lightwill turn on if the tire pressure is significantlylow. Once the light is illuminated, your tiresare under-inflated and need to be inflated tothe manufacturer’s recommended tirepressure. Even if the light turns on and a shorttime later turns off, your tire pressure stillneeds to be checked.

When Your Temporary Spare Tire isInstalledWhen one of your road tires needs to bereplaced with the temporary spare, thesystem will continue to identify an issue toremind you that the damaged road wheeland tire assembly needs to be repaired andput back on your vehicle.To restore the full function of the tire pressuremonitoring system, have the damaged roadwheel and tire assembly repaired andremounted on your vehicle.

When You Believe Your System is NotOperating ProperlyThe main function of the tire pressuremonitoring system is to warn you when yourtires need air. It can also warn you in theevent the system is no longer capable offunctioning as intended. See the followingchart for information concerning your tirepressure monitoring system:

287


Wheels and Tires

Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure warning light

Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tiresin this chapter. After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’srecommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label (located onthe edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the vehicle must be drivenfor at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the lightturns off.

Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light

Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstallit on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description onhow the system functions, see When your temporary spare tireis installed in this section.

Spare tire in use

If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use butthe light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon aspossible.

TPMS malfunction

Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstallit on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description onhow the system functions, see When your temporary spare tireis installed in this section.

Spare tire in useFlashing warning light

If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use butthe light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon aspossible.

TPMS malfunction

288


Wheels and Tires

When Inflating Your TiresWhen putting air into your tires (such as at agas station or in your garage), the tirepressure monitoring system may not respondimmediately to the air added to your tires.It may take up to two minutes of driving over20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn offafter you have filled your tires to therecommended inflation pressure

How Temperature Affects Your TirePressureThe tire pressure monitoring system monitorstire pressure in each pneumatic tire. Whiledriving in a normal manner, a typicalpassenger tire inflation pressure may increaseabout 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 kPa) from a coldstart situation. If the vehicle is stationaryovernight with the outside temperaturesignificantly lower than the daytimetemperature, the tire pressure may decreaseabout 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C)in ambient temperature. This lower pressurevalue may be detected by the tire pressuremonitoring system as being significantlylower than the recommended inflationpressure and activate the system warninglight for low tire pressure. If the low tirepressure warning light is on, visually checkeach tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or

more tires are flat, repair as necessary. Checkthe air pressure in the road tires. If any tire isunder-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle tothe nearest location where air can be addedto the tires. Inflate all the tires to therecommended inflation pressure.

CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL

WARNINGSThe use of tire sealant may damageyour tire pressure monitoring systemand should only be used in roadside

emergencies. If you must use a sealant, theFord Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be used.The tire pressure monitoring system sensorand valve stem on the wheel must bereplaced by an authorized dealer after use ofthe sealant.

If the tire pressure monitor sensorbecomes damaged, it will no longerfunction. See Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (page 286).

Note: The tire pressure monitoring systemindicator light will illuminate when the sparetire is in use. To restore the full function of themonitoring system, all road wheels equippedwith tire pressure monitoring sensors must bemounted on the vehicle.

If you get a flat tire while driving, do not applythe brake heavily. Instead, gradually decreaseyour speed. Hold the steering wheel firmlyand slowly move to a safe place on the sideof the road.Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealerin order to prevent damage to the tirepressure monitoring system sensors. SeeTire Pressure Monitoring System (page286). Replace the spare tire with a road tireas soon as possible. During repairing orreplacing of the flat tire, have the authorizeddealer inspect the tire pressure monitoringsystem sensor for damage.

Dissimilar Spare Wheel and TireAssembly Information

WARNINGFailure to follow these guidelines couldresult in an increased risk of loss ofvehicle control, injury or death.

289


Wheels and Tires

If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire,then it is intended for temporary use only.This means that if you need to use it, youshould replace it as soon as possible with aroad wheel and tire assembly that is thesame size and type as the road tires andwheels that were originally provided by Ford.If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel isdamaged, it should be replaced rather thanrepaired.A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assemblyis defined as a spare wheel and tire assemblythat is different in brand, size or appearancefrom the road tires and wheels and can beone of three types:1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire beginswith the letter T for tire size and may haveTemporary Use Only molded in the sidewall.2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label onwheel: This spare tire has a label on thewheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND TIREASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY.When driving with one of the dissimilar sparetires listed above, do not:• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)• Load the vehicle beyond maximum

vehicle load rating listed on the SafetyCompliance Label.

• Tow a trailer.

• Use snow chains on the end of the vehiclewith the dissimilar spare tire.

• Use more than one dissimilar spare tireat a time.

• Use commercial car washing equipment.• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listedabove at any one wheel location can lead toimpairment of the following:• Handling, stability and braking

performance.• Comfort and noise.• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.• Winter weather driving capability.• Wet weather driving capability.• All-wheel driving capability (if

applicable).3. Full-size dissimilar spare without labelon wheelWhen driving with the full-size dissimilarspare wheel and tire assembly, do not:• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).• Use more than one dissimilar spare wheel

and tire assembly at a time.

• Use commercial car washing equipment.• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle

with the dissimilar spare wheel and tireassembly.

The usage of a full-size dissimilar sparewheel and tire assembly can lead toimpairment of the following:• Handling, stability and braking

performance.• Comfort and noise.• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.• Winter weather driving capability.• Wet weather driving capability.• All-wheel driving capability (if

applicable).• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable).When driving with the full-size dissimilarspare wheel and tire assembly additionalcaution should be given to:• Towing a trailer.• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper

body.• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo

rack.Drive cautiously when using a full-sizedissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly andseek service as soon as possible.

290


Wheels and Tires

Tire Change ProcedureWARNINGS

When one of the front wheels is off theground, the transmission alone will notprevent the vehicle from moving or

slipping off the jack, even if the transmissionis in park (P).

To help prevent the vehicle frommoving when you change a tire, be sureto place the transmission in park (P),

set the parking brake and block (in bothdirections) the wheel that is diagonallyopposite (other side and end of the vehicle)to the tire being changed.

Never get underneath a vehicle that issupported only by a jack. If the vehicleslips off the jack, you or someone else

could be seriously injured.Do not attempt to change a tire on theside of the vehicle close to movingtraffic. Pull far enough off the road to

avoid the danger of being hit when operatingthe jack or changing the wheel.

WARNINGSAlways use the jack provided as originalequipment with your vehicle. If using ajack other than the one provided as

original equipment with your vehicle, makesure the jack capacity is adequate for thevehicle weight, including any vehicle cargoor modifications.

1. Park on a level surface, set the parkingbrake and activate the hazard flashers.

2. Place the transmission in park (P) andturn the engine off.

E173211

3. Lift the trunk cargo cover, and remove thewing nut that secures the spare tire byturning it counterclockwise.

4. Lift and remove the spare tire from thetrunk.

291


Wheels and Tires

5. Remove the second wing nut that securesthe jack retention bracket by turning itcounterclockwise. Then remove the jackkit from your vehicle.

6. Remove the jack and the wrench fromthe felt bag. Fold down the wrench socketused to loosen the lug nuts and tooperate the jack.

Vehicle Jacking

E142551

1. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.2. If your vehicle has wheel covers, remove

them with the lug wrench tip and looseneach wheel lug nut one-half turncounterclockwise. Do not remove themuntil the wheel is raised off the ground.

3. The vehicle jacking points are shown here,and are depicted on the warning label onthe jack.

E145908

Note: Jack at the specified locations to avoiddamage to the vehicle.4. Small arrow-shaped marks on the sills

show the location of the jacking points.

E142553

5. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.6. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,

making sure the valve stem is facingoutward. Reinstall the lug nuts until thewheel is snug against the hub. Do not fullytighten the lug nuts until the wheel hasbeen lowered.

7. Lower the wheel by turning the jackhandle counterclockwise.

1

2

3 4

5

E75442

8. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lugnuts in the order shown. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 294).

292


Wheels and Tires

9. Put the flat tire, jack and lug wrenchaway. Make sure the jack is fastened soit does not rattle when you drive. Unblockthe wheels.

Stowing the flat tire1. Remove the extension bolt from the

exterior pocket of the felt bag.

E173212

2. Insert the straight end of the jackretention bracket through the eyelet ofthe angled bracket and swing theretention bracket over the jack. With thejack in place, place the end of theretention bracket over the threaded studin the trunk floor and secure it with theplastic wing nut.

3. Screw the extension bolt onto thethreaded stud of the jack retentionbracket.

E173213

4. Place the flat tire in the spare tire wellwith the wheel facing up.

5. Safely secure the wheel by screwing thelarge wing nut onto the extension bolt.

293


Wheels and Tires

Note: If you are stowing the temporary sparetire, place the tire over the jack and secure itwith the large wing nut.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSWheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications

WARNINGWhen a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or thesurface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to thehub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal

contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion, resultingin loss of control.

Ib-ft (Nm)*Bolt size

100 (135)1/2 x 20*Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changinga flat tire, wheel removal).

294


Wheels and Tires

E145950

Wheel pilot boreAInspect the wheel pilot bore and mountingsurface prior to installation. Remove anyvisible corrosion or loose particles.

295


Wheels and Tires

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™

3.5L EcoboostEngine

214Cubic inches

1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order

Coil on plugIgnition system

0.030 in (0.75 mm) - 0.033 in (0.85 mm)Spark plug gap

10.0:1Compression ratio

Drivebelt Routing

E191904

296


Capacities and Specifications

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.7L

3.7LEngine

226Cubic inches

1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order

Coil on plugIgnition system

0.049 in (1.25 mm) - 0.053 in (1.35 mm)Spark plug gap

10.5:1Compression ratio

Drivebelt Routing

E191904

297



MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™

Part NumberComponent

FA-1884Air filter.

BXT-65-650Battery.

FP-68Cabin air filter.

FL-500-SOil filter.

SP-534Spark plugs.

WW-2501 (driver side)Windshield wipers.WW-2043 (passenger side)

We recommend Motorcraft replacementparts available at your Ford dealer or atfordparts.com for scheduled maintenance.These parts meet or exceed Ford MotorCompany’s specifications and are engineeredfor your vehicle. The use of other parts mayimpact vehicle performance, emissions anddurability. Your warranty may be void for anydamage related to the use of other parts.

If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, usean oil filter that meets industry performancespecification SAE/USCAR-36.For spark plug replacement, contact anauthorized dealer. Replace the spark plugsat the appropriate intervals. See ScheduledMaintenance (page 321).

298



MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.7L

Part NumberComponent

FA-1884Air filter.

BXT-65-650Battery.

FP-68Cabin air filter.

FL-500-SOil filter.

SP-520Spark plugs.

WW-2501 (driver side)Windshield wipers.WW-2043 (passenger side)

We recommend Motorcraft replacementparts available at your Ford dealer or atfordparts.com for scheduled maintenance.These parts meet or exceed Ford MotorCompany’s specifications and are engineeredfor your vehicle. The use of other parts mayimpact vehicle performance, emissions anddurability. Your warranty may be void for anydamage related to the use of other parts.If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, usean oil filter that meets industry performancespecification SAE/USCAR-36.

For spark plug replacement, contact anauthorized dealer. Replace the spark plugsat the appropriate intervals. See ScheduledMaintenance (page 321).

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBERThe vehicle identification number is locatedon the left-hand side of the instrument panel.

299



E142476

Please note that in the graphic, XXXX isrepresentative of your vehicle identificationnumber.The Vehicle Identification Number containsthe following information:

E142477

World manufacturer identifierABrake system, Gross VehicleWeight Rating, Restraint Devicesand their locations

B

Make, vehicle line, series, body typeCEngine typeDCheck digitEModel yearFAssembly plantGProduction sequence numberH

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL

E167469

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration Regulations require that aSafety Compliance Certification Label beaffixed to a vehicle and prescribe where theSafety Compliance Certification Label maybe located. The Safety ComplianceCertification Label shall be affixed to eitherthe door hinge pillar, the door latch post, orthe edge of the door near the door latch, nextto the driver's seating position.

300



TRANSMISSION CODEDESIGNATION

E167814

The transmission code is on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label. The followingtable shows the transmission code along withthe transmission description.

CodeDescription

JSix-speed automatic transmission (6F50)

CSix-speed automatic transmission (6F55)

301



CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™Capacities

WARNINGThe air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant systemcan cause personal injury. Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel.

CapacityItem

6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil

11.4 qt (10.8 L)Engine coolant

Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid

2.4 pt (1.15 L)Rear axle fluid

11.6 qt (11 L)*Automatic transmission fluid

18 fl oz (0.53 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid

Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid

19.0 gal (71.9 L)Fuel tank

1.63 lb (0.74 kg)Air conditioning refrigerant

5.24 fl oz (155 ml)Air conditioning refrigerant compressor oil

*Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.

302



SpecificationsMaterials

SpecificationName

WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor OilXO-5W30-QSP

WSS-M2C946-ARecommended Motor oil (Canada):Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor OilCXO-5W30-LSP12

WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor OilMXO-5W30-QSP

WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor OilXO-5W30-QFS

WSS-M2C946-AOptional Motor oil (Canada):Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor OilCXO-5W30-LFS12

WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant PredilutedVC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant PredilutedCVC-3DIL-B

303



SpecificationName

WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake FluidPM-20

WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (U.S. and Mexico):Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle LubricantXY-80W90-QL

WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (Canada):Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle LubricantCXY-80W90-1L

WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid

XT-10-QLVC

WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid

CXT-10-LV12

WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (U.S. and Mexico):Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle LubricantXY-75W140-QL

WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (Canada):Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle LubricantCXY-75W140-1L

WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with BitterantZC-32-B2

304



SpecificationName

WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer FluidCXC-37-(A, B, D, F)

WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):Motorcraft R-134a RefrigerantYN-19

WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):Motorcraft R-134a RefrigerantCYN-16-R

WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):Motorcraft R-134a RefrigerantMYN-19

WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor OilYN-12-D

ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease SprayXL-5

305



SpecificationName

--Lock cylinders (U.S.):Penetrating and Lock LubricantXL-1

--Lock cylinders (Canada):Penetrating FluidCXC-51-A

--Lock cylinders (Mexico):Penetrating and Lock LubricantMXL-1

If you use oil and fluids that do not meet thedefined specification and viscosity grade, thismay lead to:• Component damage which is not covered

by the vehicle warranty.• Longer engine cranking periods.• Increased emission levels.• Reduced engine performance.• Reduced fuel economy.• Degraded brake performance.

We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for yourvehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not available, usemotor oils of the recommended viscositygrade that meet API SN requirements anddisplay the API Certification Mark for gasolineengines. Do not use oil labeled with API SNservice category unless the label alsodisplays the API certification mark.

E142732

An oil that displays this symbol conforms tocurrent engine, emission system and fueleconomy performance standards of theInternational Lubricants SpecificationAdvisory Council (ILSAC).

306



Do not use supplemental engine oil additivesbecause they are unnecessary and could leadto engine damage that may not be coveredby your vehicle warranty.

Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 LowViscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluidor equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Useof any fluid other than the recommended fluidmay cause degraded brake performance andnot meet the Ford performance standards.Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contaminationwith dirt, water, petroleum products or othermaterials may result in brake system damageand possible failure.

Note: Automatic transmissions that requireMERCON LV transmission fluid should onlyuse MERCON LV transmission fluid. The useof any other fluid may cause transmissiondamage.

CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.7LCapacities

WARNINGThe air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant systemcan cause personal injury. Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel.

CapacityItem

6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil

11.1 qt (10.5 L)Engine coolant

Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid

2.4 pt (1.15 L)Rear axle fluid (All Wheel Drive)

10.9 qt (10.3 L)*Automatic transmission fluid

307



CapacityItem

18 fl oz (0.53 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive)

Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid

19.0 gal (71.9 L)Fuel tank

1.43 lb (0.65 kg)Air conditioning refrigerant

5.24 fl oz (155 ml)Air conditioning refrigerant compressor oil

*Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.

SpecificationsMaterials

SpecificationName

WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor OilXO-5W20-QSP

WSS-M2C945-ARecommended Motor oil (Canada):Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor OilCXO-5W20-LSP12

WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor OilMXO-5W20-QSP

WSS-M2C945-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):

308



SpecificationName

Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor OilXO-5W20-QFS

WSS-M2C945-AOptional Motor oil (Canada):Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor OilCXO-5W20-LFS12

WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant PredilutedVC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant PredilutedCVC-3DIL-B

WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake FluidPM-20

WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (U.S. and Mexico):Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle LubricantXY-80W90-QL

WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (Canada):Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle LubricantCXY-80W90-1L

WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid

XT-10-QLVC

309



SpecificationName

WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid

CXT-10-LV12

WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (U.S. and Mexico):Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle LubricantXY-75W140-QL

WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (Canada):Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle LubricantCXY-75W140-1L

WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with BitterantZC-32-B2

WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer FluidCXC-37-(A, B, D, F)

WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):Motorcraft® R-134a RefrigerantYN-19

WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):Motorcraft® R-134a RefrigerantCYN-16-R

WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):Motorcraft® R-134a RefrigerantMYN-19

310



SpecificationName

WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor OilYN-12-D

ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease SprayXL-5

--Lock cylinders (U.S.):Penetrating and Lock LubricantXL-1

--Lock cylinders (Canada):Penetrating FluidCXC-51-A

--Lock cylinders (Mexico):Penetrating and Lock LubricantMXL-1

If you use oil and fluids that do not meet thedefined specification and viscosity grade, thismay lead to:• Component damage which is not covered

by the vehicle warranty.• Longer engine cranking periods.• Increased emission levels.• Reduced engine performance.

• Reduced fuel economy.• Degraded brake performance.

We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for yourvehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not available, usemotor oils of the recommended viscositygrade that meet API SN requirements anddisplay the API Certification Mark for gasolineengines. Do not use oil labeled with API SNservice category unless the label alsodisplays the API certification mark.

311



E142732

An oil that displays this symbol conforms tocurrent engine, emission system and fueleconomy performance standards of theInternational Lubricants SpecificationAdvisory Council (ILSAC).Do not use supplemental engine oil additivesbecause they are unnecessary and could leadto engine damage that may not be coveredby your vehicle warranty.

Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 LowViscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluidor equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Useof any fluid other than the recommended fluidmay cause degraded brake performance andnot meet the Ford performance standards.Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contaminationwith dirt, water, petroleum products or othermaterials may result in brake system damageand possible failure.Note: Automatic transmissions that requireMERCON LV transmission fluid should onlyuse MERCON LV transmission fluid. The useof any other fluid may cause transmissiondamage.

312



GENERAL INFORMATIONRadio Frequencies and ReceptionFactors

AM and FM frequencies are established bythe Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and the Canadian Radio andTelecommunications Commission (CRTC).Those frequencies are:• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz

Radio Reception Factors

The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.Distance and strength

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage andthunderstorms can interfere with the reception.

Terrain

When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one andresult in the audio system muting.

Station overload

CD and CD Player InformationNote: CD units play commercially pressed4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact discsonly. Due to technical incompatibility, certainrecordable and re-recordable compact discsmay not function correctly when used in FordCD players.

Note: Do not insert CDs with homemadepaper (adhesive) labels into the CD player asthe label may peel and cause the CD tobecome jammed. You should use a permanentfelt tip marker rather than adhesive labels onyour homemade CDs. Ballpoint pens maydamage CDs. Please contact an authorizeddealer for further information.Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped discsor discs with a scratch protection filmattached.

Always handle discs by their edges only.Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaneronly. Wipe it from the center of the disctoward the edge. Do not clean in a circularmotion.Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heatsources for extended periods.

313


Audio System

MP3 and WMA Track and FolderStructureAudio systems capable of recognizing andplaying MP3 and WMA individual tracks andfolder structures work as follows:• There are two different modes for MP3

and WMA disc playback: MP3 and WMAtrack mode (system default) and MP3and WMA folder mode.

• MP3 and WMA track mode ignores anyfolder structure on the MP3 and WMAdisc. The player numbers each MP3 andWMA track on the disc (noted by the MP3or WMA file extension) from T001 to amaximum of T255. The maximumnumber of playable MP3 and WMA filesmay be less depending on the structureof the CD and exact model of radiopresent.

• MP3 and WMA folder mode represents afolder structure consisting of one level offolders. The CD player numbers all MP3and WMA tracks on the disc (noted bythe MP3 or WMA file extension) and allfolders containing MP3 and WMA files,from F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253T255.

• Creating discs with only one level offolders helps with navigation through thedisc files.

If you are burning your own MP3 and WMAdiscs, it is important to understand how thesystem reads the structures you create. Whilevarious files may be present (files withextensions other than MP3 and WMA), onlyfiles with the MP3 and WMA extension areplayed; other files are ignored by the system.This enables you to use the same MP3 andWMA disc for a variety of tasks on your workcomputer, home computer and yourin-vehicle system.

In track mode, the system displays and playsthe structure as if it were only one level deep(all MP3 and WMA files play, regardless ofbeing in a specific folder). In folder mode, thesystem only plays the MP3 and WMA files inthe current folder.

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:PREMIUM AM/FM/CD



Note: The touchsceen system controls mostof the audio features. See your MyLincolnTouch information.

314


Audio System

E146318

CD slot: Insert a CD.AEject: Press to eject a CD.BTUNE: Press to search manually through the radio frequency band. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction. InSIRIUS mode, the system selects the previous or next channel. If you select a specific category (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.), turn theTUNE control to find the previous or next channel in the selected category.

C

Volume: Press to adjust the volume.D

315


Audio System

Power: Press to switch the system on and off.ESeek/Fast Forward/Reverse: Press to go to the previous or next track or available radio station. Press and hold to either reverseor fast forward through the current track or to quickly reverse or advance through the radio bands in individual increments.

F

MEDIA HUBThe media hub may be located on theinstrument panel or center console.

E207805


316


Audio System

For a complete listing of the accessories thatare available for your vehicle, please contactyour authorized dealer or visit our online storeat:

Web Address (United States)

www.Accessories.Lincoln.com

Web Address (Canada)

www.LincolnCanada.com

Lincoln Motor Company will repair or replaceany properly authorized dealer-installedLincoln Original Accessory found to bedefective in factory-supplied materials orworkmanship during the warranty period, aswell as any component damaged by thedefective accessories.Lincoln Motor Company will warrant yourvehicle through the warranty that providesthe greatest benefit:• 24 months, unlimited mileage.• The remainder of your new vehicle limited

warranty.Contact an authorized dealer for details anda copy of the warranty.

Exterior style• Moonroof deflectors.• Side-window deflectors.• Splash guards.

Interior style• All-weather floor mats.• Carpeted floor mats.• Sport pedals.

Lifestyle• Ash cup (smoker's packages).• Car cover*.• Cargo area protector.• Cargo organization and management.

Peace of mind• Locking fuel plug.• Wheel locks.• Remote start.• Vehicle security.

*The accessory manufacturer designs,develops and therefore warrants LincolnLicensed Accessories, and does not designor test these accessories to Lincoln MotorCompany engineering requirements. Contactan authorized Lincoln dealer for themanufacturer's limited warranty details andrequest a copy of the Lincoln LicensedAccessories product limited warranty fromthe accessory manufacturer.

317


Accessories

For maximum vehicle performance, keep thefollowing information in mind when addingaccessories or equipment to your vehicle:• When adding accessories, equipment,

passengers and luggage to your vehicle,do not exceed the total weight capacityof the vehicle or of the front or rear axle(GVWR or GAWR as indicated on theSafety Compliance Certification label).Consult an authorized dealer for specificweight information.

• The Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) and Canadian RadioTelecommunications Commission(CRTC) regulate the use of mobilecommunications systems that areequipped with radio transmitters, forexample, two-way radios, telephones andtheft alarms. Any such equipmentinstalled in your vehicle should complywith the Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) and Canadian RadioTelecommunications Commission(CRTC) regulations and should beinstalled only by an authorized dealer.

• Mobile communications systems mayharm the operation of your vehicle,particularly if their manufacturer did notdesign them specifically for automotiveuse.

• If you or an authorized Lincoln dealer addany non-Lincoln electrical or electronicaccessories or components to yourvehicle, you may adversely affect batteryperformance and durability. In addition,you may also adversely affect theperformance of other electrical systemsin the vehicle.

318


Accessories

PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISINGCOST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH ALINCOLN EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.

EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (U.S.Only)Lincoln owners have discovered the powerfulprotection of Lincoln Extended Service Plan.It is the only extended service plan backedby Lincoln Motor Company, and providespeace of mind protection beyond the NewVehicle Limited Warranty coverage.

Lincoln ESP Can Quickly Pay for ItselfOne service bill – the cost of parts and labor– can easily exceed the price of your LincolnExtended Service Plan. With Lincoln ESP, youminimize your risk for unexpected repair billsand rising repair costs.

Up to 1000+ Covered VehicleComponentsThere are four Extended Service Plans withdifferent levels of coverage. Ask yourauthorized dealer for details.1. PremiumCARE - Our most

comprehensive coverage. With over 1000covered components, this plan is socomplete that we generally only discusswhat’s not covered.

2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, andincludes many high-tech items.

3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical

components.Lincoln Extended Service Plan is honored byall authorized Lincoln and Ford dealers in theUnited States, Canada and Mexico. It is theonly extended service plan authorized andbacked by Lincoln Motor Company.That means you get:• Reliable, quality service at any Lincoln or

Ford dealership.• Repairs performed by factory trained

technicians, using genuine parts.

Rental Car Reimbursement

1st day Rental BenefitYou take advantage of replacementtransportation if your vehicle is at yourauthorized dealer for same day coveredrepairs.

Extended Rental BenefitsIf your vehicle is kept overnight for coveredrepairs, you are eligible for rental carcoverage, including bumper to bumperwarranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.

Roadside AssistanceExclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump

starts.• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.• Travel expense reimbursement for

lodging, meals and rental car.• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle,

rental car coverage and emergencytransportation.

Transferable CoverageIf you sell your vehicle before your LincolnExtended Service Plan coverage expires, youcan transfer any remaining coverage to thenew owner. Whenever you sell your vehicle,prospective buyers may have a higher degreeof confidence that vehicle was properlymaintained with Lincoln ESP, therebyimproving resale value.

319


Extended Service Plan (ESP)

Avoid the Rising Cost of ProperlyMaintaining Your Vehicle!Lincoln Extended Service Plan also offers aPremium Maintenance Plan that covers allscheduled maintenance, and select itemsthat routinely wear out. The coverage isprepaid, so you never have to worry aboutaffording your vehicle maintenance. It coversregular checkups, routine inspections,preventive care and replacement of selectitems that require periodic attention fornormal wear:• Windshield wiper blades.• Spark plugs.• The clutch disc.• Brake pads and linings.• Shock absorbers and struts.• Engine cooling hoses, clamps and o-rings.• Engine belts.• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment.

Interest Free Finance Options AvailableTake advantage of our interest freeinstallment payment plan. Just a 10% downpayment will provide you with an affordable,no interest, no fee payment program allowingyou all the security and benefits Lincoln ESPhas to offer while paying over time. You arepre-approved with no credit checks, nohassles! To learn more, call our Lincoln ESPspecialists at 800-367-3377.Complete the information below and mailto:Ford ESPP.O. Box 321067Detroit, MI 48232

EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS(CANADA ONLY)You can get more protection for your vehicleby purchasing a Lincoln Extended ServicePlan. Lincoln Extended Service Plan is theonly service contract backed by Lincoln MotorCompany of Canada, Limited. Depending onthe plan you purchase, Lincoln ExtendedService Plan provides benefits such as:• Rental reimbursement.• Coverage for certain maintenance and

wear items.

• Protection against repair costs after yourNew Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverageexpires.

• Roadside Assistance benefits.There are several Lincoln Extended ServicePlans available in various time, distance anddeductible combinations. Each plan istailored to fit your own driving needs,including reimbursement for towing andrental. When you purchase Lincoln ExtendedService Plan, you receive addedpeace-of-mind protection throughoutCanada, the United States and Mexico,provided by a network of participatingauthorized Lincoln Motor Company dealers.Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada,the United States and Mexico are not eligiblefor Lincoln Extended Service Plan coverage.This information is subject to change. Formore information, visit your local Lincoln ofCanada dealer or www.Lincoln.ca to find theLincoln Extended Service Plan that is rightfor you.

320


Extended Service Plan (ESP)

GENERAL MAINTENANCEINFORMATIONWhy Maintain Your Vehicle?Carefully following the maintenanceschedule helps protect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance and may help toincrease the value of your vehicle when yousell or trade it. Keep all receipts forcompleted maintenance with your vehicle.We have established regular maintenanceintervals for your vehicle based upon rigoroustesting. It is important that you have yourvehicle serviced at the proper times. Theseintervals serve two purposes; one is tomaintain the reliability of your vehicle andthe second is to keep your cost of owningyour vehicle down.It is your responsibility to have all scheduledmaintenance performed and to make surethat the materials used meet thespecifications identified in this owner'smanual. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 296).Failure to perform scheduled maintenanceinvalidates warranty coverage on partsaffected by the lack of maintenance.

Why Maintain Your Vehicle at YourDealership?Factory-Trained TechniciansService technicians participate in extensivefactory-sponsored certification training tohelp them become experts on the operationof your vehicle. Ask your dealership about thetraining and certification their technicianshave received.

Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®Replacement PartsDealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft andFord-authorized branded re-manufacturedreplacement parts. These parts meet orexceed our specifications. Parts installed atyour dealership carry a nationwide 24-monthor unlimited mile (kilometer) parts and laborlimited warranty.If you do not use Ford authorized parts theymay not meet our specifications anddepending on the part, it could affectemissions compliance.

ConvenienceMany dealerships have extended evening andSaturday hours to make your service visitmore convenient and they offer one stopshopping. They can perform any services thatare required on your vehicle, from generalmaintenance to collision repairs.Note: Not all dealers have extended hours orbody shops. Please contact your dealer fordetails.

Protecting Your InvestmentMaintenance is an investment that paysdividends in the form of improved reliability,durability and resale value. To maintain theproper performance of your vehicle and itsemission control systems, make sure youhave scheduled maintenance performed atthe designated intervals.Your vehicle is equipped with the IntelligentOil-Life Monitor system, which displays amessage in the information display at theproper oil change interval. This interval maybe up to one year or 10000 miles (16000kilometers).

321


Scheduled Maintenance

When the oil change message appears in theinformation display, it is time for an oilchange. Make sure you perform the oil changewithin two weeks or 500 miles (800kilometers) of the message appearing. Makesure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitorafter each oil change. See (page 89).If your information display resets prematurelyor becomes inoperative, you should performthe oil change interval at six months or 5000miles (8000 kilometers) from your last oilchange. Never exceed one year or 10000miles (16000 kilometers) between oil changeintervals.Your vehicle is very sophisticated and builtwith multiple, complex, performancesystems. Every manufacturer develops thesesystems using different specifications andperformance features. That is why it isimportant to rely upon your dealership toproperly diagnose and repair your vehicle.

Ford Motor Company has recommendedmaintenance intervals for various parts andcomponent systems based upon engineeringtesting. Ford Motor Company relies upon thistesting to determine the most appropriatemileage for replacement of oils and fluids toprotect your vehicle at the lowest overall costto you and recommends againstmaintenance schedules that deviate fromthe scheduled maintenance information.We strongly recommend the use of onlygenuine Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorizedre-manufactured replacement partsengineered for your vehicle.

Additives and ChemicalsThis owner's manual and the Ford WorkshopManual list the recommended additives andchemicals for your vehicle. We do notrecommend using chemicals or additives notapproved by us as part of your vehicle’snormal maintenance. Please consult yourwarranty information.

Oils, Fluids and FlushingIn many cases, fluid discoloration is a normaloperating characteristic and, by itself, doesnot necessarily indicate a concern or that thefluid needs to be changed. However, aqualified expert, such as the factory-trainedtechnicians at your dealership, should inspectdiscolored fluids that also show signs ofoverheating or foreign materialcontamination immediately.Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils andfluids at the specified intervals or inconjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viableway to change fluid for many vehiclesub-systems during scheduled maintenance.It is critical that systems are flushed only withnew fluid that is the same as that required tofill and operate the system or using aFord-approved flushing chemical.

Owner Checks and ServicesMake sure you perform the following basicmaintenance checks and inspections everymonth or at six-month intervals.

322



Check every month

Engine oil level.

Function of all interior and exterior lights.

Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.

Windshield washer fluid level.

Check every six months

Battery connections. Clean if necessary.

Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.

Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.

Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.

Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.

Parking brake for proper operation.

Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.

Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.

Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.

323



Multi-Point InspectionIn order to keep your vehicle running right, itis important to have the systems on yourvehicle checked regularly. This can helpidentify potential issues and prevent major

problems. We recommend having thefollowing multi-point inspection performedat every scheduled maintenance interval tohelp make sure your vehicle keeps runninggreat.

Multi-Point inspection

Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)

Horn operationBattery performance

Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning hosesEngine air filter

Suspension components for leaks or damageExhaust system

Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation

Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure**Fluid levels*; fill if necessary

Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks

Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots* Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer**If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.

324



Be sure to ask your dealership service advisoror technician about the multi-point vehicleinspection. It is a comprehensive way toperform a thorough inspection of your vehicle.Your checklist gives you immediate feedbackon the overall condition of your vehicle.

NORMAL SCHEDULEDMAINTENANCEIntelligent Oil-Life Monitor™Your vehicle is equipped with an IntelligentOil-Life Monitor that determines when youshould change the engine oil based on howyour vehicle is used. By using severalimportant factors in its calculations, themonitor helps reduce the cost of owning yourvehicle and reduces environmental waste atthe same time.

This means you do not have to remember tochange the oil on a mileage-based schedule.Your vehicle lets you know when an oilchange is due by displaying a message in theinformation display.The following table provides examples ofvehicle use and its impact on oil changeintervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oilchange intervals depend on several factorsand generally decrease with severity of use.

When to expect the message prompting you to change your oil

Vehicle use and exampleInterval

Normal

7500-10000 miles(12000-16000 km)

Normal commuting with highway drivingNo, or moderate, load or towingFlat to moderately hilly roadsNo extended idling

Severe5000-7499 miles(8000-11999 km) Moderate to heavy load or towing

Mountainous or off-road conditionsExtended idling

325



When to expect the message prompting you to change your oil

Vehicle use and exampleInterval

Extended hot or cold operation

Extreme3000-4999 miles(4800-7999 km) Maximum load or towing

Extreme hot or cold operation

Maintenance Intervals

At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display*

Change engine oil and filter.**

Rotate the tires.

Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).

Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements.

Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.

Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.

Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.

Inspect the rear axle and U-joints.

Inspect the half-shaft boots.

326



At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display*

Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints.

Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.

Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.* Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.** Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 245).

Other maintenance items 1

Replace cabin air filter.Every 20000 miles (32000km)

Replace engine air filter.Every 30000 miles (48000km)

Change engine coolant. 2At 100000 miles (160000km)

Replace spark plugs.Every 100000 miles(160000 km) Inspect accessory drive belt(s). 3

327



Other maintenance items 1

Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 150000 miles(240000 km) Replace accessory drive belt(s). 4

1 Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designateddistance for the interval.2 Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).3 After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.4 If not replaced within the last 100000 miles (160000 kilometers).

SPECIAL OPERATINGCONDITIONS SCHEDULEDMAINTENANCEIf you operate your vehicle primarily in anyof the following conditions, you need toperform extra maintenance, as indicated. Ifyou operate your vehicle occasionally underany of these conditions, it is not necessary toperform the extra maintenance. For specificrecommendations, see your dealershipservice advisor or technician.

Perform the services shown in the followingtables when specified or within 3,000 mi(4,800 km) of the message appearing in theinformation display prompting you to changeyour oil.

• Example 1: The message comes on at28,751 mi (46,270 km). Perform the30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatictransmission fluid replacement.

• Example 2: The message has not comeon, but the odometer reads 30,000 mi(48,000 km) (for example, the IntelligentOil-Life Monitor was reset at 25,000 mi(40,000 km)). Perform the engine airfilter replacement.

328



Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier

Change engine oil and filter as indicated by information display and perform services listed in the NormalScheduled Maintenance chart.

As required

Inspect and lubricate U-joints.Inspect frequently, serviceas required

Change PTU and rear axle fluid (AWD only). See axle and PTU maintenance items under Exceptions.Every 30,000 mi(48,000 km)

Change automatic transmission fluid.

Replace spark plugs.Every 60,000 mi(96,000 km)

Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use (such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)

Change engine oil and filter as indicated by information display and perform services listed in the NormalScheduled Maintenance chart.

As required

Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, serviceas required

Replace engine air filter.

Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30,000 mi(48,000 km)

Change PTU and rear axle fluid (AWD only). See axle and PTU maintenance items under Exceptions.

Replace spark plugs.Every 60,000 mi(96,000 km)

329



Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)

Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, serviceas required

Replace engine air filter.

Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)

Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth.

Change engine oil and filter.*Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)or six months

Perform multi-point inspection.

Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30,000 mi(48,000 km)

Change PTU and rear axle fluid (AWD only). See axle and PTU maintenance items under Exceptions.*Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes.

Exclusive use of E85 (flex fuel vehicles only)

If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular unleaded fuel.Every oil change

ExceptionsThere are several exceptions to the NormalSchedule:

330



Axle and PTU MaintenanceThe Power Transfer Unit (PTU) and rear axle(AWD only) in your vehicle does not requireany normal scheduled maintenance. The PTUlube will be more likely to require a fluidchange if the vehicle has experiencedextended periods of extreme/severe dutycycle driving. Changing or checking the PTUlubricant is not necessary unless the unit hasbeen submerged in water or shows signs ofleakage. Contact your authorized dealer forservice.

California Fuel Filter ReplacementIf you register your vehicle in California, theCalifornia Air Resources Board hasdetermined that the failure to perform thismaintenance item does not nullify theemission warranty or limit recall liabilitybefore the completion of your vehicle's usefullife. Ford Motor Company, however, urgesyou to have all recommended maintenanceservices performed at the specified intervalsand to record all vehicle service.

Hot Climate Oil Change IntervalsVehicles operating in the Middle East, NorthAfrica, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations withsimilar climates using an AmericanPetroleum Institute (API) Certified forGasoline Engines (Certification mark) oil ofSM or SN quality, the normal oil changeinterval is 3,000 mi (4,800 km).

If the available API SM or SN oils are notavailable, then the oil change interval is1,800 mi (2,900 km).

Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air FilterReplacementThe life of the engine air filter and cabin airfilter is dependent on exposure to dusty anddirty conditions. Vehicles operated in theseconditions require frequent inspection andreplacement of the engine air filter and cabinair filter.

331



SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):Signature:

Dealer stamp

332



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

333



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

334



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

335



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

336



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

337



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

338



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

339



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

340



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

341



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

342



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

343



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

344



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

345



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

346



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

347



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

348



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

349



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

350



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

351



END USER LICENSEAGREEMENTVEHICLE SOFTWARE END USERLICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable) have

acquired a vehicle having several devices,including SYNC ® and various controlmodules, ("DEVICES") that includesoftware licensed or owned by FordMotor Company and its affiliates ("FORDMOTOR COMPANY"). Those softwareproducts of FORD MOTOR COMPANYorigin, as well as associated media,printed materials, and "online" orelectronic documentation("SOFTWARE") are protected byinternational intellectual property lawsand treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed,not sold. All rights reserved.

• The SOFTWARE may interface withand/or communicate with, or may belater upgraded to interface with and/orcommunicate with additional softwareand/or systems provided by FORDMOTOR COMPANY.

IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS ENDUSER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY THESOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THESOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES, WILLCONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TOTHIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANYPREVIOUS CONSENT).GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: ThisEULA grants you the following license:• You may use the SOFTWARE as installed

on the DEVICES and as otherwiseinterfacing with systems and/or servicesprovide by or through FORD MOTORCOMPANY or its third party software andservice providers.

Description of Other Rights andLimitations• Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE

includes speech recognitioncomponent(s), you should understandthat speech recognition is an inherentlystatistical process and that recognitionerrors are inherent in the process. NeitherFORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its

suppliers shall be liable for any damagesarising out of errors in the speechrecognition process. It is yourresponsibility to monitor any speechrecognition functions included in thesystem.

• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,Decompilation and Disassembly: Youmay not reverse engineer, decompile,translate, disassemble or attempt todiscover any source code or underlyingideas or algorithms of the SOFTWAREnor permit others to reverse engineer,decompile or disassemble theSOFTWARE, except and only to theextent that such activity is expresslypermitted by applicable lawnotwithstanding this limitation or to theextent as may be permitted by thelicensing terms governing use of any opensource components included with theSOFTWARE.

• Limitations on Distributing, Copying,Modifying and Creating DerivativeWorks: You may not distribute, copy,make modifications to or createderivative works based on theSOFTWARE, except and only to theextent that such activity is expressly

352


Appendices

permitted by applicable lawnotwithstanding this limitation or to theextent as may be permitted by thelicensing terms governing use of any opensource components included with theSOFTWARE.

• Single EULA: The end userdocumentation for the DEVICES andrelated systems and services may containmultiple EULAs, such as multipletranslations and/or multiple mediaversions (e.g., in the user documentationand in the software). Even if you receivemultiple EULAs, you are licensed to useonly one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.

• SOFTWARE Transfer: You maypermanently transfer your rights underthis EULA only as part of a sale or transferof the DEVICES, provided you retain nocopies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE(including all component parts, the mediaand printed materials, any upgrades, and,if applicable, the Certificate(s) ofAuthenticity), and the recipient agrees tothe terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWAREis an upgrade, any transfer must includeall prior versions of the SOFTWARE.

• Termination: Without prejudice to anyother rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANYmay terminate this EULA if you fail tocomply with the terms and conditions ofthis EULA.

• Internet-Based Services Components:The SOFTWARE may containcomponents that enable and facilitatethe use of certain Internet-based services.You acknowledge and agree that FORDMOTOR COMPANY, third party softwareand service suppliers, its affiliates and/orits designated agent may automaticallycheck the version of the SOFTWAREand/or its components that you areutilizing and may provide upgrades orsupplements to the SOFTWARE that maybe automatically downloaded to yourDEVICES.

• Additional Software/Services: TheSOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTORCOMPANY, third party software andservice suppliers, its affiliates and/or itsdesignated agent to provide or makeavailable to you SOFTWARE updates,supplements, add-on components, orInternet-based services components ofthe SOFTWARE after the date you obtainyour initial copy of the SOFTWARE("Supplemental Components".)SOFTWARE updates may cause you to

incur additional charges from yourwireless service provider. If FORD MOTORCOMPANY or third party software andservices suppliers provide or makeavailable to you SupplementalComponents and no other EULA termsare provided along with theSupplemental Components, then theterms of this EULA shall apply. FORDMOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/orits designated agent reserve the right todiscontinue without liability anyInternet-based services provided to youor made available to you through the useof the SOFTWARE.

353


Appendices

• Links to Third Party Sites: TheSOFTWARE may provide you with theability to link to third party sites. The thirdparty sites are not under the control ofFORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliatesand/or its designated agent. NeitherFORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its affiliatesnor its designated agent are responsiblefor (i) the contents of any third partysites, any links contained in third partysites, or any changes or updates to thirdparty sites, or (ii) webcasting or any otherform of transmission received from anythird party sites. If the SOFTWAREprovides links to third party sites, thoselinks are provided to you only as aconvenience, and the inclusion of any linkdoes not imply an endorsement of thethird party site by FORD MOTORCOMPANY, its affiliates and/or itsdesignated agent.

• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: Yourecognize your obligation to driveresponsibly and keep attention on theroad. You will read and abide with theDEVICES operating instructionsparticularly as they pertain to safety andyou agree to assume any risk associatedwith the use of the DEVICES.

UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: Ifthe SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTORCOMPANY separate from the DEVICES onmedia such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s)or via web download or other means, and islabeled "For Upgrade Purposes Only" or "ForRecovery Purposes Only" you may install one(1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto theDEVICES as a replacement copy for theexisting SOFTWARE, and use it in accordancewith this EULA, including any additional EULAterms accompanying the upgradeSOFTWARE.INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: Alltitle and intellectual property rights in and tothe SOFTWARE (including but not limited toany images, photographs, animations, video,audio, music, text and "applets" incorporatedinto the SOFTWARE), the accompanyingprinted materials, and any copies of theSOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTORCOMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. TheSOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You maynot copy the printed materials accompanyingthe SOFTWARE. All title and intellectualproperty rights in and to the content whichmay be accessed through use of theSOFTWARE is the property of the respectivecontent owner and may be protected byapplicable copyright or other intellectualproperty laws and treaties. This EULA grants

you no rights to use such content outside itsintended use. All rights not specificallygranted under this EULA are reserved byFORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, andthird party software and service providersand suppliers. Use of any on-line serviceswhich may be accessed through theSOFTWARE may be governed by therespective terms of use relating to suchservices. If this SOFTWARE containsdocumentation that is provided only inelectronic form, you may print one copy ofsuch electronic documentation.EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: Youacknowledge that the SOFTWARE is subjectto U.S. and European Union exportjurisdiction. You agree to comply with allapplicable international and national lawsthat apply to the SOFTWARE, including theU.S. Export Administration Regulations, aswell as end-user, end-use and destinationrestrictions issued by U.S. and othergovernments.TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grantyou any rights in connection with anytrademarks or service marks of FORDMOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and thirdparty software and service providers.

354


Appendices

PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to FORDMOTOR COMPANY instructions provided inthe documentation for the DEVICES productsupport, such as the vehicle owner guide.Should you have any questions concerningthis EULA, or if you desire to contact FORDMOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,please refer to the address provided in thedocumentation for the DEVICES.No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPTAS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTORCOMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWAREOR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, AND THEIRAFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FORANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIALOR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROMOR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE ORPERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THISLIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANYREMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIALPURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIESOTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BEEXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEWVEHICLE.

SYNC® Automotive Important SafetyInformation Read and followinstructions:• Before using your SYNC® system, read

and follow all instructions and safetyinformation provided in this end usermanual ("Owner Guide".) Not followingprecautions found in the Owner Guidecan lead to an accident or other seriousinjuries.

General Operation• Voice Command Control: Certain

functions within the SYNC® system maybe accomplished using voice commands.Using voice commands while drivinghelps you to operate the system withoutremoving your hands from the wheel oreyes from the road.

• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do notaccess any function requiring a prolongedview of the screen while you are driving.Pull over in a safe and legal mannerbefore attempting to access a functionof the system requiring prolongedattention.

• Volume Setting: Do not raise thevolume excessively. Keep the volume ata level where you can still hear outsidetraffic and emergency signals whiledriving. Driving while unable to hear thesesounds could cause an accident.

• Navigation Features: Any navigationfeatures included in the system areintended to provide turn by turninstructions to get you to a desireddestination. Please make certain allpersons using this system carefully readand follow instructions and safetyinformation fully.

• Distraction Hazard: Any navigationfeatures may require manual(non-verbal) setup. Attempting toperform such set-up or insert data whiledriving can distract your attention andcould cause an accident or other seriousinjury. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legalmanner before attempting theseoperations.

355


Appendices

• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Anynavigation features are provided only asan aid. Make your driving decisions basedon your observations of local conditionsand existing traffic regulations. Any suchfeature is not a substitute for yourpersonal judgment. Any route suggestionsmade by this system should never replaceany local traffic regulations or yourpersonal judgment or knowledge of safedriving practices.

• Route Safety: Do not follow the routesuggestions if doing so would result in anunsafe or illegal maneuver, if you wouldbe placed in an unsafe situation, or if youwould be directed into an area that youconsider unsafe. The driver is ultimatelyresponsible for the safe operation of thevehicle and therefore, must evaluatewhether it is safe to follow the suggesteddirections.

• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps usedby this system may be inaccuratebecause of changes in roads, trafficcontrols or driving conditions. Always usegood judgment and common sense whenfollowing the suggested routes.

• Emergency Services: Do not rely on anynavigation features included in thesystem to route you to emergencyservices. Ask local authorities or anemergency services operator for theselocations. Not all emergency servicessuch as police, fire stations, hospitals andclinics are likely to be contained in themap database for such navigationfeatures.

356


Appendices

Your Responsibilities and Assumptions ofRisk

357


Appendices

• You agree to each of the following:(a)Any use of the SOFTWARE while drivingan automobile or other vehicle in violationof applicable law or otherwise driving inan unsafe manner presents a significantrisk of distracted driving and should notbe attempted under anycircumstances;(b) Use of the SOFTWAREat excessive volume poses a significantrisk of hearing damage and should not beattempted under any circumstances;(c)The SOFTWARE may not be compatiblewith new or different versions of anoperating system, third party software,or third party services, and theSOFTWARE may potentially cause acritical failure of an operating system,third party software, or third partyservice.(d) Any third party serviceaccessed by or third party software usedwith the SOFTWARE (i) may charge anadditional fee for access, (ii) may notwork correctly, on an uninterrupted basis,or error free, (iii) may change streamingformats or discontinue operation, (iv)may contain adult, profane or offensivecontent; and (v) may contain inaccurate,false or misleading traffic, weather,financial or safety information or othercontent; and (e) Use of the SOFTWAREmay cause you to incur additional charges

from your wireless service provider (WSP)and any data or minute calculators thatmay be included in the software programare for reference only, are not warrantedin any way and should not be relied uponin anyway.

• When using the SOFTWARE, you agreeto be responsible for and assume theentire risk to the items set forth in Section(a) – (e) above.

Disclaimer of WarrantyYOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE ANDAGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES ANDSOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK ANDTHAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TOSATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,COMPATIBILITY, ACCURACY AND EFFORTIS WITH YOU. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENTPERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THESOFTWARE AND ANY THIRD PARTYSOFTWARE OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICESARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND “ASAVAILABLE”, WITH ALL FAULTS ANDWITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, ANDFORD MOTOR COMPANY HEREBYDISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES ANDCONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THESOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, ANDTHIRD-PARTY SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS,IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OFMERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORYQUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN ARTICULARPURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIETENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD-PARTY RIGHTS. FORD MOTORCOMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT (a)AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOURENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRDPARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTYSERVICES, (b) THAT THE SOFTWARE,THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, ORTHIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL MEET YOURREQUIREMENTS, (c) THAT THE OPERATIONOF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTYSOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICESWILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE,(d) OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, ORTHIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BECORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTENINFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY FORDMOTOR COMPANY OR ITS AUTHORIZEDREPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE AWARRANTY. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE,THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, ORTHIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVEDEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRECOST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOMEJURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE

358


Appendices

DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES ORLIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE STATUTORYRIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVEDISCLAIMER MAY NOT FULLY APPLY TOYOU. THE SOLE WARRANTY PROVIDED BYFORD MOTOR COMPANY SHALL BE FOUNDIN THE WARRANTY INFORMATIONINCLUDING WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TOTHE EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICTBETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTIONAND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THEWARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.

Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction• The laws of the State of Michigan govern

this EULA and Your use of theSOFTWARE. Your use of the SOFTWAREmay also be subject to other local, state,national, or international laws. Anylitigation arising out of or related to thisEULA shall be brought and maintainedexclusively in a court of the State ofMichigan located in Wayne County or inthe United States District Court for theEastern District of Michigan. You herebyconsent to submit to the personal

jurisdiction of a court in the State ofMichigan located in Wayne County andthe United States District Court for theEastern District of Michigan for anydispute arising out of or relating to thisEULA.

Binding Arbitration and Class ActionWaiver(a) Application. This Section applies to anydispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT INCLUDE ADISPUTE RELATING TO COPYRIGHTINFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE ENFORCEMENTOR VALIDITY OF YOUR, FORD MOTORCOMPANY, OR ANY OF FORD MOTORCOMPANY’S LICENSORS’ INTELLECTUALPROPERTY RIGHTS. Dispute means anydispute, action, or other controversy betweenYou and FORD MOTOR COMPANY, otherthan the exceptions listed above, concerningthe SOFTWARE (including its price) or thisEULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,statute, regulation, ordinance, or any otherlegal or equitable basis.(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of aDispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANYmust give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,which is a written statement of the name,address, and contact information of the partygiving it, the facts giving rise to the dispute,and the relief requested. You and FORD

MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to resolveany dispute through informal negotiationwithin 60 days from the date the Notice ofDispute is sent. After 60 days, You or FORDMOTOR COMPANY may commencearbitration.(c) Small claims court. You may alsolitigate any dispute in small claims court inyour county of residence or FORD MOTORCOMPANY’S principal place of business, ifthe dispute meets all requirements to beheard in the small claims court. You maylitigate in small claims court whether or notYou negotiated informally first.(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORDMOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve anydispute by informal negotiation or in smallclaims court, any other effort to resolve thedispute will be conducted exclusively bybinding arbitration. You are giving up the rightto litigate (or participate in as a party or classmember) all disputes in court before a judgeor jury. Instead, all disputes will be resolvedbefore a neutral arbitrator, whose decisionwill be final except for a limited right ofappeal under the Federal Arbitration Act. Anycourt with jurisdiction over the parties mayenforce the arbitrator’s award.

359


Appendices

(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedingsto resolve or litigate any dispute in any forumwill be conducted solely on an individualbasis. Neither you nor FORD MOTORCOMPANY, will seek to have any disputeheard as a class action, as a private attorneygeneral action, or in any other proceeding inwhich any party acts or proposes to act in arepresentative capacity. No arbitration orproceeding will be combined with anotherwithout the prior written consent of all partiesto all affected arbitrations or proceedings.(f) Arbitration procedure. Any arbitrationwill be conducted by the American ArbitrationAssociation (the “AAA”), under itsCommercial Arbitration Rules. If You are anindividual and use the SOFTWARE forpersonal or vehicle use, or if the value of thedispute is $75,000 or less whether or not Youare an individual or how You use theSOFTWARE, the AAA SupplementaryProcedures for Consumer-Related Disputeswill also apply. To commence arbitration,submit a Commercial Arbitration RulesDemand for Arbitration form to the AAA. Youmay request a telephonic or in-personhearing by following the AAA rules. In adispute involving $10,000 or less, any hearingwill be telephonic unless the arbitrator findsgood cause to hold an in-person hearinginstead. For more information, see adr.org or

call 1-800-778-7879. You agree tocommence arbitration only in your county ofresidence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’Sprincipal place of business. The arbitratormay award the same damages to Youindividually as a court could. The arbitratormay award declaratory or injunctive reliefonly to You individually, and only to theextent required to satisfy Your individualclaim. Arbitration fees and incentives.• i. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.

FORD MOTOR COMPANY will promptlyreimburse your filing fees and pay theAAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.If you reject FORD MOTOR COMPANY’Slast written settlement offer made beforethe arbitrator was appointed (“lastwritten offer”), your dispute goes all theway to an arbitrator’s decision (called an“award”), and the arbitrator awards youmore than the last written offer, FORDMOTOR COMPANY will give you threeincentives: (1) pay the greater of theaward or $1,000; (2) pay twice yourreasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and (3)

reimburse any expenses (including expertwitness fees and costs) that yourattorney reasonably accrues forinvestigating, preparing, and pursuingyour claim in arbitration. The arbitratorwill determine the amounts.

• ii. Disputes involving more than $75,000.The AAA rules will govern payment offiling fees and the AAA’s and arbitrator’sfees and expenses.

• iii. Disputes involving any amount. In anyarbitration you commence, FORD MOTORCOMPANY will seek its AAA or arbitrator’sfees and expenses, or Your filing fees itreimbursed, only if the arbitrator finds thearbitration frivolous or brought for animproper purpose. In any arbitrationFORD MOTOR COMPANY commences,it will pay all filing, AAA, and arbitrator’sfees and expenses. It will not seek itsattorney’s fees or expenses from you inany arbitration. Fees and expenses arenot counted in determining how much adispute involves.

360


Appendices

(h) Claims or disputes must be filedwithin one year. To the extent permittedby law, any claim or dispute under this EULAto which this Section applies must be filedwithin one year in small claims court (Sectionc) or in arbitration (Section d). The one-yearperiod begins when the claim or dispute firstcould be filed. If such a claim or dispute is notfiled within one year, it is permanently barred.(i) Severability. If the class action waiver(Section e) is found to be illegal orunenforceable as to all or some parts of adispute, then that portion of Section e willnot apply to those parts. Instead, those partswill be severed and proceed in a court of law,with the remaining parts proceeding inarbitration. If any other provision of thatportion Section e is found to be illegal orunenforceable, that provision will be severedwith the remainder of Section e remaining infull force and effect.

Telenav Software End User LicenseAgreementPlease read these terms and conditionscarefully before you use the TeleNavSoftware. Your use of the TeleNav Softwareindicates that you accept these terms andconditions. If you do not accept these termsand conditions, do not break the seal of the

package, launch, or otherwise use theTeleNav Software. TeleNav may revise thisAgreement and the privacy policy at any time,with or http://www.telenav.com from timeto time to review the then current version ofthis Agreement and of the privacy policy.

1. Safe and Lawful UseYou acknowledge that devoting attention tothe TeleNav Software may pose a risk ofinjury or death to you and others in situationsthat otherwise require your undividedattention, and you therefore agree to complywith the following when using the TeleNavSoftware:(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwisedrive safely;(b) use your own personal judgment whiledriving. If you feel that a route suggested bythe TeleNav Software instructs you toperform an unsafe or illegal maneuver, placesyou in an unsafe situation, or directs you intoan area that you consider to be unsafe, donot follow such instructions;(c) do not input destinations, or otherwisemanipulate the TeleNav Software, unlessyour vehicle is stationary and parked;

(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for anyillegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in anymanner inconsistent with this Agreement;(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices andcables necessary for use of the TeleNavSoftware in a secure manner in your vehicleso that they will not interfere with your drivingand will not prevent the operation of anysafety device (such as an airbag).You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNavharmless against all claims resulting fromany dangerous or otherwise inappropriateuse of the TeleNav Software in any movingvehicle, including as a result of your failure tocomply with the directions above.

2. Account InformationYou agree: (a) when registering the TeleNavSoftware, to provide TeleNav with true,accurate, current, and complete informationabout yourself, and (b) to inform TeleNavpromptly of any changes to such information,and to keep it true, accurate, current andcomplete.

361


Appendices

3. Software License• Subject to your compliance with the

terms of this Agreement, TeleNav herebygrants to you a personal, non-exclusive,non-transferable license (except asexpressly permitted below in connectionwith your permanent transfer of theTeleNav Software license), without theright to sublicense, to use the TeleNavSoftware (in object code form only) inorder to access and use the TeleNavSoftware. This license shall terminateupon any termination or expiration of thisAgreement. You agree that you will usethe TeleNav Software only for yourpersonal business or leisure purposes,and not to provide commercial navigationservices to other parties.

3.1 License Limitations• (a) reverse engineer, decompile,

disassemble, translate, modify, alter orotherwise change the TeleNav Softwareor any part thereof; (b) attempt to derivethe source code, audio library or structureof the TeleNav Software without the priorexpress written consent of TeleNav; (c)remove from the TeleNav Software, oralter, any of TeleNav's or its suppliers'trademarks, trade names, logos, patentor copyright notices, or other notices or

markings; (d) distribute, sublicense orotherwise transfer the TeleNav Softwareto others, except as part of yourpermanent transfer of the TeleNavSoftware; or (e) use the TeleNavSoftware in any manner that

i. infringes the intellectual property orproprietary rights, rights of publicity or privacyor other rights of any party,ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance orregulation, including but not limited to lawsand regulations related to spamming, privacy,consumer and child protection, obscenity ordefamation, oriii. is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing,tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene,libelous, or otherwise objectionable; and (f)lease, rent out, or otherwise permitunauthorized access by third parties to theTeleNav Software without advanced writtenpermission of TeleNav.

4. Disclaimers• To the fullest extent permissible pursuant

to applicable law, in no event willTeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, oragents or employees of any of theforegoing, be liable for any decision madeor action taken by you or anyone else inreliance on the information provided by

the TeleNav Software. TeleNav also doesnot warrant the accuracy of the map orother data used for the TeleNavSoftware. Such data may not alwaysreflect reality due to, among other things,road closures, construction, weather, newroads and other changing conditions. Youare responsible for the entire risk arisingout of your use of the TeleNav Software.For example but without limitation, youagree not to rely on the TeleNav Softwarefor critical navigation in areas where thewell-being or survival of you or others is

362


Appendices

dependent on the accuracy of navigation,as the maps or functionality of theTeleNav Software are not intended tosupport such high risk applications,especially in more remote geographicalareas.

• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANDEXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES INCONNECTION WITH THE TELENAVSOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALLWARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROMCOURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM ORTRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE ANDNON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTYRIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THETELENAV SOFTWARE.

• Certain jurisdictions do not permit thedisclaimer of certain warranties, so thislimitation may not apply to you.

5. Limitation of Liability• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER

APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NOCIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV ORITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BELIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRDPARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,

CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OREXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING INEACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USETHE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA,LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS,LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESSINTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISINGOUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TOUSE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVENIF TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGESTHAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANYREASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGESREFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECTOR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT,TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OROTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OFTELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV'SSUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THEAMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FORTHE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOMESTATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DONOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION ORLIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THEABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONSMAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

6. Arbitration and Governing Law• You agree that any dispute, claim or

controversy arising out of or relating tothis Agreement or the TeleNav Softwareshall be settled by independentarbitration involving a neutral arbitratorand administered by the AmericanArbitration Association in the County ofSanta Clara, California. The arbitratorshall apply the Commercial ArbitrationRules of the American ArbitrationAssociation, and the judgment upon theaward rendered by the arbitrator may beentered by any court having jurisdiction.Note that there is no judge or jury in anarbitration proceeding and the decisionof the arbitrator shall be binding uponboth parties. You expressly agree to waiveyour right to a jury trial. This Agreementand performance hereunder will begoverned by and construed in accordancewith the laws of the State of California,without giving effect to its conflict of lawprovisions. To the extent judicial actionis necessary in connection with thebinding arbitration, both TeleNav and you

363


Appendices

agree to submit to the exclusivejurisdiction of the courts of the County ofSanta Clara, California. The UnitedNations Convention on Contracts for theInternational Sale of Goods shall notapply.

7. Assignment• You may not resell, assign, or transfer this

Agreement or any of your rights orobligations, except in totality, inconnection with your permanent transferof the TeleNav Software, and expresslyconditioned upon the new user of theTeleNav Software agreeing to be boundby the terms and conditions of thisAgreement. Any such sale, assignmentor transfer that is not expressly permittedunder this paragraph will result inimmediate termination of this Agreement,without liability to TeleNav, in which caseyou and all other parties shallimmediately cease all use of the TeleNavSoftware. Notwithstanding the foregoing,TeleNav may assign this Agreement toany other party at any time withoutnotice, provided the assignee remainsbound by this Agreement.

8. Miscellaneous

8.1This Agreement constitutes the entireagreement between TeleNav and you withrespect to the subject matter hereof.

8.2Except for the limited licenses expresslygranted in this Agreement, TeleNav retainsall right, title and interest in and to theTeleNav Software, including withoutlimitation all related intellectual propertyrights. No licenses or other rights which arenot expressly granted in this Agreement areintended to, or shall be, granted or conferredby implication, statute, inducement, estoppelor otherwise, and TeleNav and its suppliersand licensors hereby reserve all of theirrespective rights other than the licensesexplicitly granted in this Agreement.

8.3By using the TeleNav Software, you consentto receive from TeleNav all communications,including notices, agreements, legallyrequired disclosures or other information inconnection with the TeleNav Software(collectively, "Notices") electronically.TeleNav may provide such Notices by posting

them on TeleNav's Website or bydownloading such Notices to your wirelessdevice. If you desire to withdraw your consentto receive Notices electronically, you mustdiscontinue your use of the TeleNavSoftware.

8.4TeleNav's or your failure to requireperformance of any provision shall not affectthat party's right to require performance atany time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of anybreach or default of this Agreementconstitute a waiver of any subsequent breachor default or a waiver of the provision itself.

8.5If any provision herein is held unenforceable,then such provision will be modified to reflectthe intention of the parties, and the remainingprovisions of this Agreement will remain infull force and effect.

364


Appendices

8.6The headings in this Agreement are forconvenience of reference only, will not bedeemed to be a part of this Agreement, andwill not be referred to in connection with theconstruction or interpretation of thisAgreement. As used in this Agreement, thewords "include" and "including" andvariations thereof, will not be deemed to beterms of limitation, but rather will be deemedto be followed by the words "withoutlimitation".

9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions• The Telenav Software utilizes map and

other data licensed to Telenav by thirdparty vendors for the benefit of you andother end users. This Agreement includesend-user terms applicable to thesecompanies (included at the end of thisAgreement), and thus your use of theTelenav Software is also subject to suchterms. You agree to comply with thefollowing additional terms andconditions, which are applicable toTelenav’s third party vendor licensors::

9.1 End User Terms Required by HERENorth America, LLCThe data (“Data”) is provided for yourpersonal, internal use only and not for resale.It is protected by copyright, and is subject tothe following terms and conditions which areagreed to by you, on the one hand, andTelenav (“Telenav”) and its licensors(including their licensors and suppliers) onthe other hand.© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.The Data for areas of Canada includesinformation taken with permission fromCanadian authorities, including: © HerMajesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada PostCorporation, GeoBase®, © Department ofNatural Resources Canada.HERE holds a non-exclusive license from theUnited States Postal Service® to publish andsell ZIP+4® information.©United States Postal Service® 2014. Pricesare not established, controlled or approvedby the United States Postal Service®. Thefollowing trademarks and registrations areowned by the USPS: United States PostalService, USPS, and ZIP+4

The Data for Mexico includes certain datafrom Instituto Nacional de Estadística yGeografía.

Terms and ConditionsPermitted Use. You agree to use this Datatogether with the Telenav Software solelyfor the internal business and personalpurposes for which you were licensed, andnot for service bureau, time-sharing or othersimilar purposes. Accordingly, but subject tothe restrictions set forth in the followingparagraphs, you agree not to otherwisereproduce, copy, modify, decompile,disassemble, create any derivative works of,or reverse engineer any portion of this Data,and may not transfer or distribute it in anyform, for any purpose, except to the extentpermitted by mandatory laws.Restrictions. Except where you have beenspecifically licensed to do so by Telenav, andwithout limiting the preceding paragraph, youmay not use this Data (a) with any products,systems, or applications installed orotherwise connected to or in communicationwith vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation,positioning, dispatch, real time routeguidance, fleet management or similarapplications; or (b) with or in communication

365


Appendices

with any positioning devices or any mobile orwireless-connected electronic or computerdevices, including without limitation cellularphones, palmtop and handheld computers,pagers, and personal digital assistants orPDAs.Warning. The Data may contain inaccurateor incomplete information due to the passageof time, changing circumstances, sourcesused and the nature of collectingcomprehensive geographic data, any of whichmay lead to incorrect results.No Warranty. This Data is provided to you“as is,” and you agree to use it at your ownrisk. Telenav and its licensors (and theirlicensors and suppliers) make no guarantees,representations or warranties of any kind,express or implied, arising by law orotherwise, including but not limited to,content, quality, accuracy, completeness,effectiveness, reliability, fitness for aparticular purpose, usefulness, use or resultsto be obtained from this Data, or that theData or server will be uninterrupted orerror-free.

Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND ITSLICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORSAND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANYWARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OFQUALITY, PERFORMANCE,MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE ORNON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,Territories and Countries do not allow certainwarranty exclusions, so to that extent theabove exclusion may not apply to you.Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND ITSLICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORSAND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TOYOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMANDOR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATUREOF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND ORACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY ORDAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICHMAY RESULT FROM THE USE ORPOSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; ORFOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHERDIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIALOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISINGOUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USETHIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THEINFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESETERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN ANACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASEDON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS

LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SomeStates, Territories and Countries do not allowcertain liability exclusions or damageslimitations, so to that extent the above maynot apply to you.Export Control. You shall not export fromanywhere any part of the Data or any directproduct thereof except in compliance with,and with all licenses and approvals requiredunder, applicable export laws, rules andregulations, including but not limited to thelaws, rules and regulations administered bythe Office of Foreign Assets Control of theU.S. Department of Commerce and theBureau of Industry and Security of the U.S.Department of Commerce. To the extent thatany such export laws, rules or regulationsprohibit HERE from complying with any of itsobligations hereunder to deliver or distributeData, such failure shall be excused and shallnot constitute a breach of this Agreement.Entire Agreement. These terms andconditions constitute the entire agreementbetween Telenav (and its licensors, includingtheir licensors and suppliers) and youpertaining to the subject matter hereof, andsupersedes in their entirety any and allwritten or oral agreements previously existingbetween us with respect to such subjectmatter.

366


Appendices

Governing Law. The above terms andconditions shall be governed by the laws ofthe State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”where European HERE Data is used], withoutgiving effect to (i) its conflict of lawsprovisions, or (ii) the United NationsConvention for Contracts for the InternationalSale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded.You agree to submit to the jurisdiction of theState of Illinois [insert “The Netherlands”where European HERE Data is used] for anyand all disputes, claims and actions arisingfrom or in connection with the Data providedto you hereunder.Government End Users. If the Data is beingacquired by or on behalf of the United Statesgovernment or any other entity seeking orapplying rights similar to those customarilyclaimed by the United States government,this Data is a “commercial item” as that termis defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, islicensed in accordance with these End-UserTerms, and each copy of Data delivered orotherwise furnished shall be marked andembedded as appropriate with the following“Notice of Use,” and shall be treated inaccordance with such Notice:

NOTICE OF USE

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425 WestRandolph Street, Chicago, Illinois 60606

This Data is a commercial item as definedin FAR 2.101 and is subject to these End-User Terms under which this Data was

provided.

© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.

If the Contracting Officer, federal governmentagency, or any federal official refuses to usethe legend provided herein, the ContractingOfficer, federal government agency, or anyfederal official must notify HERE prior toseeking additional or alternative rights in theData.

Gracenote® CopyrightCD and music-related data from Gracenote,Inc., copyright©

2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software,copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. Thisproduct and service may practice one or moreof the following U.S. Patents 5,987,525;6,061,680; 6,154,773; 6,161,132; 6,230,192;6,230,207; 6.240,459; 6,330,593 and otherpatents issued or pending. Some servicessupplied under license from Open Globe, Inc.for U.S. Patent 6,304,523.Gracenote and CDDB are registeredtrademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenotelogo and logotype, and the "Powered byGracenote™" logo are trademarks ofGracenote.

Gracenote® End User License Agreement(EULA)This device contains software fromGracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell StreetEmeryville, California 94608 ("Gracenote").The software from Gracenote (the"Gracenote Software") enables this deviceto do disc and music file identification andobtain music-related information, includingname, artist, track, and title information("Gracenote Data") from online servers("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform otherfunctions. You may use Gracenote Data onlyby means of the intended End User functionsof this device. This device may contain

367


Appendices

content belonging to Gracenote's providers.If so, all of the restrictions set forth hereinwith respect to Gracenote Data shall alsoapply to such content and such contentproviders shall be entitled to all of thebenefits and protections set forth herein thatare available to Gracenote. You agree thatyou will use the content from Gracenote("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data, theGracenote Software, and Gracenote Serversfor your own personal, non-commercial useonly. You agree not to assign, copy, transferor transmit the Gracenote Content,Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data(except in a Tag associated with a music file)to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USEOR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTESOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTEDHEREIN.You agree that your non-exclusive licensesto use the Gracenote Content, GracenoteData, the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers will terminate if youviolate these restrictions. If your licensesterminate, you agree to cease any and all useof the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data,the Gracenote Software, and GracenoteServers.

Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights inGracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,and the Gracenote Servers and GracenoteContent, including all ownership rights. Underno circumstances will either Gracenotebecome liable for any payment to you for anyinformation that you provide, including anycopyrighted material or music fileinformation. You agree that Gracenote mayenforce its respective rights, collectively orseparately, under this agreement against you,directly in each company's own name.Gracenote uses a unique identifier to trackqueries for statistical purposes. The purposeof a randomly assigned numeric identifier isto allow Gracenote to count queries withoutknowing anything about who you are. Formore information, see the web page atwww.gracenote.com for the GracenotePrivacy Policy.THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEMOF GRACENOTE DATA AND THEGRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TOYOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKESANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES,EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THEACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATAFROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS ORGRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTECOLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVETHE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR

CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES'RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OFGRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIESFOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMSSUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS MADE THATEITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTESERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE OR THAT THEFUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTESOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS WILLBE UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOTOBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANYENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPESTHAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TOPROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TODISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES ATANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALLWARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHERGRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTSTHAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OFTHE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANYGRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILLGRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANYCONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTALDAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS ORLOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASONWHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.

368


Appendices

FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-LIC: 216B-SYNCG3-LThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and(2) this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

WARNINGChanges or modifications notexpressively approved by the partyresponsible for compliance could void

the user's authority to operate theequipment. The term "IC" before the radiocertification number only signifies thatIndustry Canada technical specificationswere met.

The antenna used for this transmitter mustnot be co-located or operating in conjunctionwith any other antenna or transmitter.

369


Appendices

370


AA/C

See: Climate Control..............................................105About This Manual................................................7

Protecting the Environment.....................................7ABS

See: Brakes................................................................150ABS driving hints

See: Hints on Driving With Anti-LockBrakes.....................................................................150

Accessories..........................................................317Exterior style...............................................................317Interior style................................................................317Lifestyle........................................................................317Peace of mind............................................................317

AccessoriesSee: Replacement Parts Recommendation......11

ACCSee: Using Adaptive Cruise Control..................167

Active Park Assist..............................................158Automatic Steering into Parking Space..........159Deactivating the Park Assist Feature...............160Troubleshooting the System................................161Using Active Park Assist........................................158

Adaptive Headlamps.........................................75Adjusting the Headlamps.............................258

Horizontal Aim Adjustment................................259Vertical Aim Adjustment......................................258

Adjusting the Pedals.........................................68

Adjusting the Steering Wheel........................65Easy Entry and Exit Feature...................................65End of Travel Position..............................................65Memory Feature........................................................65

AFSSee: Adaptive Headlamps......................................75

Airbag Disposal...................................................45Air Conditioning

See: Climate Control..............................................105Air Filter

See: Changing the Engine Air Filter..................262Alarm

See: Anti-Theft Alarm.............................................64All-Wheel Drive..................................................143Ambient Lighting.................................................77Anti-Theft Alarm................................................64

Arming the Alarm......................................................64Disarming the Alarm................................................64

Appendices.........................................................352Audible Warnings and Indicators..................87

Headlamps On Warning Chime...........................88Keyless Warning Alert..............................................87Parking Brake On Warning Chime......................88

Audio Control.......................................................65MEDIA............................................................................66Seek, Next or Previous............................................66

Audio System......................................................313General Information................................................313

Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/FM/CD................................................................314

Autolamps.............................................................72Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps..........72

Automatic Climate Control...........................105Automatic High Beam Control.......................74

Activating the System..............................................74Manually Overriding the System..........................75

Automatic Transmission................................140Automatic Transmission Adaptive

Learning..................................................................142Brake-Shift Interlock................................................141If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or

Snow........................................................................142SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission............141Understanding the Positions of Your

Automatic Transmission..................................140Automatic Transmission Fluid

Check.................................................................2506F50/6F55 Transmission...................................250

Autowipers............................................................69Auxiliary Power Points.....................................124

110 Volt AC Power Point.........................................12412 Volt DC Power Point...........................................124Locations.....................................................................124

AWDSee: All-Wheel Drive...............................................143

BBattery

See: Changing the 12V Battery...........................255Blind Spot Information System....................179

Switching the System Off and On.....................181System Errors.............................................................181Using the System....................................................180

371


Index

Bonnet LockSee: Opening and Closing the Hood...............240

Booster Seats.......................................................23Types of Booster Seats...........................................23

Brake Fluid Check.............................................254Brakes....................................................................150

General Information...............................................150Breaking-In.........................................................208Bulb Specification Chart...............................260

CCabin Air Filter....................................................108California Proposition 65..................................10Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L

Ecoboost™......................................................302Specifications..........................................................303

Capacities and Specifications - 3.7L.........307Specifications..........................................................308

Capacities and Specifications....................296Car Wash

See: Cleaning the Exterior...................................264Center Console...................................................126Changing a Bulb...............................................259

Front Fog Lamp.......................................................259High-Intensity Discharge Headlamps.............259LED Lamps................................................................259License Plate Lamp...............................................259

Changing a Fuse................................................237Fuses............................................................................237

Changing a Road Wheel................................289Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly

Information..........................................................289Stowing the flat tire...............................................293Tire Change Procedure..........................................291

Changing the 12V Battery..............................255Battery Management System............................256

Changing the Engine Air Filter.....................262Changing the Wiper Blades..........................257

Changing the Windshield Wiper Blades.........257Checking MyKey System Status....................53Checking the Wiper Blades...........................257Child Restraint and Seatbelt

Maintenance......................................................34Child Restraint Positioning..............................25Child Safety............................................................15

General Information..................................................15Child Safety Locks...............................................27

Left-Hand Side...........................................................27Right-Hand Side.........................................................27

Cleaning Leather Seats..................................267Cleaning Products............................................263Cleaning the Alloy Wheels...........................268Cleaning the Engine........................................265Cleaning the Exterior......................................264

Exterior Chrome Parts...........................................264Exterior Plastic Parts.............................................264Stripes or Graphics.................................................264Underbody................................................................264

Cleaning the Instrument Panel andInstrument Cluster Lens.............................266

Cleaning the Interior.......................................266

Cleaning the Windows and WiperBlades................................................................265

Clearing All MyKeys............................................52Climate Control.................................................105Climate Controlled Seats................................115

Cooled Seats..............................................................116Heated Seats..............................................................115

Collision Warning System..............................187PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION.................................187

Coolant CheckSee: Engine Coolant Check.................................247

Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator............44Creating a MyKey.................................................51

Programming/Changing ConfigurableSettings.....................................................................51

Cross Traffic Alert..............................................182False Alerts................................................................186Switching the System Off and On....................186System Errors............................................................186System Lights, Messages and Audible

Alerts.......................................................................185System Limitations.................................................185Using the System.....................................................182

Cruise Control......................................................66Principle of Operation............................................166Type 1.............................................................................66Type 2.............................................................................67

Cruise controlSee: Using Cruise Control.....................................166

Customer Assistance.......................................216

372


Index

DData Recording.......................................................9

Event Data Recording.................................................9Service Data Recording.............................................9

Daytime Running Lamps..................................73Direction Indicators............................................76

Lane Change................................................................76Drive Control.......................................................190

LINCOLN DRIVE CONTROL.................................190Driver Alert............................................................174

Using Driver Alert......................................................174Driver and Passenger Airbags........................38

Children and Airbags................................................39Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating

Adjustment.............................................................38Driving Aids..........................................................174Driving Hints.......................................................208Driving Through Water...................................208DRL

See: Daytime Running Lamps...............................73

EEconomical Driving.........................................208Emission Control System................................137

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II).........................138Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance

(I/M) Testing.........................................................138End User License Agreement......................352

VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSEAGREEMENT (EULA) ......................................352

Engine Block Heater.........................................130Using the Engine Block Heater.............................131

Engine Coolant Check.....................................247Adding Engine Coolant..........................................247Checking the Engine Coolant.............................247Recycled Engine Coolant.....................................248Severe Climates......................................................248What You Should Know About Fail-Safe

Cooling...................................................................248Engine Immobilizer

See: Passive Anti-Theft System..........................63Engine Oil Check...............................................245

Adding Engine Oil....................................................245Engine Oil Dipstick...........................................245Engine Specifications - 3.5L

Ecoboost™......................................................296Drivebelt Routing....................................................296

Engine Specifications - 3.7L..........................297Drivebelt Routing.....................................................297

Environment..........................................................14Essential Towing Checks..............................204

Before Towing a Trailer.........................................205Hitches........................................................................204Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal

Watercraft (PWC).............................................205Safety Chains...........................................................204Trailer Brakes............................................................204Trailer Lamps...........................................................204When Towing a Trailer..........................................205

Event Data RecordingSee: Data Recording...................................................9

Export Unique Options......................................13

Extended Service Plan (ESP).......................319EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (CANADA

ONLY).....................................................................320EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (U.S.

Only)........................................................................319Exterior Mirrors.....................................................79

Auto-Dimming Feature...........................................80Blind Spot Monitor.....................................................81Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors.....................................79Heated Exterior Mirrors...........................................80Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors...............................80Memory Mirrors..........................................................80Power Exterior Mirrors..............................................79

FFastening the Seatbelts...................................29

Safety Belt Extension Assembly...........................31Safety Belt Locking Modes....................................30Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy................29

Floor Mats...........................................................209Fog Lamps - Front

See: Front Fog Lamps..............................................75Foot Pedals

See: Adjusting the Pedals......................................68Front Fog Lamps.................................................75Front Parking Aid................................................157Front Passenger Sensing System.................39Fuel and Refueling............................................132Fuel Consumption............................................136

Calculating Fuel Economy...................................136Filling the Tank..........................................................136

373


Index

Fuel Filler Funnel Location.............................133Fuel Filter.............................................................255Fuel Quality..........................................................132

Choosing the Right Fuel........................................132Fuel Shutoff.........................................................212Fuses.....................................................................223Fuse Specification Chart...............................223

Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel..............231Power Distribution Box..........................................223

GGarage Door Opener

See: Universal Garage Door Opener..................119Gauges....................................................................84General Information on Radio

Frequencies.......................................................46Intelligent Access......................................................46

General Maintenance Information..............321Multi-Point Inspection..........................................324Owner Checks and Services...............................322Protecting Your Investment.................................321Why Maintain Your Vehicle?................................321Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your

Dealership?............................................................321Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and

Canada...............................................................219Getting the Services You Need....................216

Away From Home....................................................216Global Opening and Closing...........................79

Closing the Windows...............................................79Opening the Windows.............................................79

HHandbrake

See: Parking Brake....................................................151Hazard Warning Flashers................................212Headlamp Adjusting

See: Adjusting the Headlamps..........................258Headlamp Exit Delay.........................................73Head Restraints.................................................109

Adjusting the Head Restraint...............................110Tilting Head Restraints ...........................................111

Heated Steering Wheel.....................................67Heated Windows and Mirrors.......................107

Heated Exterior Mirror............................................107Heated Rear Window.............................................107

HeatingSee: Climate Control..............................................105

Hill Start Assist....................................................151Switching the System On and Off.....................152Using Hill Start Assist..............................................151

Hints on Controlling the InteriorClimate..............................................................106Cooling the Interior Quickly..................................107General Hints............................................................106Heating the Interior Quickly..................................107Recommended Settings for Cooling ...............107Recommended Settings for Heating................107Side Window Defogging in Cold

Weather..................................................................107Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock

Brakes.................................................................150

Hood LockSee: Opening and Closing the Hood...............240

IIn California (U.S. Only)...................................217Information Display Control............................67Information Displays.........................................89

General Information.................................................89Information Messages......................................95

Adaptive Cruise Control..........................................95AdvanceTrac™...........................................................95Alarm.............................................................................96Automatic Engine Shutdown...............................96AWD...............................................................................96Battery and Charging System...............................97Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert

System......................................................................97Brake System..............................................................98Collision Warning System......................................98Doors and Locks........................................................99Fuel.................................................................................99Keys and Intelligent Access...................................99Lane Keeping System............................................100Maintenance...............................................................101MyKey...........................................................................102Park Aid.......................................................................102Power Steering.........................................................103Seats.............................................................................103Tire Pressure Monitoring System......................104Transmission.............................................................104

374


Index

Installing Child Restraints.................................17Child Seats.....................................................................17Using Lap and Shoulder Belts................................17Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren

(LATCH)...................................................................20Using Tether Straps...................................................21

Instrument Cluster.............................................84Instrument Lighting Dimmer...........................73Interior Lamps......................................................76

Front Row Map Lamps............................................76Second Row Map Lamps........................................77

Interior Luggage CompartmentRelease.................................................................61

Interior Mirror.........................................................81Auto-Dimming Mirror................................................81

Introduction.............................................................7

JJump Starting the Vehicle..............................213

Connecting the Jumper Cables...........................213Jump Starting............................................................214Preparing Your Vehicle...........................................213Removing the Jumper Cables.............................214

KKeyless Entry........................................................59

SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRYKEYPAD....................................................................59

Keyless Starting..................................................127Ignition Modes...........................................................127

Keys and Remote Controls.............................46

LLane Keeping System......................................175

Switching the System On and Off.....................175Lighting Control....................................................71

Headlamp Flasher.....................................................72High Beams...................................................................71

Lighting.....................................................................71General Information...................................................71

Lincoln Automotive Financial Services........11Load Carrying......................................................192Load Limit............................................................192

Vehicle Loading - with and without aTrailer.......................................................................192

Locking and Unlocking.....................................56Activating Intelligent Access.................................56Autolock Feature (If Enabled)..............................57Battery Saver..............................................................58Illuminated Entry.......................................................58Illuminated Exit..........................................................58Luggage Compartment Release.........................58Power Door Locks.....................................................56Remote Control.........................................................56Smart Unlocks............................................................57

Locks.......................................................................56Lug Nuts

See: Changing a Road Wheel............................289

MMaintenance......................................................240

General Information..............................................240Media Hub............................................................316Memory Function...............................................114

Easy Entry and Exit Feature..................................115Linking a Preset Position to Your Remote

Control or Intelligent Access Key...................115Saving a Preset Position.........................................114

Message CenterSee: Information Displays......................................89

MirrorsSee: Heated Windows and Mirrors....................107See: Windows and Mirrors.....................................78

Mobile Communications Equipment...........12Moonroof...............................................................82

Bounce-Back..............................................................82Opening and Closing the Moonroof...................82Opening and Closing the Sunscreen.................82Venting the Moonroof..............................................83

Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Ecoboost™..........298Motorcraft Parts - 3.7L...................................299MyKey Troubleshooting....................................54MyKey™.................................................................50

Principle of Operation.............................................50

NNormal Scheduled Maintenance...............325

Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™..............................325Maintenance Intervals..........................................326

375


Index

OOil Change Indicator Reset...........................246Oil Check

See: Engine Oil Check...........................................245Opening and Closing the Hood..................240

Closing the Hood......................................................241Opening the Hood..................................................240

Ordering Additional Owner'sLiterature..........................................................220Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual..............220

Overhead Console............................................126

PParking Aids........................................................156

Principle of Operation............................................156Parking Brake.......................................................151Passive Anti-Theft System.............................63

SecuriLock....................................................................63PATS

See: Passive Anti-Theft System..........................63Pedals.....................................................................68Perchlorate..............................................................11Personal Safety System™..............................36

How Does the Personal Safety SystemWork?.......................................................................36

Post-Crash Alert System................................215Power Door Locks

See: Locking and Unlocking..................................56

Power Seats..........................................................111Multi-Contour Front Seats With Active Motion

(If Equipped)..........................................................113Power Lumbar............................................................113

Power Steering Fluid Check.........................254Power Windows...................................................78

Accessory Delay.........................................................78Bounce-Back...............................................................78One-Touch Down......................................................78One-Touch Up............................................................78Window Lock...............................................................78

Protecting the Environment............................14

RRear Parking Aid................................................156Rear Seat Armrest..............................................117

Armrest pass-through.............................................117Rear View Camera............................................162

Using the Rear View Camera System..............163Rear View Camera

See: Rear View Camera.........................................162Recommended Towing Weights................202Refueling...............................................................134

Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System......................135Remote Control...................................................47

Car Finder.....................................................................48Intelligent Access Key..............................................47Remote Start..............................................................48Replacing the Battery...............................................47Sounding a Panic Alarm.........................................48

Remote Start......................................................108Automatic Settings................................................108

Repairing Minor Paint Damage....................267Replacement Parts Recommendation.........11

Collision Repairs..........................................................12Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical

Repairs........................................................................11Warranty on Replacement Parts..........................12

Replacing a Lost Key or RemoteControl.................................................................49

Reporting Safety Defects (CanadaOnly)....................................................................221

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.Only)..................................................................220

Roadside Assistance.........................................211Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside

Assistance...............................................................211Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside Assistance

Program Coverage..............................................212Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside

Assistance..............................................................212Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting

Roadside Assistance...........................................211Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using

Roadside Assistance...........................................211Roadside Emergencies.....................................211Running-In

See: Breaking-In......................................................208Running Out of Fuel..........................................133

Adding Fuel From a Portable FuelContainer...............................................................134

Filling a Portable Fuel Container........................133

376


Index

SSafety Canopy™.................................................42Safety Precautions............................................132Scheduled Maintenance Record................332Scheduled Maintenance.................................321Seatbelt Height Adjustment............................31Seatbelt Reminder.............................................33

Belt-Minder™.............................................................33Seatbelts................................................................28

Principle of Operation..............................................28Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator

Chime...................................................................32Conditions of operation..........................................32

Seats......................................................................109Security...................................................................63Side Airbags...........................................................41Sitting in the Correct Position......................109Snow Chains

See: Using Snow Chains......................................285Special Notices.....................................................12

New Vehicle Limited Warranty..............................12On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)............................12Special Instructions...................................................12

Special Operating Conditions ScheduledMaintenance...................................................328Exceptions.................................................................330

Speed ControlSee: Cruise Control.................................................166

Stability Control.................................................154Principle of Operation............................................154

Starting a Gasoline Engine............................128Automatic Engine Shutdown..............................129Failure to Start..........................................................129Fast Restart................................................................128Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes.....................130Important Ventilating Information....................130Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is

Moving....................................................................130Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is

Stationary..............................................................129Starting and Stopping the Engine...............127

General Information................................................127Steering................................................................186

Electric Power Steering.........................................186Steering Wheel....................................................65Storage Compartments..................................126Sunroof

See: Moonroof............................................................82Sun Shades............................................................81Sun Visors...............................................................81

Illuminated Vanity Mirror.........................................81Supplementary Restraints System..............37

Principle of Operation..............................................37Symbols Glossary..................................................7

TTechnical Specifications

See: Capacities and Specifications.................296The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto

Line Program (U.S. Only)............................218

Tire Care...............................................................270Glossary of Tire Terminology...............................271Information About Uniform Tire Quality

Grading...................................................................270Information Contained on the Tire

Sidewall..................................................................272Temperature A B C...................................................271Traction AA A B C.....................................................271Treadwear..................................................................270

Tire Pressure Monitoring System...............286Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure Monitoring

System...................................................................287Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring

System ..................................................................287Tires

See: Wheels and Tires...........................................270Towing a Trailer..................................................201

Load Placement.......................................................201Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels.........206

Emergency Towing.................................................206Recreational Towing..............................................207

Towing...................................................................201Traction Control.................................................153

Principle of Operation............................................153Transmission Code Designation..................301Transmission......................................................140Transmission

See: Transmission...................................................140Transporting the Vehicle...............................206

377


Index

UUnder Hood Overview - 3.5L

Ecoboost™......................................................242Under Hood Overview - 3.7L........................244

Engine Shield............................................................245Universal Garage Door Opener.....................119

HomeLink Wireless Control System..................119Using Adaptive Cruise Control......................167

Blocked Sensor..........................................................172Changing the Set Speed.......................................170Detection Issues........................................................171Disengaging Adaptive Cruise Control...............170Following a Vehicle.................................................168Hilly Condition Usage.............................................170Low Speed Automatic Cancellation.................170Overriding Adaptive Cruise Control...................170Resuming the Set Speed......................................170Setting Adaptive Cruise Control.........................167Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed..................168Setting the Gap Distance.....................................169Switching the System Off......................................171Switching to Normal Cruise Control..................173

Using All-Wheel Drive......................................143Driving In Special Conditions With All-Wheel

Drive (AWD)..........................................................145Operating AWD Vehicles With Mismatched

Tires..........................................................................145Operating AWD Vehicles With Spare

Tires.........................................................................144

Using Cruise Control........................................166Switching Cruise Control Off...............................167Switching Cruise Control On...............................166

Using MyKey With Remote StartSystems...............................................................54

Using Snow Chains..........................................285Using Stability Control....................................155Using Traction Control.....................................153

Switching the System Off.....................................153System Indicator Lights and Messages...........153Using a Switch..........................................................153Using the Information Display Controls..........153

Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program(Canada Only).................................................219

VVehicle Care........................................................263

General Information...............................................263Vehicle Certification Label...........................300Vehicle Identification Number....................299Vehicle Storage.................................................268

Battery........................................................................269Body.............................................................................268Brakes.........................................................................269Cooling system........................................................269Engine.........................................................................269Fuel system...............................................................269General.......................................................................268Miscellaneous..........................................................269Removing Vehicle From Storage......................269Tires.............................................................................269

VentilationSee: Climate Control..............................................105

VINSee: Vehicle Identification Number.................299

Voice Control........................................................66

WWarning Lamps and Indicators.....................85

Adaptive Cruise Control..........................................85Anti-Lock Braking System.....................................85Battery...........................................................................85Brake System..............................................................85Cruise Control.............................................................85Direction Indicator.....................................................85Door Ajar.......................................................................85Engine Coolant Temperature...............................86Engine Oil.....................................................................86Fasten Safety Belt....................................................86Front Airbag................................................................86Front Fog Lamps.......................................................86Grade Assist................................................................86Heads Up Display......................................................86High Beam...................................................................86Low Fuel Level............................................................86Low Tire Pressure Warning....................................86Low Washer Fluid......................................................86Parking Lamps............................................................87Powertrain Fault.........................................................87Service Engine Soon.................................................87Stability Control.........................................................87Stability Control Off.................................................87

378


Index

Washer Fluid Check.........................................254Washers

See: Cleaning the Exterior...................................264See: Wipers and Washers......................................69

Waxing..................................................................265Wheel Nuts

See: Changing a Road Wheel............................289Wheels and Tires..............................................270

Technical Specifications......................................294Windows and Mirrors.........................................78Windshield Washers..........................................70Windshield Wipers.............................................69Wiper Blades

See: Checking the Wiper Blades........................257Wipers and Washers.........................................69Wrecker Towing

See: Transporting the Vehicle............................206

379


Index

GA5J 19A321 AA 2016 MKS owner.lincoln.com...

Documents

Transcript of GA5J 19A321 AA 2016 MKS owner.lincoln.com...